JP2022107715A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of facilitating diversification of a display mode displayed on image display means.

SOLUTION: A display control device 314 selects a display data table to be used according to a command from a voice lamp control device 313, and stores it in a display data table buffer 433b. Each time when drawing processing of one frame is completed, 1 is added to a pointer 433e. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, based on drawing contents prescribed in an address indicated by the pointer 433e, image contents to be drawn next are specified and a drawing list to be described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to an image controller 437, drawing of the image is instructed. Thus, according to update of the pointer 433e, drawing contents are specified in order prescribed in the display data table, so that images as prescribed in the display data table are displayed on a third pattern display device 281.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 28

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines are configured to be controlled by main control means and sub-control means. For example, while the main control of the game is performed by the main control means, the display control of the effect image on the image display means such as the liquid crystal display device provided in the game machine is performed by the sub control means.

2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, there has been a tendency to diversify the effect images displayed on the image display means in order to further improve the interest of the game.

JP-A-2006-223598

However, the conventional game machine has a problem that the processing may become complicated and large due to the diversification of the effect images.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and provides a game machine that can easily diversify the display modes of effect images and the like displayed on the image display means. It is intended to

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises main control means for performing main control of the game, sub-control means for operating based on commands transmitted from the main control means, and sub-control means for the main control means. image display means for displaying an image under the control of the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means includes image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means; first image storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of image information used for drawing an image by the drawing means; and predetermined display for dynamically displaying identification information on the image display means in response to a predetermined command received from the main control means. A first display specification means for specifying a mode from among a plurality of display modes; and a first specification information storage for storing first specification information defining drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing of each display mode for each screen. means, a first specifying means for specifying the first prescribed information corresponding to the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means, updating means updated every time a predetermined time elapses, and the updating means Each time the drawing is updated, based on the updated drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updating means, drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen is generated. An instruction information generating means and a measuring means capable of measuring time are provided, and the image drawing means draws images for one screen using image information based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. An image is drawn, and the display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the image display means is determined in advance for the time required from the start to the end of the dynamic display for each display mode. and the sub control means is used for dynamic continuous display of the identification information, which is continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed since the display was started in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means. When the command transmitted from the main control means is the predetermined command, the sub-control means receiving the predetermined command corresponds to the predetermined command. Dynamic display of identification information of time is performed in a specific display mode, and the required time is displayed regardless of which display mode of the required time is the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means. The display mode of the dynamic continuation display of the identification information, which is displayed continuously after the passage of time, is the same display mode, and the sub control means, when receiving a specific command from the main control means, confirmation display control means for confirming and displaying the identification information on the image display means; dynamic continuous display control means for starting the dynamic continuous display of the identification information when the identification information is not received; When a specific command is received, the dynamic continuation display of the identification information is ended, and the identification information is fixedly displayed.

The game machine according to claim 2 is the game machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means for operating based on the command transmitted from the main control means, and the image based on the control by the sub-control means. , wherein the sub-control means includes image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and image drawing means for drawing an image by the image drawing means. a first image storage means for storing a plurality of image information to be used; first display specifying means for specifying from among; first specifying information storage means for storing first specifying information specifying drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing of each display mode for each screen; and said first display. A first identifying means for identifying the first prescribed information corresponding to the predetermined display mode identified by the identifying means, an updating means for updating each time a predetermined time elapses, and each time the updating means is updated, the drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the updated drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updating means; and said image drawing means draws an image for one screen using image information based on said drawing instruction information generated by said drawing instruction information generating means. The display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means has a predetermined time required from the start to the end of the dynamic display for each display mode, and the sub-control means comprises specifying the first prescribed information used for dynamic continuous display of the identification information, which is to be displayed continuously when the required time has passed since the display is started in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means; When the command transmitted from the main control means is the predetermined command, the sub-control means receiving the predetermined command dynamically identifies the time corresponding to the predetermined command. Display is executed in a specific display mode, and regardless of the display mode of the required time specified by the first display specifying means, the display continues after the required time has passed. The display mode of the dynamic continuous display of the identification information is the same display mode, and the sub control means, when receiving a specific command from the main control means, displays the identification information on the image display means. confirmation display control means for confirming and displaying the information; and confirmation display control means for confirming and displaying the identification information when the specific command is not received even after the required time has passed since the display is started in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means. and dynamic continuous display control means for starting dynamic continuous display of information, wherein the fixed display control means receives a specific command from the main control means during the dynamic continuous display period of the identification information. Since the dynamic continuous display of the identification information is terminated and the final display of the identification information is performed, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

1 is a perspective view of a slot machine with its front door closed according to the first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine with its front door opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. FIG. 11 is an arrangement diagram showing a pattern arrangement of each reel; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized through a display window; It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode, the stop symbol corresponding to the winning mode, the probability of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a lottery table for betting 3, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a lottery table for betting 2, and (c) is 1. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a betting lottery table; 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a scanning area of a screen of an auxiliary display unit and a display area where an image is actually displayed on the screen; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of the main control unit; 4 is a flow chart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main controller; It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows lottery table setting processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing executed by an MPU of a main control device; 4 is a flow chart showing bonus state processing executed by the MPU of the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing display main processing executed by the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing start command processing executed by the MPU of the display control device; 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing executed by the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU of the display control device; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image when the power is turned on; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface B. FIG. It is an explanatory view explaining the back surface C. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an additional data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; 4 is a flow chart showing variation processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a vibration sensor input monitoring process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a pending ball number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a confirmation command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. and (c) is a flowchart showing a demonstration command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flow chart showing continuous notice command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; is. (a) is a flow chart showing frame button operation command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing pending image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; and (c) is a flowchart showing frame button operation processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 4 is a flow chart showing comparison processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 21, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when applied to a reel-type gaming machine, specifically a slot machine 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front door 12, and FIG. 1 is a front view of body 11; FIG.

The slot machine 10 rotates three reels 32L, 32M, and 32R with a plurality of symbols when a player inserts medals, which are game media, from a medal slot 45 and operates a start lever 41. When the player operates stop switches 42, 43, 44 provided corresponding to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are When the combination of symbols displayed by stopping is a predetermined combination, the player is given a privilege of giving a predetermined number of medals or a privilege of shifting to a game state.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed into a box shape with an open front as a whole by combining wooden panels, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall. The housing 11 may be made of a synthetic resin panel or a metal panel instead of being made of a wooden panel, or may be made of a synthetic resin material or a metal material to form an integral box shape. good too.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 .

A locking device 20 is provided on the back side of the front door 12 opposite to the opening/closing axis, and the front door 12 is locked by the locking device 20 so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加The position where the key cylinder 20 is provided is the thin upper part of the front door 12, and as a result, the versatile key cylinder 21 having a short overall length can be adopted. In this embodiment, the key cylinder 21 is Omlock (registered trademark), which has a high unauthorized unlocking prevention function.

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotated individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying, for example, a 504-pulse drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse). controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. 26R are configured so that they can be visually recognized at the upper, middle, and lower positions of 26R. Therefore, 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 is a lever that the player manually pushes (the direction of pushing is not limited) when starting a game, and the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted. Then, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate all at once (however, it does not have to be simultaneous).

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-like stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops.

At this time, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, there is only a stop mode in which the reached symbol that has reached the base position (in this embodiment, the lower position of each of the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R) is stopped as it is. Instead, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which it is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which it is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a stop mode in which it is stopped after sliding by three symbols. Five patterns are prepared, including a stop mode in which the vehicle is stopped after being turned on. As a result, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to stop in a predetermined stop manner from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated until the specified time (190 msec) elapses. It is possible to give the player an impression as if the pattern arrangement (hereinafter also referred to as a stop result) that stops within a visible range from 26L, 26M, and 26R is determined by the player's operation. In addition, by making it possible to slide up to four symbols, a combination of symbols corresponding to a prize mode (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, in which a lottery is won as much as possible within the specified time, can be selected. It is possible to stop on the effective line (see FIG. 6), and to avoid stopping on the effective line the combination of symbols corresponding to the prize modes that have not won the lottery.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The storage passage 47 is provided with an inserted medal detection device (not shown) for detecting passage of inserted medals. The output signal of the inserted medal detection device is input to the main controller 101, and the main controller 101 counts the number of medals based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection device. In addition, the movement of the inserted medals (the passing direction of the medals) is determined based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection device. It is configured to determine that there is a possibility that an illegal operation such as medal withdrawal has occurred, and to notify that a sensor error has occurred from an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, an auxiliary display section 65, etc., which will be described later. there is

The inserted medal detection device has a first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and a second inserted medal detection sensor, each of which is composed of a photocoupler having a pair of a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit (not shown) on both sides of a passing medal. 45b (see FIG. 8). The first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are arranged upstream and downstream in such a manner that they can simultaneously detect one passing medal. The detection sensors 45a and 45b are set to output a "Lo" signal when light is received and a "Hi" signal when light is blocked.

When the medals inserted by the player are guided to the storage passage 47 side by the selector 46, the medals pass through the inserted medal detection device. At this time, first, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a arranged on the upstream side first becomes a light shielding state and outputs a "Hi" signal, and then the second inserted medal detection sensor 45a arranged on the downstream side. 45b becomes a light shielding state and outputs a "Hi" signal, and the two inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b simultaneously detect medals. Then, when the medals further proceed downstream in the storage passage 47, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a disposed upstream first becomes a light receiving state and outputs a "Lo" signal, and then Then, the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b arranged on the downstream side becomes a light receiving state and outputs a "Lo" signal.

That is, when the medals normally pass through the inserted medal detection device, the signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b are such that the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a first becomes "Hi", and then the second inserted medal detection sensor 45a becomes "Hi". The detection sensor 45b becomes "Hi". After the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b simultaneously become "Hi", the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a becomes "Lo", and finally the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b becomes "Lo". When the signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b change at such timing, the main controller 101 determines that the medals have been inserted normally, and counts the number of inserted medals. Up.

On the other hand, if a medal is jammed while passing through the inserted medal sensor device, or if a medal is illegally pulled out, the signals output from the two inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b will be different from when the medal passes normally. change at different times. The main controller 101 monitors changes in the signals output from the inserted medal detection sensors 45a and 45b, and if the changes differ from the changes when the medals normally pass through the inserted medal detection device, the medals are detected. It is determined that there is clogging or illegality, and the occurrence of a sensor error is notified to the display control device 81, which will be described later, by means of an error command. When the display control device 81 is notified of the occurrence of the sensor error from the main control device 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65, etc. notify the occurrence of the sensor error.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 that stores medals and a payout device 53 that pays out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . The slot machine 10 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals, and the virtual medals are stored and stored. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under this condition, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals.

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit insertion switch 57 and a third credit insertion switch 58 are provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56 . The second credit insert switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals at once, and the third credit insert switch 58 is for inserting one virtual medal.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining payout number for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the bonus state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and notifying the state when the power is turned on or when an error occurs. Since it can be considered that this is due to the display section, it is called an auxiliary display section 65 in the present embodiment. An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 . Details of the display control device 81 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Above the medal tray 50, a lower plate 66 on which the model name, characters related to the game, etc. are displayed is attached. An ashtray 69 that can be turned downward on the front side is provided on the left side of the medal receiving tray 50 .

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 (see FIG. 8) therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main control device 101 which will be described later.

The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting various states of the slot machine 10 . The slot machine 10 has a function of backing up various data, and even in the event of a power failure, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure upon recovery from the power failure (recovery of power). It is possible. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a normal procedure, for example, when the game hall is closed, the state before the cut-off is stored, but if the power switch 71 is turned on while pressing the reset switch 72, the backup data is reset ( initialized). Further, when the reset switch 72 is pressed while the power switch 71 is on, the error state is reset.

The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the number of medals to be output. That is, the setting state of the slot machine 10 (setting of winning probability of each prize mode) is changed from "setting 1" to "setting 6" by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it by the hall manager or the like. ” can be changed. When the setting state is set to "Setting 1", a lottery for the winning mode (role) is performed so that the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out is the lowest, and when the setting state is set to "Setting 6", It is configured to perform a lottery for the winning mode so that the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out becomes the highest. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the setting state of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 106 for temporarily storing necessary data, a free-run counter 107 for generating random numbers, a port 104 for communicating with various devices, and a clock used for time counting and synchronization. It is provided with a main board including the circuit 103 and the like, and is configured such that the main board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing unit, thereby sealing the board box. Note that the box base and the box cover may be configured to be unopenably connected using a key member.

Next, referring to FIG. 5, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described. FIG. 5 is an arrangement diagram showing the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “7” symbol (eg, 20th on the left reel 32L), a “youth” symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 32L), and “ "Cherry" symbol (e.g. 17th on the left reel 32L), "Bell" symbol (e.g. 16th on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g. 15th on the left reel 32L), "Star" symbol (e.g. , 19th of the middle reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 5, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, five combination lines are set so as to connect positions where symbols are visible. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, combination lines set in the slot machine 10 will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R and the combination lines.

As shown in FIG. 6, an upper line L1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R, the middle pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the right A middle line L2 connecting the middle pattern of the reel 32R, a bottom line L3 connecting the bottom pattern of the left reel 32L, the bottom pattern of the middle reel 32M and the bottom pattern of the right reel 32R, the top pattern of the left reel 32L and the middle reel. A right-down line L4 connecting the middle symbols of the right reel 32R and the bottom symbols of the right reel 32R, and a right-rising line L5 connecting the bottom symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M and the top symbols of the right reel 32R are set. ing. Then, when the combination line that has been activated, that is, when the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated line, as a win, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. It is supposed to be granted.

The maximum number of combined lines may be 6 or more, or may be less than 5. Also, the maximum number of combined lines may be changed according to a predetermined condition. For example, a V (inverted V)-shaped line or an L-shaped line may be used as the effective line.

Next, referring to FIG. 7, the winning modes that the slot machine 10 can take, the stationary symbols on the active line that result in winning in each winning mode, the winning probability of each winning mode in the normal gaming state, and the The number of medals to be paid out when winning is established in the winning mode will be described. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode, the stop symbols, the probability of winning in the normal game state, and the number of medals to be paid out. In FIG. 7, the winning probability when the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set to "Setting 1" will be described as an example. Also, while maintaining the magnitude relationship of each winning probability determined by each winning mode and the number of medals inserted (number of bets), the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" Each winning probability is set so that

As shown in FIG. 7, there is a BB (Big Bonus) prize as a state transition prize that provides a player with a privilege of transitioning the game state. When the symbols "7", "7", and "7" are stopped on the effective line from the left side by side, the game state is given a privilege of shifting to a bonus state, which is a special game state, as BB winning. However, even if the "7" symbol stops on the activated line in the left, middle, and right positions, medals are not paid out. In other words, when a combination of "7" symbols is established on the activated line, the game only shifts to the bonus state. In other words, the "7" symbol can be said to be a state transition symbol for shifting the game state to the bonus state.

Here, the bonus state will be explained. The bonus state is composed of a plurality of RB (Regular Bonus) states, and the RB state is composed of 12 JAC games. The JAC game is a game in which the odds of winning a watermelon prize and a bell prize, which are minor prizes, are much higher than in the normal game state. When winning eight times during the JAC game, the RB state ends even before the JAC game is played 12 times. Also, the bonus state ends when the number of paid out medals reaches a predetermined number (250 in this embodiment). That is, when the BB win is established, the number of medals to be paid out at that time is 0, but when the game state of the gaming machine shifts to the bonus state in accordance with the BB win, the player is awarded 250 medals. It is guaranteed that the payout will be performed with a smaller number of inserted medals than in the normal game state. In addition, when the number of paid out medals reaches a predetermined number during the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state ends. This is a device for suppressing the gambling spirit of the player and ensuring the soundness of the game by setting an upper limit to the number of medals to be paid out during the bonus state. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the combination of symbols for transitioning to the RB state is not set, and the configuration is such that the transition to the RB state occurs immediately after the transition to the bonus state and immediately after the RB state ends. Therefore, it can be said that the bonus state is a game in which the game continuously shifts to the RB state until a predetermined number of medals are paid out.

This slot machine 10 supports 1 bet, 2 bets, and 3 bets as the number of inserted medals (bet number) at the start of the game. is established) is set differently according to the number of inserted medals (number of bets) inserted at the start of the game. Specifically, in the case of the 1-coin and 2-coin bets, the probability of winning a BB prize is set to 1/65536, and in the case of the 3-coin bet, it is set to 1/256. In this way, the probability of winning a BB prize in the normal game state is set to be lower in the case of the 1-coin and 2-coin bets than in the 3-coin bet.

Next, there are a watermelon prize and a bell prize as small winnings for which medals are paid out. If you stop side by side with "Watermelon" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol from the left on the active line, you will win a watermelon prize. If it stops in line with the "bell" symbol, the bell prize is established. When the game is executed with a 3-coin stake, 12 medals are paid out if a watermelon win is established, and 6 medals are paid out if a bell win is established. In addition, when the game is executed with one bet or two bet, three medals are paid out if a watermelon win or a bell win is established. In addition, the probability of winning a watermelon prize in the normal game state is set to 1/65536 in the case of 1-coin and 2-coin bets, and is set to 1/8 in the case of 3-coin bets. On the other hand, the probability of winning a bell prize in the normal game state is set to 1/65536 in the case of 1-ply and 2-ply, and is set to 1/5.1 in the case of 3-ply. In this way, the watermelon prize and the bell prize are set to be easily established in the case of the 3-price bet, whereas in the case of the 1-price and 2-price bets, the establishment of these prizes rarely occurs. set to not.

On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, a special small winning prize is prepared only when the game is executed with one bet or two bets, or only when the game is executed with one bet. . Special child actor wins include Cherry Bell wins and 7 Bell wins. Of these, the cherry bell winning prize is a special small winning prize that is established only in the case of betting 1 or 2, and the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M are on the effective line. 3 medals are paid out. In addition, 7 bell winning is a special small combination winning that is established only in the case of betting one, and when the "7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stop on the effective line. It is established and two medals are paid out.

Here, for both the cherry bell winning prize and the 7 bell winning prize, the symbols stopped on the active line of the right reel 32R may be any symbols. In addition, when the game is executed with a 3-coin bet, even if the "watermelon" symbol or "7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stop on the activated line, the cherry bell wins. Alternatively, it is determined as a failure without establishing a 7-bell prize. Similarly, when the game is executed with a double bet, even if the "7" symbol on the reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stop on the activated line, the 7 bell winning is not established. , is determined as an outlier. In addition, when the game is executed with a 3-coin wager, the "cherry" symbol or "7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M are not stopped on the active line at the same time, and the cherry prize is won. It may be constructed so that the 7-bell prize is not established. Similarly, when the game is executed with two bets, the "7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M are not stopped on the active line at the same time, so that the cherry winning is not established. can be configured to

The winning probability of winning a cherry bell in the normal game state is set to approximately 1/6.0 in the case of one-coin bet, and is set to approximately 1/1.8 in the case of two-coin bet. In addition, the winning probability of winning 7 bells in the normal game state is set to about 1/6.0 with respect to only one bet.

Now, in conventional slot machines, when a game is played with one or two bets, the probability of receiving various benefits is extremely low compared to when a game is played with three bets. There was also a 3-ply dedicated machine that could not be played with 1-ply or 2-ply, but could be played only with 3-ply. This is done as a device to increase the operating rate of the slot machines in the hall, and is intended to allow the player to play one game with three tokens as much as possible.

However, the number of medals lent out from the hall before the game is not necessarily a multiple of 3, and is generally lent out in units of 50, so there is a high probability that the player will receive less than 3 medals. could have remained. If less than 3 tokens remain in the player's hand, the game cannot be played with the remaining tokens in the special machine for 3 tokens, and the slot machine is capable of placing 1 token or 2 tokens. Also, since the probability of awarding a privilege is low, there is a risk that the medals will be left in the hall or the player will take the remaining medals home. If the medals are left in the hall, the player loses the value of the medals, and if the player takes back the remaining medals, the medals lent out in the hall cannot be collected, and furthermore, the game is played. There is also a risk that a player may play a game using medals brought back from another hall, and there is a problem that the hall side also suffers damage.

On the other hand, in the present slot machine 10, when the game is played with two bets, a cherry bell win is established with a high probability of about 1/1.8, and when the game is played with one bet, In this case, a cherry bell win is established with a high probability of about 1/6.0, and three medals are paid out. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, even if the probability of winning a BB prize is extremely low in the case of betting 1 or 2, when the player has 1 or 2 medals left. In addition, it is possible to make the player execute the game with one bet or two bet while giving the player a feeling of anticipation that a cherry bell winning award in which three medals are paid out will be established. As a result of this game, when a cherry bell win is established, three medals are paid out. The game can be played while having a sense of anticipation of winning the BB prize. Also, even if the game is lost, the game can be ended without leaving any extra medals for the player.

In addition, when the game is played with a one-coin bet, there is a high probability of about 1/6.0 that 7 bells are won and two medals are paid out. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, when one medal is left in the player's hand, three medals are paid out, and two medals are paid out along with the expectation that the cherry bell win will be established. It is possible to allow the player to execute the game with one bet while giving the player a feeling of anticipation that the 7-bell prize will be established. As a result of this game, when 7 bells are won, 2 medals are paid out, so the player can use the 2 medals to win a cherry bell prize in which 3 more medals are paid out. You can enjoy the game while feeling the expectation of winning.

In this way, even if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the one or two medals are used to pay out three medals. A player can be made to play a game aiming at winning 7 bells for which medals are paid out. Therefore, the slot machine 10 can motivate the player to use up all the tokens.

Here, referring to FIG. 5 again, the reels 32L and 32M of the "cherry" symbol and "7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M for which the cherry bell winning prize and the 7 bell winning prize are established. Briefly describe the array position.

First, on the left reel 32L, the "cherry" symbols are arranged so that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower row first and the symbol that reaches the next one is 7 symbols. For example, the 3rd "cherry" symbol and the 10th "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the interval between them is 7 symbols. In addition, since numbers 0 and 20 of each reel are actually arranged adjacent to each other, the number 17 "cherry" symbol and number 3 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L are separated by 7 symbols. ing. On the other hand, the "7" symbol is also arranged so that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower row first and the symbol that reaches the next one is seven symbols on the left reel 32L. For example, the 6th "7" symbol and the 13th "7" symbol on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the interval between them is 7 symbols, and the 20th "7" symbol on the left reel 32L is arranged. The 6th "7" pattern is also arranged so that the interval between them is 7 patterns.

Thus, the "cherry" symbols and the "7" symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between similar symbols is 7 symbols. As described above, each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. Therefore, by adopting such a pattern arrangement, even if the left stop switch 42 is operated at any timing, when establishing a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize, the "cherry" pattern or the "7" pattern It can be stopped at any one of the upper, middle and lower positions of the display window 26L.

For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated when the number 3 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the "cherry" symbol can be stopped at the lower stage if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is. If the left stop switch 42 is operated when the number 4 "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols and then stopped, the number 10 " When the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 5th "bell" pattern of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols. If it is stopped later, the 10th "cherry" symbol can be stopped in the middle row.

Further, when the left stop switch 42 is operated when the number 6 "7" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the "7" symbol can be stopped at the lower stage if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is. If the left stop switch 42 is operated when the number 7 "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols and then stopped, the number 13 " 7" symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, and when the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 8th "replay" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, the left reel 32L is slid by 4 symbols. If it is stopped later, the 13th "7" symbol can be stopped in the middle row.

On the other hand, on the middle reel 32M, the "bell" symbols are arranged so that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower row first and the symbol that reaches the next one is 5 symbols or less. For example, the 0th "bell" symbol and the 5th "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M are arranged so that the interval between them is 5 symbols, and the 9th "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M. and the 12th "bell" pattern are arranged so that the interval between them is 3 patterns. In this way, the "bell" symbols are arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the intervals between similar symbols are 5 symbols or less. Even if it is done, the "bell" pattern can be stopped at the middle position of the display window 26M when establishing a cherry bell winning prize or a 7 bell winning prize.

For example, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the 11th "7" pattern of the middle reel 32M reaches the lower stage, this "bell" pattern can be stopped at the middle stage if the middle reel 32M is stopped as it is. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the number 12 "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M reaches the lower stage, if the middle reel 32M is slid by 4 symbols and then stopped, the number 17 " Bell" pattern can be stopped in the middle row.

In this way, even when the stop switches 42 and 43 are operated at any timing, the "cherry" pattern or the "7" pattern can be stopped in any of the upper, middle and lower stages of the display window 26L. Also, a "bell" pattern can be displayed in the middle of the display window 26M. Therefore, when a cherry bell winning prize or a 7 bell winning prize is won in the prize mode lottery, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 by the player, the stop symbol corresponding to the cherry bell winning prize or the 7 bell winning prize is displayed. Since the stop pattern can be displayed on any one of the middle line L2, the right-down line L4, and the right-up line L5 (see FIG. 6), it is possible to establish a cherry bell winning prize or a 7 bell winning prize without missing anything.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description is continued. As another prize mode that the slot machine 10 can take, there is provided a replay prize that is established when the machines stop side by side with 'replay' patterns, 'replay' patterns, and 'replay' patterns from the left on the effective line. When a replay win is established, medals are not paid out or state transition is performed, but the player can play the next game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. Therefore, when a replay win is established, the number of medals inserted in the game (number of bets) is paid out, that is, 1 medal in the case of 1 bet, 2 in the case of 2 bets, and 3 bets. In the case of , it can be considered that 3 medals are paid out. The probability of winning a replay prize in the normal gaming state is not limited to the number of medals inserted (number of bets), and is as high as about 1/7.3 in any of the 1, 2, and 3 bets. set to probability. By establishing this replay prize with a high probability, it is replayed that you want to establish a BB prize or a special small role prize (Cherry Bell prize or 7 Bell prize) when playing a game with 1 or 2 bets. A sense of challenge can be given to the player.

As shown in FIG. 5, the "replay" symbols that establish a replay winning prize are arranged on the reels 32L and 32M such that the interval between the symbol that reaches the lower stage first and the symbol that reaches the next stage is five symbols or less. , 32R. For example, the 8th "replay" symbol and the 11th "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the interval between them is 3 symbols, and the 1st "replay" symbol and the 6th "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M are arranged. The "replay" symbols of the turn are arranged so that the interval between them is 5 symbols. In this way, the "replay" symbols are arranged on the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the interval between similar symbols is 5 symbols or less. As described above, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing at which the stop switches 42-44 are operated. is operated at any timing, the "replay" symbol can be stopped at the middle position of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R when the replay winning is established. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated when the number 3 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, if the left reel 32L is stopped as it is, the number 4 "replay" symbol is stopped in the middle row. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated when the number 1 "replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M reaches the lower stage, if the middle reel 32M is slid by 4 symbols and then stopped, the number 6 The "replay" pattern of can be stopped in the middle row. Therefore, when the replay winning prize is won, the "replay" symbol can be stopped at the middle line L2 (see FIG. 6) regardless of the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Therefore, it is possible to establish a replay winning prize without so-called omission.

In other cases, that is, when the combination of the symbols described above does not stop on the activated line, medals are not paid out and game state transitions are not performed at all, resulting in a loss. That is, the "youth" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and the "star" symbols on the middle reel 32M have nothing to do with winning. In other words, it can be said that each of the above symbols is a non-privilege symbol that is unrelated to the privilege given to the player. That is, the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided with privilege symbols related to winning, such as "Bell" symbols, and non-privilege symbols unrelated to winning, such as "young man" symbols. In addition, below, the combination of the symbols corresponding to each prize is also referred to as the winning symbol combination. For example, a combination of BB symbols is a combination of symbols that result in a BB prize, that is, a combination of "7" symbols, "7" symbols, and "7" symbols.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the probability of winning the BB prize when the game is played by inserting three medals is sufficiently higher than when the game is played by inserting one or two medals. Since it is set, it is possible to let the player play one game by inserting three medals while making the player expect that many medals will be paid out by establishing a BB prize. As a result, the medals are consumed quickly, and it is possible to increase the operating rate of the slot machines in the hall.

On the other hand, when the game is played by inserting one or two medals, the cherry bell winning with the number of medals paid out of three is set as a winning combination candidate, and the winning probability is set high. When one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the player expects that three medals will be paid out by winning a cherry bell prize, and one or two medals remaining in the hand. to play a single game. As a result, when three medals are paid out as a result of winning a Cherry Bell prize, the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting to win a BB prize. , the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Also, even if the result of the game played by inserting one or two medals is a loss, the game can be finished without leaving any extra medals for the player. In this manner, the slot machine 10 allows the player to enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. In addition, there are problems such as the player losing money by finishing the game without using the borrowed medals, the player taking back the remaining medals but not being able to collect the borrowed medals, or the player taking back the medals from another hole. It is possible to avoid the problem that the hall side suffers damage due to the use of medals by the players.

In addition, when the game is played by inserting one medal, the 7-bell winning with two medals paid out is also set as a winning combination candidate, and the probability of winning is set high, so that the player's hand has a high probability of winning. When one medal remains in the game, the player is made to expect that two medals will be paid out if 7 bells are won, and the player is made to insert the remaining one medal and play once. game can be played. As a result, when two medals are paid out as a result of winning a prize of seven bells, the player inserts the two medals and waits for a further three medals to be paid out in hopes of winning a prize of Cherry Bell. , you can enjoy one more game. Then, if the cherry bell win is established, the player can play the game by inserting the three paid-out medals while expecting the BB prize to be established. You can enjoy , and even if you are out, you can use up the medals. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals while giving the player further enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the lottery of the prize mode, if a cherry bell prize in which 3 medals are paid out or a 7 bell prize in which 2 medals are paid out is won, regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , the stop symbols can be stopped on the effective line without missing, and as a result of the lottery of the game started by the player with 1 and 2 bets, the cherry bell winning prize and the 7 bell winning prize were won as winning combinations. In this case, it is possible to reliably achieve the winning without relying on human manipulation. In addition, it is possible to allow the player to play the game in anticipation of achieving a Cherry Bell prize or a 7 Bell prize while aiming for other prizes (for example, a BB prize).

Here, the expected value of the number of tokens to be paid out in the normal game state in the case of one-coin bet and in the case of two-coin bet will be described. First, in the case of one-coin bet, the probability of winning a watermelon prize and a bell prize in the normal game state is set to 1/65536, and three medals are paid out when either prize is established. In addition, the probability of winning a cherry bell prize and a 7 bell prize in the normal gaming state is set to approximately 1/6.0, respectively, and if the cherry bell prize is established, 3 pieces, and if the 7 bell prize is established, , two medals are paid out. In addition, the probability of winning a replay prize in the normal gaming state is set to about 1/7.3, and when a replay prize is established, as described above, it is equivalent to paying out one medal. can think. On the other hand, the probability of winning a BB prize in the normal game state is set to 1/65536, and when the BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the bonus state, but the number of medals to be paid out is zero. Here, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game under normal gaming conditions is equal to the value obtained by multiplying the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each of the winning probabilities and adding the multiplication results. The expected value is about 0.96 sheets. That is, in the normal gaming state, the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets (1 medal) is about 96%, and the number of medals owned by the player is expected to decrease by about 0.04 every time one game is played. .

In addition, in the case of 2-coin bets, the probability of winning a watermelon prize and a bell prize in the normal game state is set to 1/65536, and when either prize is established, 3 medals are paid out. In addition, the probability of winning a cherry bell prize in the normal game state is set to about 1/1.8, and three medals are paid out when the cherry bell prize is established. In addition, the probability of winning a replay prize in the normal gaming state is set to about 1/7.3, and when a replay prize is established, it is equivalent to paying out two medals as described above. can think. On the other hand, the probability of winning a BB prize in the normal game state is set to 1/65536, and when the BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the bonus state, but the number of medals to be paid out is zero. Therefore, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game under normal gaming conditions with a double bet is about 1.94. That is, in the normal gaming state, the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets (two) is about 97%, and it is expected that the number of medals owned by the player will decrease by about 0.06 every time one game is played. .

In this way, in both cases of 1-ply and 2-ply, the ratio of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of bets is set to a value close to 100%. , the medals are returned to the player's hand at an expected value of almost 100%. That is, even if the game is played with one or two bets, the number of medals is hardly reduced. Therefore, when one or two medals are left in the player's hand, the player has only one medal left in his hand. Alternatively, it is possible to make the player feel that he/she wants to play a game using two medals. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the player will finish the game leaving medals.

On the other hand, it is expected that the number of medals will decrease slightly if the game is played with 1-ply or 2-ply. Instead, it is declining. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from aiming to increase the number of medals by repeatedly playing the game with one or two bets. Therefore, when there are three or more medals, the player can be made to play the game with three medals with a high probability of winning the BB prize.

In the present embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out when a cherry bell win is established by playing the game with one bet or two bets is set to three, which is the maximum number of bets, and the game is played with one bet. The number of medals to be paid out when a 7-bell win is established is set to 2, but the number of medals to be paid out when a cherry-bell win is established is set to a multiple of 3, and the number of medals to be paid out when a 7-bell win is established is set to 2. It may be set to a multiple of 2. However, if the payout number is set to 3 or 2 when a cherry bell win or a 7 bell win is established, even if the expected value of the medal payout number is set to less than 100%, the respective win The winning probability of can be set high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that a cherry bell win or a 7 bell win will be established, and it is possible to increase the probability that 3 or 2 medals will be awarded to the player. can make you want to play the game using the medals.

FIG. 7 shows the winning probability when the setting state is "setting 1". The probability of winning corresponding to each winning mode in the case of two-coin betting is set so that the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the number of bets is less than 100%. In this embodiment, the winning probability corresponding to each winning mode in the case of 1-coin and 2-coin bets is changed according to the setting state ("Setting 1" to "Setting 6"). Winning probabilities of betting and double betting may be constant regardless of the setting state. That is, the change of the winning probability according to the setting state may be limited only to the case of the 3-coin bet. In addition, in the case of 1-ply and 2-ply, the winning probability of at least one of the BB prize, watermelon prize, bell prize and replay prize depending on the setting state (“Setting 1” to “Setting 6”) Although changed, the winning probabilities of the cherry bell winning prize and the 7 bell winning prize, which are special small winning prizes in the case of 1-coin and 2-coin betting, are not changed, and may be set to a constant value.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, the winning mode is established only when the game is played with one bet or two bets, and when the game is played with three bets, the left reel 32L Even if the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M and the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stop, the cherry bell winning prize is not established and is treated as a loss. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the winning of a role. Therefore, when the game is played with one bet or two bet, if the symbol stops at the stop symbol of the cherry bell winning prize, the player can be greatly delighted.

In the same way, the 7 bell winning is a winning mode that is established only when the game is played with one bet, and when the game is played with two bets or three bets, the left reel 32L has a "7" symbol. , even if the "bell" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, the 7-bell winning is not established and is treated as a loss. can draw attention. Therefore, when the game is played with one bet, if the symbols stop at the stop symbol of winning 7 bells, the player can be greatly pleased.

Further, in the slot machine 10, even if the game is played with one or two bets, the winning probability is extremely low, but the BB prize is established. As a result, even when the game is played with a one-coin or two-coin bet, the player can have a sense of anticipation that the BB prize will be established.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, when a game is played with one or two bets, even when a watermelon win or a bell win, which are ordinary minor wins other than a BB win or a replay win, are established. Also, unlike the number of medals paid out when the game is played with three bets, three medals are paid out in the same way as when a cherry bell win is established. The player can play one more game while expecting to win a BB prize by throwing in the three medals that have been collected, and the player can surely enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. can. In addition, in the slot machine 10, the probability of winning a watermelon prize or a bell prize is set low when a game is played with one or two prizes, while the probability of winning a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize is set high. Therefore, it is possible to further impress the player that the cherry bell winning prize or the 7 bell winning prize is a special small winning combination with one or two bets. When the game is played at , the player can have a sense of expectation that a cherry bell winning prize or a 7 bell winning prize will be established.

Next, the electrical configuration of this slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on an MPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the MPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, there are reel units 31 (more specifically, reel index sensors that individually detect that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, a first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and a second inserted medal detection sensor 45b that detect medals inserted from the medal slot 45, A payout detection sensor 51a for detecting medals paid out from the hopper device 51, a credit insertion detection sensor 56a to 58a for individually detecting the operation of each credit insertion switch 56 to 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a for detecting the operation of the settlement switch 59, Various sensors such as a reset detection sensor 72a for detecting operation of the reset switch 72 and a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on are connected. A signal from the sensor is output to the MPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 volts DC output from the power supply unit 91a in this example, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the MPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the MPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. This power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control unit 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are connected via an input/output port 104. there is

The display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63 , the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 . Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 10, but the MPU 181, the image controller 186, various memories, and the like are integrated on a substrate, and after receiving signals from the main controller 101, display control is performed. The device 81 independently drives and controls the upper lamp 63 , the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 . Therefore, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. The various display units 60 to 62 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

In addition, in the display control device 81, the character ROM 187 for storing various image data to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory, which is an inexpensive memory with a large storage capacity in a small area. . As a result, the capacity of the character ROM 187 can be easily increased, and many images can be prepared as images to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. You can diversify and complicate the images displayed on the Although the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). is used as an image data storage means, an invention has been made in which an image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. Details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

The above MPU 102 has a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. A RAM 106 for securing and a free-running counter 107 for generating random numbers are incorporated. Although not shown, the MPU 102 also includes various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as various counters such as a credit counter for counting the number of credits. Built-in.

The free-running counter 107 is a hardware-configured counter that generates and updates random numbers from 0 to 65535 in short cycles. After confirming the operation of the start lever 41 based on the output signal of the start detection sensor 41a, the MPU 102 latches the value of the free-run counter 107 using a hardware circuit and stores the latched value in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 latches the value of the free-run counter 107 each time the start lever 41 is operated. Also, the value of the free-run counter latched and stored in the RAM 106 is used to draw a lottery for the winning mode (hand) of the game started by operating the start lever 41 .

The ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes shown in the flowcharts of FIG. 12 and subsequent figures are stored in the ROM 105 as part of the control program. In addition, the ROM 105 is provided with at least a lottery table storage area 105a for storing a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning mode.

Here, the lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the lottery table selected in the general game state when the setting state is set to "setting 1", and (a) shows three medals inserted. (b) is a lottery table for 2 medals used when the number of medals inserted is 2 (2 medals), and (c) is a lottery table for 2 medals. 10 shows a lottery table for one-of-one bet used when the number of inserted medals is one (one-of-one bet).

An index value IV is set in each lottery table, and each index value IV is univocally associated with a winning mode, and a point value corresponding to the winning probability corresponding to the winning mode. A PV is set for each lottery table. Specifically, IV=1 is associated with a BB winning as a winning mode, IV=2 is associated with a watermelon winning, IV=3 is associated with a bell winning, and IV=4 is associated with a bell winning. is associated with a cherry bell win, IV=5 is associated with a 7 bell win, and IV=6 is associated with a replay win.

In addition, in the lottery table for bet 3, as shown in FIG. 9A, PV=256 is associated with IV=1 (BB winning), and PV=256 is associated with IV=2 (watermelon winning). 8192 is associated, IV=3 (bell winning) is associated with PV=12850, IV=4 (cherry bell winning) is associated with PV=0, IV=5 (7 bell winning) ) is associated with PV=0, and IV=6 (replay winning) is associated with PV=8980.

Here, the lottery method for the winning mode will be briefly described. When the random number value of the free run counter 107 is latched by the operation of the start lever 41 and stored in the RAM 106, first, the value of the point value PV associated with IV=1 (BB win) (FIG. 9A) 256) is added to the value of the latched random number, and this is used as the determination value DV (see S304 in FIG. 14). If the determination value DV is greater than 65535, the BB winning is determined as the winning combination of the game (see S305 and S306 in FIG. 14), and the lottery ends. That is, when a lottery is performed using the lottery table for three bets shown in FIG. 9A, when the value of the latched random number is in the range of 655280 to 65535, the BB winning prize is determined as the winning combination. . Therefore, the winning probability is set to 1/256 as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, if the determination value DV is 65535 or less, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (see S307 in FIG. 14), and the value of the point value PV corresponding to the index value IV after incrementing is added to the determination value DV. to update the determination value DV (see S304 in FIG. 14). If the updated determination value DV is greater than 65535, the winning mode corresponding to the raised index value IV is determined as a winning combination, and the lottery is terminated. Further, the index value IV is incremented by 1 to update the determination value DV (add the point value PV corresponding to the incremented IV) and determine the updated determination value DV (whether the determination value DV is greater than 65535 or not). ) is repeated until a winning combination is determined or until there is no more determination combination (until the IV exceeds the maximum value) (see S304 to S308 in FIG. 14).

As a result, when a lottery is performed using the lottery table for three bets shown in FIG. 9A, when the value of the latched random number is in the range of 57088 to 655279, the watermelon winning prize is determined as a winning combination. When the value of the latched random number is in the range of 44238 to 57087, the bell winning is determined as the winning combination, and when the latched random number value is in the range of 35258 to 44237, the replay winning is determined as the winning combination. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probability of each winning mode is set to 1/8 for watermelon winning, about 1/5.1 for bell winning, and about 1/5.1 for replay winning. 7. It will be set to 1/3.

Incidentally, in the lottery table for three-bet shown in FIG. 9A, the value of the point value PV corresponding to IV=4 (cherry bell win) and IV=5 (7 bell wins) is set to 0. Therefore, even if the determination value DV is updated using this value, the value does not change before and after the update. When the point value PV corresponding to IV=4 and IV=5 is added to the determination value DV, the determination value DV is 65535 or less. Even if the updated determination value is determined, it is never determined to be larger than 65535. Therefore, by setting the value of the point value PV corresponding to IV=4 (cherry bell winning) and IV=5 (7 bell winning) to 0, cherry bell winning and 7 bell winning are not selected as winning combinations. It has become.

In the double-bet lottery table shown in FIG. 9B, PV=1 is associated with IV=1 (BB winning), and PV=1 is associated with IV=2 (watermelon winning). , PV=1 is associated with IV=3 (winning a bell), PV=36400 is associated with IV=4 (winning a cherry bell), and PV=5 (winning a 7 bells). =0 is associated, and PV=8980 is associated with IV=6 (replay win). Therefore, when a lottery is performed using the lottery table for two bets shown in FIG. When the value is 65534, watermelon winning is determined as a winning combination, and when the value of the latched random number is 65533, bell winning is determined as a winning combination, and the value of the latched random number is within the range of 29133 to 65532. When a cherry bell win is determined as a winning combination, and when the value of the latched random number is in the range of 20153-29132, a replay win is determined as a winning combination. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probability of each winning mode is set to 1/65536 for BB winning, watermelon winning, and bell winning, and about 1/1.8 for cherry bell winning. set and will be set at approximately 1 in 7.3 for replay wins. Incidentally, since the value of the point value PV corresponding to IV=5 (7 bells winning) is set to 0, the 7 bells winning is not set as a winning combination, as described above.

In addition, in the lottery table for one bet shown in FIG. 9(c), PV=1 corresponds to IV=1 (BB winning), and PV=1 corresponds to IV=2 (watermelon winning). PV = 1 is associated with IV = 3 (winning a bell), PV = 10880 is associated with IV = 4 (winning a cherry bell), and IV = 5 (winning a 7 bell). is associated with PV=10880, and PV=8980 is associated with IV=6 (replay win). Therefore, when a lottery is performed using the one-bet lottery table shown in FIG. When the value is 65534, watermelon winning is determined as a winning combination, and when the value of the latched random number is 65533, bell winning is determined as a winning combination, and the value of the latched random number is within the range of 54653 to 65532. At some point, a cherry bell win is determined as a winning combination, and when the latched random number value is in the range of 43773 to 54652, a 7 bell win is determined as a winning combination, and the latched random number value is in the range of 34793 to 43772. When within the range, a replay winning prize is determined as a winning combination. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning probability of each prize mode is set to 1/65536 for the BB prize, the watermelon prize, and the bell prize, and about 6.0 for the cherry bell prize and the 7 bell prize. It will be set at 1/7.3 for replay wins.

In the lottery table storage area 105a, a lottery table for single bet, a lottery table for bet two, and a lottery table for bet three are stored for each of "setting 1" to "setting 6". there is A bonus state lottery table used when the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state is prepared for each of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Then, a lottery table to be used for the lottery for the winning mode (hand) is set according to the setting state and game state of the slot machine 10 and the number of inserted medals (number of bets). That is, in the normal gaming state, when the number of bets is 3, the lottery table for 3-bet corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set, and when the number of bets is 2, the lottery table for the slot machine 10 is set. A two-bet lottery table corresponding to the setting state is set, and when the number of bets is one, a one-bet lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set. Further, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, a bonus state lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set (see FIG. 15). Then, using the set lottery table, a prize mode lottery is performed.

As the lottery table used when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, different lottery tables according to the number of bets (1 to 3) are not provided. This is because the game is configured so that the number of bets is limited to three in the state. Therefore, when in the bonus state, the corresponding bonus state lottery table is simply set according to the setting state (“setting 1” to “setting 6”) of the slot machine 10 .

When the slot machine 10 is in the normal gaming state, the lottery table for three bets, the lottery table for two bets, and the lottery table for one bet shown in FIGS. , the probability of winning a BB prize when the game is played by inserting three medals can be set sufficiently higher than when the game is played by inserting one or two medals. . Therefore, as described above, it is possible to let the player play one game by inserting three medals while making the player expect that many medals will be paid out when the BB win is established. As a result, the medals are consumed quickly, and it is possible to increase the operating rate of the slot machines in the hall.

In addition, when the game is played by inserting one or two medals, the cherry bell winning with the number of medals paid out of three can be set as a winning combination candidate, and the probability of winning can be set high. Therefore, when one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the player expects that three medals will be paid out by winning a cherry bell prize. One game can be played by inserting one medal. As a result, when three medals are paid out as a result of winning a Cherry Bell prize, the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting to win a BB prize. , the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Also, even if the result of the game played by inserting one or two medals is a loss, the game can be finished without leaving any extra medals for the player.

Further, when the game is played by inserting one medal, the winning combination of 7 bells with two medals paid out can be set as a winning combination candidate, and the winning probability can be set high. When one medal remains in the player's hand, the player is made to insert the remaining one medal while making the player expect that two medals will be paid out if the 7-bell winning is established. can be made to play one game. As a result, when two medals are paid out as a result of winning a prize of seven bells, the player inserts the two medals and waits for a further three medals to be paid out in hopes of winning a prize of Cherry Bell. , you can enjoy one more game. Then, if the cherry bell win is established, the player can play the game by inserting the three paid-out medals while expecting the BB prize to be established, so that the player can play the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. You can enjoy , and even if you are out, you can use up the medals. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals while giving the player further enjoyment of the game.

In this manner, the slot machine 10 allows the player to enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals.

Further, by using the lottery table for single-bet or the lottery table for double-bet stored in the lottery table storage area 105a, the winning probability of each winning mode can be set to the value shown in FIG. As described above with reference to FIG. 7, in both the one-coin and two-coin bets, the ratio of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of bets can be set to a value less than 100% and infinitely close to 100%. can. Therefore, even if the game is played with one or two bets, the number of medals is hardly reduced. Alternatively, it is possible to surely make the player want to play the game using two medals, thereby further reducing the possibility of the player finishing the game with medals left. On the other hand, the number of medals decreases as the game is repeatedly played with one bet or two bets. can be made untargetable. Therefore, when there are three or more medals, the player can be encouraged to play the game with three medals, which has a high probability of winning a BB prize.

In addition, by switching each lottery table according to the number of bets, it is possible to make a winning mode that is established only when the game is played with one or two cherry bell prizes, and the game can be played with three bets. If it is done, the cherry bell winning is not established and can be treated as a loss, so the player pays attention to the cherry bell winning as a special small winning combination dedicated to one-coin and two-coin betting. can be made Similarly, a winning mode is established in which a 7-bell win is established only when the game is played with a single bet, and a 7-bell win is not established when a game is played with a two-bet or three-bet. , is treated as a loss, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the 7-bell winning as a special small combination winning only for one-piece winning. Therefore, when the game is played with one bet or two bet, if the symbol stops at the stop symbol of cherry bell winning or 7 bell winning, great joy can be given to the player.

In addition, even if the game is played with one bet or two bets, although the winning probability is extremely low, it can be set so that the BB prize is established. Even when the game is played with , the player can have a sense of expectation that the BB prize will be established.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, the winning probability of the watermelon winning prize and the bell winning prize in the case where the game is played with one bet or two betting is set low, while the winning probability of the cherry bell prize and the seven bell prize is set high. As a result, it is possible to further impress the player that the cherry bell winning prize or the 7 bell winning prize is a special small winning combination with a one-coin or two-coin bet. When a game is played with bets, the player can have a feeling of expectation that a cherry bell winning prize or a 7 bell winning prize will be established.

In the present embodiment, the point value PV corresponding to IV=5 (7 bell winning) is set to 0 in the lottery table for double bet, and IV=4 (cherry bell winning) in the lottery table for three bet. ) and IV=5 (7 bell wins), the point value PV corresponding to 0 is set to 0 so that the lottery for those prize modes is performed and the winning mode is not won. By not setting the index value IV and not performing the lottery for those winning modes, the winning mode may not be won.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description is continued. The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and a slide table used for controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. and a state information storage area 106c for storing game states such as bonus states, and at least a backup area.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power failure based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is performed when the power is turned off by power failure processing (see S103 in FIG. 12), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 81 of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 81. As shown in FIG. In the description of FIG. 10, the detailed description of the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 of FIG. 8 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 10, the display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65. An image controller 188 that draws and displays the drawn image on the auxiliary display section 65 at a predetermined timing, a character ROM 187 that stores image data to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the like are installed.

An input/output port 186, a character ROM 187, and an image controller 188 are connected to the MPU 181 via an internal bus. A clock circuit 183 that outputs a rectangular wave of frequency, a program ROM 184 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 181 and fixed value data for driving the upper lamp 63, etc. A work RAM 185 is connected to secure a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program. A one-chip microcomputer in which the program ROM 184, the work RAM 185, the signal latch circuit 182, the clock circuit 183, etc. described above are incorporated in the MPU may be used.

Also, the power supply device 91 , the upper lamp 63 , the speaker 64 , and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected to the MPU 181 via the input/output port 186 . The power supply device 91 is configured to receive a power failure signal that is output when the drive voltage drops to, for example, less than 10 volts. Further, the MPU 181 performs various control processes based on various commands sent from the main control device 101, and controls the driving of the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 via the input/output port 186. . Hereinafter, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are also collectively referred to as an auxiliary effect section.

The work RAM 185 is provided with at least a received command storage area 185a and a bet number storage area 185b. The received command recording area 185a is an area for temporarily storing various commands transmitted from the main controller 101. FIG. When the display controller 81 receives the command transmitted from the main controller 101 , the signal latch circuit 182 latches the received command and generates a command interrupt signal to the MPU 181 . The MPU 181 executes command interrupt processing (not shown) triggered by the generation of the command interrupt signal, and stores the command latched by the signal latch circuit 182 in the received command storage area 185a. The received command storage area 185a is configured to operate as a FIFO (First In First Out) ring buffer. If the commands are stored, the commands are read out in the order in which they were stored, and processing corresponding to each command (for example, start command processing shown in FIG. 19, lottery result command processing shown in FIG. 20, error command processing shown in FIG. 21, etc.) ).

The bet number storage area 185b is an area for storing information regarding the number of medals (bet number) inserted at the start of the game. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated by the player after a specified number of medals have been inserted, the number of inserted medals (the number of bets) is determined by normal processing executed by the MPU 102 of the main controller 101. A start command including information about the start is set (see S209 in FIG. 13), and the start command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 by timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the main control device 101 ( (see S110 in FIG. 12). By receiving this start command, the display control device 81 recognizes that the start lever 41 has been operated and a game start command has been generated, executes start command processing (see FIG. 19), and responds to the start command. Information about the included bet number is extracted and stored in the bet number storage area 185b (see S801 in FIG. 19). The bet number storage area 185b may store the bet number information contained in the start command as it is, or may store the bet number information in a format different from the bet number information contained in the start command. You may make it store.

Based on the information stored in the bet number storage area 185b, the display control device 81 grasps the number of medals (bet number) inserted at the start of the game, and causes the auxiliary effect section to execute based on the bet number. Control the mode of presentation. For example, when it is determined that the game has started with the number of bets being 3 based on the information stored in the bet number storage area 185b, the display control device 81 receives various commands from the main control device 101. Selects an effect mode based on the game state of the slot machine 10 determined by the controller 10 and the result of a lottery (judgment of winning mode) performed based on the start command, etc., and causes the auxiliary effect section to execute various effects (Fig. 20 (see S902 of ).

As an effect corresponding to the number of bets of 3, for example, as a normal effect, a “normal effect” in which a character performing a predetermined action is displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65, and “Challenge to win a BB prize!” ``BB winning challenge performance'' to urge the player to line up the stop symbols corresponding to the BB winning mode, and the message ``BB winning winning!'' A random number counter (not shown) provided in the display control device 81 includes a "BB prize notification effect" for notifying that the BB prize mode has been set as a winning combination along with the lighting of the 63 and the sound output from the speaker 64. ), the result of the lottery (determination of whether or not a role is won) ascertained by the lottery result command received from the main controller 101, which will be described later, and the slot machine 10 ascertained by the status command received from the main controller 101, which will be described later. A performance mode to be executed by the auxiliary performance section is determined from among the performances according to the game state of .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game has started when the number of bets is 1 or 2, the main control unit 101 executes a drawing based on the result of the lottery performed based on the generation of the start command. Select the production mode to be made. For example, the number of bets is determined to be 1, and the lottery result command received from the main controller 101 indicates that the cherry bell winning mode, the 7 bell winning mode, or the replay winning mode has been won, or which winning mode has been selected. If it is determined that neither has been won, the display control device 81 causes the auxiliary display section 65 to display a message "Challenge Cherry Bell/7 Bells!" The auxiliary effect section is controlled to execute the "cherry bell win/7 bell win challenge effect" for lighting the upper lamp 63 in a dedicated mode (see S911 in FIG. 20). Also, the number of bets is determined to be 2, and the lottery result command received from the main control device 101 indicates that the cherry bell winning mode or the replay winning mode has been won, or none of the winning modes has been won. If so, the display control device 81 causes the auxiliary display section 65 to display the message "Challenge Cherry Bell!" The auxiliary effect section is controlled so as to execute the "cherry bell prize winning challenge effect" to light up (see S910 in FIG. 20).

When the game is played with one bet, there is an expectation that 3 or 2 medals will be paid out when the 1 cherry bell win or 7 bell win mode is established by the "cherry bell win/7 bell win challenge performance". can be strongly held by the player. In addition, when the game is played with two tokens, the ``cherry bell prize challenge performance'' can make the player strongly expect three medals to be paid out when the cherry bell prize mode is established. . Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the one-to-one or two-to-one game, so that the player can strongly feel that he or she wants to play the game to the end without leaving any extra medals.

Note that the "cherry bell winning/7 bell winning challenge presentation" and "cherry bell winning challenge presentation" may be performed in at least one of the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65. . In addition to these, a lamp is provided on the game panel 25, and for example, the lamp is lit in red in the case of playing one game, and the lamp is lit in blue in the case of playing two games. may be configured to be executed.

Further, when it is determined that the number of bets is 1 or 2, if it is determined that the BB prize mode is won based on the lottery result command received from the main controller 101, the display control device 81 displays the BB As an effect for notifying the player that the winning mode has been set as a winning combination, a ``BB winning notification effect'' for displaying a message ``BB winning won!'' on the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed (see S904 in FIG. 20). ), if it is determined that the watermelon winning mode has been won, the display control device 81 displays "Watermelon winning mode" on the auxiliary display unit 65 as an effect for notifying the player that the watermelon winning mode has been set as a winning combination. (see S906 in FIG. 20), and if it is determined that the bell winning mode has been won, the display control device 81 determines that the bell winning mode has been won. As an effect for notifying the player that the winning combination has been set, a ``bell winning announcement effect'' for displaying a message ``bell win winning!'' on the auxiliary display unit 65 is executed (see S908 in FIG. 20).

Here, when the player starts the game with 1 bet or 2 bets, that is, when the number of bets is 1 or 2, the lottery tables shown in FIGS. The winning probability of the winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is set to be extremely low, while the winning probability of the cherry bell winning mode and the 7 bell winning mode is set high, so that the player can play the BB winning mode, There is a high possibility that players will play the game not expecting the establishment of the watermelon prize mode and the bell prize mode, but expect the establishment of the cherry bell prize mode and the 7 bells prize mode. In addition, in the present slot machine 10, once the cherry bell winning mode or the 7 bell winning mode is won as a winning combination, the stop symbols corresponding to the stop symbols are effective without fail even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at any timing. Since it is constructed so as to stop on the line, a player who starts the game with 1-coin or 2-coin is attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R displayed in the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. There is a high possibility that the stop switches 42 to 44 will be operated without looking at the pattern.

Therefore, in the case where the game is played with one-bet or two-bet, even if one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is won as a winning combination, if the player does not notice it, Since the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode are all winning modes that may be missed, there is a risk that the establishment of the BB winning mode will be missed. Winning of the BB winning mode is valid across games until the BB winning mode is established (that is, until the stop symbols corresponding to the BB winning mode are aligned on the activated line). If the game ends without noticing the winning of the winning mode, another player establishes the BB winning mode based on the winning of the BB winning mode, and the player who has won the winning of the BB winning mode There is a risk of loss as a result.

On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, in the case where a game is played with one bet or two bets, if any one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode is won in the game, the Winning is notified by display on the auxiliary display section 65 . The notification is made while the player is unable to operate the stop switches 42 to 44, as will be described later with reference to FIG. Therefore, the player can know that one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode will be won before operating the stop switches 42 to 44 . Therefore, when the player plays the game with one bet or two bets, if this notification is made by the auxiliary display unit 65, the winning combination grasped by the notification (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode or bell winning mode) Since the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated aiming at the stop pattern in order to stop the stop pattern corresponding to the mode) on the effective line, those winning modes can be established with a higher probability. In addition, when the winning of the BB prize mode is notified, even if the player fails to win the game, the player can receive a new loan of medals and continue the game until the BB prize mode is established. can.

The notification may be made by lighting the upper lamp 63 or outputting sound from the speaker 64, and two or more types of display of the auxiliary display unit 65, lighting of the upper lamp 63, and sound output from the speaker 64 may be used. It may be done by a combination. Also, a notification lamp may be provided on the game panel 25, and notification effects corresponding to each winning combination may be performed depending on the lighting color of the lamp.

The character ROM 187 is a memory that stores image data to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, as described above, and is connected to the MPU 181 via an internal bus. An image controller 188 is also connected to the internal bus, and the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 187 and transfers the image data stored in the character ROM 187 to a resident video RAM 189 connected to the image controller 188 or a normal memory. It can be transferred to video RAM 190 .

This character ROM 187 is composed of a NAND flash memory 187a. The NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, so the capacity of the character ROM 187 can be easily increased. For example, in this slot machine, many images are stored as images to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 by using the NAND flash memory 187a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes. As a result, the images displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 187a, defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. Therefore, the character ROM 187 includes a known arbitration circuit 187b (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2002-100000) that performs data address conversion so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 187a while avoiding defective data blocks. are provided. The arbitration circuit 187b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 187a inside the character ROM 187 and avoids access to the defective data block. Access to the character ROM 187 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the data block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 187 from becoming complicated.

The image controller 188 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the auxiliary display unit 65 at a predetermined timing, and is connected to the MPU 181 via an internal bus. Based on instructions from the MPU 181, an image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is drawn, and data corresponding to the drawn image (drawn image data) is sent to the auxiliary display unit 65 via an input/output port at a predetermined timing. 65 to display the drawn image data on the auxiliary display section 65 .

A resident video RAM 189 and a normal video RAM 190 are connected to the image controller 188. Image data required for drawing an image by the image controller 188 is read from the character ROM 187 by the MPU 181 in advance before drawing and stored in the resident memory. It is transferred to the video RAM 189 for normal use or the video RAM 190 for normal use. At this time, the MPU 181 determines to which of the resident video RAM 189 and normal video RAM 190 the image is to be transferred (and to which address the image is to be stored) according to the contents of the image based on the program or table stored in the program ROM 184. to decide.

When the image controller 188 draws an image, it does not use the image data in the character ROM 187, but uses the image data stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 to execute image drawing processing. As a result, even if the character ROM 187 is composed of the NAND flash memory 187a with a slow read speed, the image controller 188 can reproduce the image using the image data previously stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 from the character ROM 187. Since the drawing is performed, the drawing of the image can be immediately executed without being affected by the slow reading speed of the character ROM 187 . Therefore, a desired image can be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 at a desired time.

The MPU 181 determines in which of the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 the image data required when the image controller 188 draws an image is stored (and at which address it is stored). Based on the program or table stored in the storage destination of image data (resident video RAM 189 and normal video In which of the RAM 190 it is stored, and at what address it is stored) is also indicated. The image controller 188 reads necessary image data from a predetermined address of the resident video RAM 189 or normal video RAM 190 based on instructions from the MPU 181 . This eliminates the need for the image controller 188 to determine the storage location where the necessary image data is stored, so it can concentrate on drawing the image.

When the image controller 188 receives an image drawing instruction from the MPU 181, it determines the storage location of the image data required for drawing (resident video RAM 189 and normal video RAM 190) based on the type of image required for drawing. Where it is stored, or at what address it is stored) may be determined. In this case, when the MPU 181 stores image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the image controller 188 controls the type of image displayed by the stored image data (or the corresponding image). The address of the character ROM 187 where the data is stored) and the storage destination of the image data are determined based on the control signal from the MPU 181, and the image type (or the corresponding image data) is stored in the RAM provided in the image controller 188 The address of the character ROM 187 where the image data is stored and the storage destination of the image data may be stored in association with each other. Then, based on the information stored in the RAM, the image controller 188 may determine the storage location of the image data required for the image. The processing load of the MPU 181 can be reduced by determining the storage destination of the image data by the image controller 188 .

The resident video RAM 189 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) with one input/output port (hereinafter referred to as "single port type"). It is used so that it will continue to be held without any problems. As a result, the image data transferred from the character ROM 189 is resident in the resident video RAM 189 . This resident video RAM 189 stores data corresponding to images displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 when the power is turned on, data corresponding to frequently displayed images, Alternatively, the data corresponding to the image to be displayed immediately among the images determined to be displayed by the display control device 81 is transferred from the character ROM 187 and made resident.

On the other hand, the normal video RAM 190 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and is composed of a 1-port type DRAM (Dynamic RAM). Normal video RAM 190 stores image data previously read from character ROM 187 when image controller 188 draws an image to be displayed on auxiliary display unit 65 using image data not resident in resident video RAM 189 . is for temporary storage. Image data drawn by the image controller 188 (drawn image data) is also stored in a drawn image area (not shown) provided in the normal video RAM 190 , and the image controller 188 synchronizes the display timing of the auxiliary display section 65 with the display timing. By sending the drawn image data stored in the drawn image area of the normal video RAM 190 to the auxiliary display section 65, an image corresponding to the drawn image data is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG.

The resident video RAM 189 is provided with a power-on main image area 189a, a rear image area 189b, a character pattern area 189c, an announcement effect image area 189d, and an error message image area 189e.

The power-on main image area 189a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 while the display control device 81 is performing initialization processing when the power is turned on. The power-on main image is a message image for notifying the player or the like that initialization processing is being performed when the power is turned on. is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed.

In the display control device 81, when the power switch 71 is turned on and power is supplied from the power supply device 91 to the display control device 81, the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 181, and the character ROM 181 first responds to the main image when the power is turned on. The data is read out and transferred to the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189 via a buffer RAM 188a provided in the image controller 188 (see S702 and S703 in FIG. 17). When the image data is stored in the power-on main image area 189a, the MPU 181 instructs the image controller 188 to draw the power-on main image (see S70 in FIG. 17). As a result, in the image controller 188 , the power-on main image is drawn using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 189 a , and the drawn power-on main image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . . Then, the power-on main image is controlled to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 until the initialization processing of the display control device 81 is completed.

Here, in the initialization processing of the display control device 81, other image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 (image data other than the main image at power-on) is read from the character ROM 187 and transferred to the resident video RAM 189. processing (see S707 to S710 in FIG. 17). That is, all the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189 after the power is turned on. can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 189, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND type flash memory 187a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 .

In particular, in the resident video RAM 189, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by the main controller 101 or the display controller 81 are resident. Even if the character ROM 187 is composed of the NAND flash memory 187a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness from the operation of the start lever 41 and the stop buttons 42 to 44 by the player to the display of some image on the auxiliary display section 65. can.

Immediately after the power is supplied, the display control device 81 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 187 to the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189, and after the transfer is completed, the power is turned off without delay. After the power-on main image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, the power-on main image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 until the initialization process of the display control device 81 is completed. After being displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65, the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65 when the power is turned on until all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is transferred from the character RO 187 to the resident video RAM 189. continue to be

Since the slot machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 187a for the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident memory due to its slow read speed. Although it takes a long time to be transferred to the video RAM 189, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the main image at power-on is auxiliary. After being displayed on the display unit 65, the remaining image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 189 is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, so the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189. While this is being done, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . Therefore, the display control device 81 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display section 65 when the power is turned on. can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 at the time of power-on, the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 189 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation is stopped.

Further, image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored in the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189, so that it can be resident in the resident video RAM 189 in the event of a momentary power failure. If the data remains, the image data stored in the power-on main image area 189a can be used to immediately display the power-on main image on the auxiliary display section 65 when the power is restored.

The back image area 189b and the character design area 189c are areas for storing image data corresponding to the back images and character designs used in various effects displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, respectively. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main image displayed on the auxiliary display section 6 such as the character design.

When the display control device 81 determines, based on the command received from the main control device 101, that the game state of the slot machine 10 is to be shifted to a different game state (for example, from a normal state to a bonus state), the display control device 81 displays the back image and the character pattern. It is configured to change the back image and character design when changing or performing various other effects, and it is required that the back image and character design change immediately according to the contents of the received command.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, image data corresponding to the back image and character design are transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 during the initialization process performed in the display control device 81 when the power is turned on. are transferred in advance to the back image area 189b and the character pattern area 189c via a buffer RAM 188a provided in the image controller 188 (see S707 to S710 in FIG. 17). When the display control device 81 changes the back image or character design based on the content of the command received from the main control device 101 , instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 , the resident video RAM 189 A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 188 by reading image data preliminarily resident in the back image area 189b and the character pattern area 189c. As a result, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, so even if the character ROM 187 uses the NAND flash memory 187a with a slow read speed, the rear image and character design can be changed immediately.

In the back image area 189b, image data corresponding to all back images may be resident, or image data corresponding to some back images may be resident. Further, when image data corresponding to part of the rear image is resident, at least data corresponding to the rear image to be immediately displayed in response to a command received from main controller 101 may be resident. As a result, when receiving a command from main controller 101 and immediately changing the rear image, image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is always resident in the rear image area 189b. Using the image data, an image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 and displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 .

Further, when the back image is scrolled and displayed over time, the image data corresponding to the entire scrolled range may be resident in the back image area 189b, or may be displayed within a predetermined time from the time when the back image is changed. The image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed in the rear image area 189b may reside in the rear image area 189b. For a predetermined back image such as the back image displayed after the power is turned on, image data corresponding to the entire range to be scrolled is stored in the back image area 189b. The image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed in the rear image area 189b may reside in the rear image area 189b. As a result, the image data corresponding to the scroll range to be displayed within a predetermined time from at least the change of the background image is resident in the background image area 189b, so that the background image can be changed to be scrolled over time. Even if there is, the image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 using the image data resident in the rear image area 189b and displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG.

Also, when changing to a background image that is displayed by scrolling, it is more preferable to always start the display from the initial position fixedly set as the position of the background image displayed at the time of change. . As a result, the image data to be resident in the back image area 189b can be limited to the image data corresponding to the scroll range displayed within a predetermined time from the fixedly set initial position, and the amount of data can be reduced. can be suppressed.

When image data corresponding to a scroll range to be displayed within a predetermined period of time from the change of the background image is resident in the background image area 189b, the image controller 188 uses the image data resident in the background image area 189b. While the image is drawn and the drawn image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the MPU 181 reads the image data corresponding to the remaining scroll range from the character ROM 187 and transfers it to the normal video RAM 190. can be

As a result, while the back image is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in the scroll range corresponding to the back image data resident in the back image area 189, the scroll range not resident in the back image area 189 is displayed. Since the back image data is transferred to the normal video RAM 190, the back image data already stored in the normal video RAM 190 is used when displaying the back image in the scroll range not resident in the back image area 189. Then, an image can be immediately drawn by the image controller and displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . Therefore, the back image is read from the character ROM 187 again at the time when the display of the back image in the scroll range resident in the back image area 189b shifts to the display of the back image in the scroll range not resident in the back image area 189b. Since it is not necessary, even if the character ROM 187 uses the NAND type flash memory 187a with a slow read speed, the transition of the rear image can be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, in the character design area 189c, data corresponding to all character designs may be resident, or data corresponding to some character designs may be resident. Further, when data corresponding to some character designs are resident, at least data corresponding to character designs to be immediately displayed in response to a command received from main controller 101 may be resident. As a result, when a command is received from main controller 101 and the character design is changed immediately, image data corresponding to the changed character design is always resident in the character design area 189c. Using the image data, an image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 188 and displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 .

The notification effect image area 189d is an area for storing image data corresponding to the notification effect to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. The error message image area 189e is used when an error occurs in the slot machine 10. This is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the error message displayed on the auxiliary display section 65.

For example, when a game is played with the number of bets of 1 or 2, and as a result of the lottery, one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is won as a winning combination, the display control device 81: In accordance with the winning combination, the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to perform control such that the BB winning notification effect, the watermelon winning notification effect, and the bell winning notification effect are performed (see S903 to S908 in FIG. 20). In this case, the display control device 81 grasps the winning combination from the lottery result command received from the main control unit 101, and performs various notification effects according to the grasped winning combination. It must be done before the stop buttons 42-44 are operated by the player. In addition, since the winning lottery is performed by the main control device 101 after the start lever 41 is operated by the player, the stop buttons 42 to 44 can be operated by the player after the start lever 41 is operated. A lottery for a role is performed by the main controller 101 in an extremely short time until the win is reached, and the lottery result is notified from the main controller 101 to the display controller 81 by a lottery result command, and then display control is performed. The means 81 must perform corresponding notification effects, but in the slot machine 10, image data corresponding to each of the BB prize winning notification effect, the watermelon winning notification effect, and the bell winning notification effect is stored in the notification effect image area 189d. is resident in advance, the display control device 81, based on the lottery result command received from the main control device 101, when executing the BB winning notification effect, the watermelon winning notification effect, or the bell winning notification effect, Instead of newly reading the corresponding image data, the image controller 188 can draw each notification effect image by reading the image data resident in advance in the notification effect image area 189d of the resident video RAM 189. It's becoming As a result, since it is not necessary to sequentially read out corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, even if a NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 187, each notification effect image is stopped after receiving the lottery result command. It can be displayed before the buttons 42-44 can be operated by the player.

In the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 detects inserted medals based on the detection results of the inserted medal detection devices (the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b). If it is determined that the medal is jammed during passage or that the medal has been illegally pulled out, the main controller 101 notifies the display controller 81 of the occurrence of a sensor error by means of an error command, as described above. Also, when the main controller 101 detects the occurrence of another error, the main controller 101 notifies the display controller 81 of the occurrence of the error together with the contents of the error by means of an error command. The display control device 81 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the auxiliary display section 65 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error from the viewpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. Since image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance, the display control device 81 updates the image data corresponding to the predetermined error message from the character ROM 187 based on the error command received from the main control device 101. By reading the image data previously resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM 189, the image controller 188 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 187. Therefore, even if the character ROM 187 uses a NAND flash memory 187a with a slow read speed, each error message is read after an error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The image controller 188 is provided with a buffer RAM 188a. The buffer RAM 188a functions as a buffer memory for data transfer from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or normal video RAM 190, and has a storage capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 187a provided in the character ROM 187 (for example, 132 kilobytes), and is configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 181 .

When transferring image data from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 189 or normal video RAM 190, the MPU 181 reads one block worth of data from the character ROM 187, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 188a, and transfers it to the resident video RAM 189 or normal video RAM 188a. The image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is transferred to the resident RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 when the RAM 190 is not in use.

If the image data were directly transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 without providing the buffer RAM 188, the character ROM 187 would be composed of the NAND flash memory 187a, and the reading speed would be slow. Therefore, during transfer of image data of a desired size, one port of the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, which is a one-port type DRAM, is occupied by image data transfer from the character ROM 187, resulting in a lengthy operation. It will be in a state where time and other data cannot be accessed. As a result, the image controller 188 cannot read image data from the resident video RAM 189 or normal video RAM 190 to draw an image or transfer the drawn image data to the auxiliary display unit 65 during this period. Image display on the auxiliary display section 65 may be delayed. Also, even if a multi-port type (a type provided with a plurality of input/output ports) DRAM is used for the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190, one port is occupied for image data transfer from the character ROM 187. Therefore, the control using the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 in the image controller 188 is restricted, and the control may become complicated.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, the image controller 188 is provided with the buffer RAM 188a composed of SRAM capable of operating at high speed. stored and then transferred from buffer RAM 188a to resident video RAM 189 or normal video RAM 190 in a short period of time. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to.

The display of the image on the auxiliary display section 65 is performed periodically at fixed time intervals (for example, approximately every 30 milliseconds). At the same time, the drawing of the image and the drawn image data must be transferred to the auxiliary display section 65 . Therefore, when accessing the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190, priority must be given to reading image data necessary for drawing and writing and reading drawn image data.

In this slot machine 10, a resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 188 is accessing the resident video RAM 189 (that is, that it is in use) and a resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 188 is A normal video RAM access flag (not shown) is provided in the image controller 188 to indicate that the video RAM 190 is being accessed (ie, busy). These access flags are set to ON when the image controller 188 is accessing the corresponding video RAM, and OFF when not accessing. When transferring the image data from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, the MPU 181 checks the contents of the access flags corresponding to the transfer destination video RAMs 189 and 190, and reads the image data necessary for drawing. Also, it confirms whether or not the video RAMs 189 and 190 of the transfer destination are being used by the image controller 188 for writing or reading drawing image data. Then, when the video RAMs 189 and 190 of the transfer destination are not in use, control is performed to transfer the image data. Thus, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 without interrupting reading of image data necessary for drawing and writing or reading of drawn image data.

Now, with reference to FIG. 11, the display timing of the image on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a scanning area of the screen of the auxiliary display section 65 and a display area where an image is actually displayed on the screen. As shown in FIG. 11, an area larger than the display area in which the image is actually displayed is set as the scanning area. The screen is scanned from left to right and from top to bottom while each pixel forming the screen is driven (so-called raster scan). At this time, the drawing image data is actually set only in the display area where the image is displayed. , the image controller 188 does not transfer the drawn image data to the auxiliary display section 65 . That is, during the blank period, even when an image is displayed by scanning the auxiliary display section 65, it is not possible to draw an image using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190. Also, the drawn image data stored in the normal video RAM 190 is not read out and transferred to the auxiliary display section 65 . Therefore, during this blank period, there is always a period during which the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 are not used. By utilizing the unused period of each of the video RAMs 189 and 190 that occurs during this blank period, it is possible to reliably perform this operation.

In the MPU 181, as a method of confirming whether or not the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 are in use, signals sent and received between the image controller 188 and the resident video RAM 189, or 188 and the normal video RAM 190 may be monitored by the MPU 181 to determine whether the resident video RAM 189 or normal video RAM 190 is in use. Further, when the image controller 188 starts accessing the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190, or terminates the access, the information is sent from the image controller 188 to the MPU 181 at any time so that the MPU 181 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 189 and the normal video RAM 190 are in use.

Also, when the image controller 188 scans the auxiliary display section 65, the MPU 181 checks the drive state of the image controller 188 or receives notification from the image controller 188 to determine whether or not it is during the blank period. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each video RAM 189, 190 is unused. Thus, only the scanning state of the auxiliary display section 65 of the image controller 188 is checked to determine whether or not it is unused, so that determination can be easily made.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the MPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and output of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with an input. Of these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described below with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 12 to 17. FIG.

First, with reference to FIG. 12, timer interrupt processing periodically executed by MPU 102 of main control unit 101 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt processing. In the MPU 102 of the main control unit 101, a timer interrupt occurs every 1.49 msec, for example, and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is executed by the MPU 102 in response to the timer interrupt.

In this timer interrupt process, first, a register saving process is performed (S101). In this register saving process, the values of all the registers in the MPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . Next, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set (S102), and if the power failure flag is set (S102: Yes), the power failure processing is executed (S103).

Here, the outline of the power failure processing executed in S103 will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the transmission of the command has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, the processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the transmission of the command is terminated. When command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of MPU 102 is saved in the backup area of RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. This prevents the reel unit 31 from running out of control until the power supply is completely cut off, and prevents abnormal output from output devices such as the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not is calculated and stored in a backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the processing of S104 is performed. Also, if the output of the power failure signal continues, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in the process of S102 (S102: No), various processes after S104 are performed. That is, in the process of S104, a watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. Next, the MPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set (S105). A stepping motor control process for driving the motor is performed (S106). Next, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 8) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 are read. At the same time, sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not the read result is normal (S107).

In this sensor monitoring process, if there is an abnormality in the reading result of each sensor, for example, based on the detection results of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b, the inserted medal is clogged or pulled out. is detected, it is determined that a sensor error has occurred. An error command containing information is sent to the display controller 81 .

Subsequently, in the process of S108, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer (S108), and the number of bets is output to the external centralized terminal board 121 by counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts. in/out counter processing is performed (S109).

Next, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a start command and a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed (S110). After that, a segment data setting process for setting segment data to be displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is performed (S111). Segment data display processing is performed to supply the data to the respective display units 60 to 62 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. (S112).

Then, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 (S113). corresponding register (S114). After that, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (S115), and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing executed by MPU 102 of main controller 101 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the normal processing.

The normal process is a process for performing main control related to the game. When the normal process is executed by the MPU 102, first, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (S201), and then the game is enabled. A pre-start process is performed (S202). In this pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 and the like complete initialization. Then, when the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, the game management processing shown in subsequent S203 to S213 is performed.

As the game management process, first, in the process of S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game, winning flags indicating winning of each winning except BB winning, etc.) are stored. After clearing, in the subsequent processing of S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process of S204, it is determined whether or not the replay winning has been established in the previous game, and if the replay winning has been established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number. and end the start waiting process. Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when a replay win is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals.

On the other hand, if none of the replay winnings has been established, the sensor checks whether or not there is an abnormality in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process of the timer interrupt process (see S107 in FIG. 12). An abnormality confirmation process is performed, and when an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do. After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either is performed, the medal insertion process is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the end of the start waiting process of S204, it is then determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached the specified number (S205). Then, the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed. In this embodiment, the prescribed number of bets is set according to the game state of the slot machine 10 .

That is, when the game state of the slot machine 10 is the normal game state, the prescribed number is set to 1 to 3, and when the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, the prescribed number is set to 3. As a result, the game can be started even if the number of bets is not only 3 but also 1 or 2 in the normal game state. Then, when the game is started with the number of bets of 1 or 2 (1 bet or 2 bets), in the lottery process (see S210) described later, the above-mentioned lottery table for betting 1 or 2 is displayed. Since a lottery table is set and a lottery for a winning mode (role) is performed, there is a high probability that the number of medals to be paid out will be three cherry bells when the game is played with one bet or two bets. It is possible to establish a winning prize or a 7-bell winning prize in which the number of medals to be paid out is two. When three medals are paid out as a result of winning a Cherry Bell prize, the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting to win a BB prize. A player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Also, when two medals are paid out as a result of winning a prize of 7 bells, the player inserts the two medals and waits for a further three medals to be paid out in the hope of winning a cherry bell prize. You can enjoy another game. Then, if the cherry bell win is established, the player can play the game by inserting the three paid-out medals while expecting the BB prize to be established. can enjoy. Also, even if the result of the game played by inserting one or two medals is a loss, the game can be finished without leaving any extra medals for the player. As described above, even if the number of bets is 1 or 2 in the normal gaming state, the player can receive additional rewards by using the 1-bet lottery table and the 2-bet lottery table set in the present embodiment. The game can be enjoyed to the very end without leaving any extra medals.

On the other hand, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, by setting the specified number of bets to three, the watermelon with a large number of medals to be paid out is made to be inserted by the player in the bonus state while allowing the player to insert three medals. By increasing the probability of winning a prize or winning a bell and setting a high expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in one game, the total number of medals to be paid out in a bonus state can be increased to 250 with a small number of games. Therefore, the player can receive a large number of medals paid out in a short time, and on the other hand, the operating rate of the slot machine 10 can be increased on the hall side.

As a result of the process of S205, if the number of bets has reached the specified number (S205: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (S206). If the start lever 41 is not operated (S206: No), the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated (S206: Yes), the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are bet on the slot machine 10. This means that a start command has been issued to start a game. Therefore, in such a case, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets (S207). In the subsequent process of 208, an effective line setting process for setting an effective line is performed (S208). In this effective line setting process, all the combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, the lower line L3, the lower right line L4, and the upper right line L5 are set as valid lines.

Then, a start command is set (S209). Here, the start command is a command that is sent to the display control device 81 so as to recognize that the start command has been issued. In this normal process, information about the number of bets (the number of inserted medals) accepted in the process of S205 is included in the start command and set. The start command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer (not shown) that stores various commands generated in normal processing, and the timer interrupt processing described above (FIG. 12) is executed every 1.49 ms. ) is sent to the display control device 81 by the process of S110. As a result, the display control device 81 can recognize that a game start command has been generated by receiving the start command, and can also comprehend the number of medals (bet number) inserted by the player for the game. , and various effects can be executed by each auxiliary effect unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65) according to the number of bets.

After that, the lottery process of S210, the reel control process of S211, the medal payout process of S212, and the bonus state process of S213 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to S203. Then, in the power failure processing (S103) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12), the processing from S203 to S213 is repeatedly executed until an infinite loop is entered due to power shutdown by the power switch 71 or power failure.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the lottery process (S210) executed in the normal process (see FIG. 13) in the MPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the lottery process.

In the lottery process, first, a random number to be used when performing a lottery for a winning mode (hand) is obtained (S301). As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-running counter 107 at that time each time the start lever 41 is operated. By reading the value of the counter 107 and storing the value in a predetermined area of the RAM 106, the value of the random number used for the lottery is acquired.

After the random number is obtained by the process of S301, a lottery table setting process for setting a lottery table for performing a lottery for the winning mode is performed (S302). Details of the lottery table setting process in S302 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the lottery table setting process executed by the MPU 102 of the main controller 101. As shown in FIG. In this lottery table setting process, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is discriminated, and furthermore, according to the number of inserted medals (number of bets) and the setting state set in the slot machine 10, the lottery table storage area 105a is displayed. A corresponding lottery table is set from among a plurality of lottery tables stored in .

In this processing, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the bonus state (S401). Since it is in the state, it is then determined whether or not the number of inserted medals (the number of bets) is three (three medals multiplied) (S402). If the number of bets is 3 (S402: Yes), six 3-bet lottery tables provided corresponding to the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6" that the slot machine 10 can take, respectively. Among them, the lottery table at the time of three bets corresponding to the currently set setting state is set (S403), the lottery table setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the lottery process. Thus, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the normal gaming state, when the game is started with the number of bets of 3, the lottery table for 3-bet corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set. .

If it is determined that the number of bets is not 3 as a result of the process of S402 (S402: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 (2 is multiplied) (S404). Then, if the number of bets is 2 (S404: Yes), six 2-bet lottery tables provided corresponding to the setting states of "setting 1" to "setting 6" that the slot machine 10 can take, respectively. Of these, the two-play lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting state is set (S405), the lottery table setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the lottery process. Thus, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the normal gaming state, when the game is started with the number of bets of 2, the lottery table for double betting corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set. .

Further, when it is determined that the number of bets is not two as a result of the process of S404 (S404: No), it can be determined that the number of bets is one (one bet). Of the six lottery tables for one bet provided corresponding to the setting states of setting 1 to setting 6, the one bet lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting state is set. (S406), the lottery table setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the lottery process. As a result, when the game state of the slot machine 10 is the normal game state, when the game is started with the number of bets of one card, the lottery table for one-card bet corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set. .

On the other hand, if the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state as a result of the process of S401 (S401: Yes), the setting states corresponding to the possible setting states of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" of the slot machine 10 are provided. A bonus state lottery table corresponding to the currently set setting state is set (S407), the lottery table setting processing is ended, and the lottery processing is returned to. As a result, when the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is the bonus state, the bonus lottery table corresponding to the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set.

As described above, in the lottery table setting process, the lottery table storage area 105a is stored in accordance with the current gaming state of the slot machine 10, the number of inserted medals (the number of bets), and the setting state set in the slot machine 10. A corresponding lottery table is set from among the plurality of lottery tables obtained.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description of the lottery process is continued. When the lottery table setting process of S302 is completed, the index value IV is then set to 1 (S303), and the determination value DV used when performing the lottery (whether determination) of the winning mode is set (S304). In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to 1, which is the current index value IV, is added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, a lottery for a prize mode corresponding to the index value IV is performed. In this lottery, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. Then, when it exceeds 65535 (S305: Yes), the winning flag of the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 (S306). That is, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=1, the BB prize winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in the process of S306, and when the IV=2 the determination value DV exceeds 65535. In this case, in the processing of S306, the watermelon winning prize winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. If it is set in the storage area 106a and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=4, in the processing of S306, the cherry bell winning prize winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a and determined when IV=5. When the value DV exceeds 65535, in the process of S306, the 7-bell winning prize winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. A replay prize winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a.

By the way, if the set winning flag is any of the watermelon winning flag, bell winning winning flag, cherry bell winning winning flag, 7 bell winning winning flag, or replay winning winning flag, this winning flag will be set. is reset after the end of the selected game (see S203 of normal processing shown in FIG. 13). On the other hand, if the set winning flag is the BB winning winning flag, this BB winning winning flag is reset under the condition that the BB winning has been established. That is, the BB prize winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games. For example, after the BB winning flag is set, if the symbols are not aligned in the stop symbols of the BB winning mode, that is, if the BB winning is not established, the BB winning flag is carried over to the next game without being reset. be

In the process of S306 in a state where the BB winning prize winning flag is carried over, if the current index value IV is 1, the BB winning prize winning flag is not set, and if the current index value IV is 2 to 6, the index value Set the IV and the corresponding win flag. That is, in a game in which the BB winning winning flag is carried over, the corresponding winning flag is set when the winning mode other than the BB winning is won, and the corresponding BB winning winning flag is set when the BB winning is won. Do not set.

In the process of S305, if it is determined that the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 (S305: No), it means that the winning mode corresponding to the index value IV has been deviated. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (S307), and then it is determined whether or not there is a winning mode corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a judging combination to be selected by lottery (determination of success or failure). S308). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a judging combination to be judged (S308: Yes), the process returns to S304 to continue judging the winning mode. At this time, in the process of S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV used for determining whether the previous combination is correct (that is, the current determination value DV) to obtain a new determination value DV. Then, in the process of S305, it is determined whether the winning mode is appropriate based on the determination value DV.

Here, when the game state of the slot machine 10 is in the normal game state by the lottery table setting process of S302, the lottery table for three-bet play, the lottery table for two-bet, and the lottery for one-bet for the normal game state are set. Since the lottery table to be used is set from the table according to the number of bets, as shown in FIGS. The lottery for the winning mode is performed after setting the number sufficiently higher than when the game is played by inserting one or two medals. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to let the player play one game by inserting three medals while making the player expect that many medals will be paid out when the BB win is established. Therefore, the medals are consumed quickly, and the operating rate of the slot machines in the hall can be increased.

In addition, when the game is played by inserting one or two medals, the cherry bell winning with the number of medals to be paid out of three is set as a winning combination candidate, and the winning probability is set to be high, and then the winning mode is selected. Since a lottery is carried out, when the player has one or two medals left at hand, if the player wins a cherry bell prize, three medals can be paid out with a high probability of winning a BB prize. It is possible to have the player play one game by inserting one or two medals remaining at hand while making the player expect. Furthermore, when the game is played by inserting one medal, the 7-bell winning with two medals paid out is also set as a winning combination candidate, and the winning probability is set high, and then a lottery for the winning mode is conducted. Therefore, when the player has one medal left in his/her hand, if the player wins seven bells, two medals can be paid out to aim for another cherry bell win. One game can be played by inserting one medal left at hand. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals.

In addition, when the lottery table for one-to-bet or the lottery table for two-to-bet is set and the lottery for the winning mode is performed, as described above with reference to FIG. In this case as well, it is possible to set the ratio of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of bets to a value that is less than 100% and infinitely close to 100%, and to perform a lottery for the winning mode. Therefore, even if the game is played with one or two bets, the number of medals is hardly reduced, so if one or two medals remain in the player's hand, the one or two medals are used. It is possible to surely make the player think that he/she wants to play the game. On the other hand, since the number of medals will decrease if the game is played repeatedly with one bet or two bets, the player should not aim to increase the number of medals by repeatedly playing the game with one bet or two bets. If there are three or more medals, the player can be induced to play the game with three medals, which has a high probability of winning a BB prize.

Also, by switching each lottery table according to the number of bets and performing lottery for the winning mode, as described above with reference to FIGS. It is a winning mode that is established only when the game is played, and when the game is played with three bets, the cherry bell winning is not established and can be treated as a loss, so there is only one cherry bell winning. It is possible to attract the player's attention as a special small winning prize exclusively for bets and double bets. Similarly, a winning mode is established in which a 7-bell win is established only when the game is played with a single bet, and a 7-bell win is not established when a game is played with a two-bet or three-bet. , is treated as a loss, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the 7-bell winning as a special small combination winning only for one-piece winning. Therefore, when the game is played with one bet or two bet, if the symbol stops at the stop symbol of cherry bell winning or 7 bell winning, great joy can be given to the player.

In addition, even when the game is played with one or two bets, although the probability of winning is extremely low, it is possible to perform the lottery for the winning mode by setting the BB prize to be established. It is possible to make the player expect to win a BB prize when the game is played with a one-coin or two-coin bet.

In addition, when the game is played with one bet or two bets, the probability of winning the watermelon prize or the bell prize is set low, while the probability of winning the cherry bell prize or the 7 bell prize is set high, and the lottery of the prize mode is performed. Therefore, it is possible to further impress the player that the cherry bell winning prize or the 7 bell winning prize is a special small winning combination with one or two bets. When the game is played with a double bet, it is possible to make the player expect to win a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize.

After the winning flag is set in the process of S306, or when it is determined in the process of S308 that there is no judging combination to be selected by lottery (S308: No), it means that the lottery for the winning mode has ended. In such a case, a lottery result command is set (S309). Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. A lottery result command is generated so as to include information suggesting a winning combination. Therefore, when not only the winning flag set by the lottery of the current game but also the BB winning winning flag carried over from the past game and stored in the winning flag storage area 106a, the BB winning mode is also a winning combination. That is suggested by the lottery result command. Further, when the winning flag is not set in the winning flag storage area 106a, the lottery result command indicates that there is no winning combination and the winning combination is lost.

Like the start command, the lottery result command set here is temporarily stored in a ring buffer (not shown) that stores various commands generated in the normal process, and is executed by the timer described above every 1.49 ms. It is transmitted to the display control device 81 by the processing of S110 of the interrupt processing (see FIG. 12). Upon receiving the lottery result command, the display control device 81 executes drive control of the upper lamp 63 and the auxiliary display section 65 to suggest a winning combination, for example.

In this embodiment, the lottery result command is set after the lottery for the winning mode and before the reel control process (S211 in FIG. 13) for controlling the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The lottery result command is sent to the display control device 81 within about 1.5 ms at the latest after the command is set (that is, after the time lag until the command is sent by timer interrupt processing). When the display control device 81 receives the lottery result command, the lottery result command process (see FIG. 20) described later is executed without delay. While the stop switches 42 to 44 cannot be operated, it is possible to cause the auxiliary effect section (the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65) to perform an effect suggesting a winning combination. Therefore, the player can grasp the winning combination suggested by the effect before operating the stop switches 42 to 44, and the timing of operating the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the grasped winning combination. can be adjusted.

Next, a slip table setting process for setting a slip table (stop table) for reel stop control is performed (S310), and the lottery process ends. Here, the slide table is a table that defines how much the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be slid (rotated) before stopping from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. In other words, the slide table refers to reaching symbols (arriving symbols) that reach base positions (lower positions of corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R in this embodiment) when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed. number) and a stop symbol (stop symbol number) to be actually stopped at the base position.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, as the stop mode for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode of stopping after sliding. In the slide table, for each symbol number of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop mode to be set when the symbol indicated by the symbol number becomes the reaching symbol is specified from among the five patterns. A number of slide tables are prepared for each winning mode.

By setting this slide table, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to stop in a predetermined stopping manner from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated until a specified time (190 msec) elapses. This allows the player to have an impression as if the pattern arrangement (stopped number) to be stopped within the range visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is determined by the player's operation.

In the slip table setting process of S310, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is confirmed, and the slip table that uniquely corresponds to the set winning flag is stored in the slip table storage area of the RAM 106. 106b. As a result, it is possible to stop, on the effective line (see FIG. 6), a combination of symbols corresponding to a prize mode (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, that has been won in the lottery as much as possible within the specified time, It is possible to prevent the combination of symbols corresponding to the prize mode not won in the lottery from stopping on the effective line.

Here, as described above, the BB prize winning flag is configured so that once the flag is set, it is carried over to the next game until the BB prize is established. Winning flags corresponding to watermelon winning prizes, bell winning prizes, cherry bell winning prizes, 7 bell winning prizes, and replay winning prizes set as a result of , and the BB winning winning flag carried over are simultaneously set in the winning flag storage 106a. may be In this case, instead of the BB prize, the processing is performed so as to set the slip table corresponding to the watermelon prize, the bell prize, the cherry bell prize, the 7 bell prize, or the replay prize for which the winning flag is set in the slip table storage area 106b. done. As a result, the winning flag is cleared for each game, and if no winning is established, the position as a winning combination is lost. Replay winning can be established more reliably. Then, the BB winning winning flag corresponding to the BB winning not established here is maintained and carried over to the next game.

Now, in the sliding table setting process of S310, if the cherry bell winning prize winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, the cherry bell winning sliding table is stored in the sliding table storage area 106b. Here, the "cherry" symbols, which are the stopped symbols on the left reel 32L when the cherry bell win is established, are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the intervals between similar symbols are 7 symbols. Thus, even when the left stop switch 42 is operated at any timing, the "cherry" pattern can be stopped at any one of the upper, middle and lower positions of the display window 26L. Also, the "bell" symbols, which are the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M when a cherry bell win is established, are arranged on the middle reel 32M so that the interval between similar symbols is 5 symbols or less. Thus, even when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any timing, the "bell" pattern can be stopped at the middle position of the display window 26M.

Therefore, in the cherry bell winning slide table, when the left stop switch 42 is pressed, no matter what symbol reaches the base position (that is, no matter what symbol number it reaches), the display window 26L A stop mode is set in which the "cherry" pattern can be stopped at any of the upper, middle, and lower positions, and when the middle stop switch 43 is pressed, no matter what pattern reaches the base position (i.e. , whatever the arrival symbol number), the stop mode in which the "bell" symbol can be stopped is set at the middle position in the display window 26M. As a result, when the cherry bell winning winning flag is set, the stop symbol corresponding to the cherry bell winning is displayed on the middle line L2 by the cherry bell winning slide table regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 by the player. , the downward-sloping line L4, or the upward-sloping line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, it is possible to establish a cherry bell winning prize without so-called omission.

Further, when the 7-bell winning prize winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, the 7-bell winning slip table is stored in the slip table storage area 106b. Then, the "7" symbol, which is the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L when the 7-bell winning is established, is arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between similar symbols is 7 symbols, like the "cherry" symbol. In addition, the "bell" symbols, which are the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M when the 7 bell winning is established, are arranged on the middle reel 32M such that the interval between the same kind of symbols is 5 symbols or less, as described above. It is

Therefore, in the 7-bell winning slide table, as in the cherry bell winning slide table, when the left stop switch 42 is pressed, no matter what pattern reaches the reference point position (that is, any arrival pattern number). ), a stop mode in which the "7" symbol can be stopped is set in any of the upper, middle, and lower positions in the display window 26L, and when the middle stop switch 43 is pressed, any reference point position is set. A stop mode is set in which the "bell" pattern can be stopped at the middle position in the display window 26M even if the pattern has arrived (that is, regardless of the arrival pattern number). As a result, when the 7-bell winning winning flag is set, the stop symbol corresponding to the 7-bell winning is displayed on the middle line L2 by the 7-bell winning sliding table, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 by the player. , the downward-sloping line L4, or the upward-sloping line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, it is possible to establish a 7-bell winning prize without so-called omission.

In this way, in the lottery of the winning modes, when a cherry bell prize in which 3 medals are paid out or a 7 bell prize in which 2 medals are paid out is won, the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44. Regardless of the timing, the stop symbol corresponding to the winning of cherry bells and the stopping symbol corresponding to the winning of 7 bells can be displayed on any one of the middle line L2, the downward-sloping line L4, and the upward-sloping line L5 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, it is possible to establish a cherry bell winning prize or a 7 bell winning prize without missing anything. Therefore, when the player starts the game with one bet and two bets, the cherry bell winning or the 7 bell winning can be established reliably without relying on a human operation. Also, while aiming at the stop symbols of other prizes (for example, BB prize), the game can be played in anticipation of establishing a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize.

Next, referring to FIG. 16, the reel control process, which is the process of S211 of the normal process (see FIG. 13), will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the reel control process executed by the MUP 102 of the main controller 101. As shown in FIG.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed (S501). In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing is performed to set rotation start information in a motor control storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 106. conduct. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (see S106 in FIG. 12) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches a constant speed, the MPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

After the rotation start process of S501, pre-stop process is performed by the processes of S502 to S505. In this pre-stop process, first, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated (S502). If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated (S502: No), the process of S502 is repeated to wait until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated (S502: Yes), the process proceeds to S503, and whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, the stop command has occurred (S503). If no stop command has been generated (S503: No), the process returns to S502 and waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. As a result, when a stop switch corresponding to a non-rotating reel is operated, it is ignored.

On the other hand, if a stop command has been issued (S503: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current stop command is the third stop command, that is, whether or not the stop switch has been operated while only one reel is rotating. (S504). If the current stop command is the third stop command (S504: Yes), the process of S505 is skipped, the pre-stop process is terminated, and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, in the case of the first stop command generated while all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating or the second stop command generated while two reels are rotating (S504: Yes), The process proceeds to S505, the first change table processing is performed, and the pre-stop processing ends. Then, the process proceeds to S506.

Here, the first slip table change processing is processing for changing the slip table stored in the slip table storage area 106b of the RAM 106 before stopping the reel corresponding to the stop command. In the first slide table change process, for example, when the stop switches 43 and 44 other than the left stop switch 42 are operated and a first stop command is generated, the slide table is changed.

Now, when the stop pre-processing of S502 to S505 is completed, it means that the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel is operated to advance the game, and a stop command is generated. In such a case, stop control processing shown in S506 to S512 is then performed in order to stop the spinning reels.

First, in S506, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the lower row at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the lower stage is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Subsequently, the slip number of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated from the symbol number data corresponding to the arrival symbol in the slip table set in the slip table storage area 106b (S507). After that, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the arrival symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol to be actually stopped in the lower stage is determined (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal (S509), and if they are not equal (S509: No), the process of S509 is repeatedly executed If they are equal (S509: Yes), reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reels is performed (S510). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (S511), and if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have not stopped (S511: No), the second slide table change process is executed. (S512). Then, the process returns to S502, and the pre-stop process is executed again.

Here, the second slip table change processing is processing for changing the slip table stored in the slip table storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second slip table change process, the slip table is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. For example, in a situation where only the bell winning prize winning flag is set, when the "bell" symbol of the 12th of the left reel 32L and the 12th of the middle reel 32M are stopped in the middle row, the upper row of them is the left reel 32L. 13 and the 13th "7" symbol of the middle reel 32M are stopped.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S511 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped (S511: Yes), the payout determination process is performed (S513), and this process ends. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the winning symbol combination is arranged on the activated line.

In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on each activated line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stage of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the activated line is determined. judge. If a winning has been established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination matches the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination and the winning flag match, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area (not shown) provided in a RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination and the winning flag do not match, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an error occurrence processing is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. When the payout determination has been completed for all the activated lines, the payout determination process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process of S212 of the normal process (see FIG. 13) will be described. In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area (not shown) in the payout determination process of S513 of the reel control process (see FIG. 16) is 0 or not. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process (see S513 in FIG. 16) that the winning of the payout of medals has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the replay winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When the replay win is not established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and when the replay win is established, the replay state setting process is performed to change the game state to the replay state, and the medal payout process is terminated. do. In addition, in the start waiting process (see S204 in FIG. 13) executed in the normal process described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

On the other hand, when the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotating plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current game state is the bonus state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is subtracted. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the bonus state processing executed in the processing of S213 of the normal processing (see FIG. 12) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing bonus state processing executed by MPU 102 of main controller 101 .

First, an outline of this bonus state processing will be described. In the bonus state processing, when the game state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state, the game is continuously shifted to the RB state until a predetermined number of medals (250 in this embodiment) are paid out. be. Then, when 12 JAC games are played in one RB state and winning is established 8 times during the JAC game, the RB state is ended even before the 12 JAC games are played. The bonus state is terminated when the number of paid-out medals reaches a predetermined number, and not only the bonus state but also the RB state is terminated when the number of paid-out medals reaches the predetermined number during the RB state.

Next, details of the bonus state processing will be described. In the bonus state processing, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the slot machine 10 is in the bonus state (S601).

In this BB determination process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the BB winning prize winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a (S602). Based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process executed at S513 of the process (see FIG. 16), it is confirmed whether or not the BB winning has been established (S603).

In the process of S603, when the BB prize is established (S603: Yes), the BB start process is executed (S604). In the BB start process, the BB winning prize winning flag stored in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset, and after clearing the setting flag stored in the status information storage area 106c, the BB setting flag is reset to the status information storage area 106c. is set to be a BB game, which is a type of bonus game. Also, a processing of setting 250 to the remaining payout number counter provided in the state information storage area 106c for counting the remaining number of medals that can be paid out during the BB game, and displaying 250 on the remaining payout number display unit 61. I do. Incidentally, whether or not the current game state is the bonus state (see S601) is determined by whether or not the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c.

Subsequently, in the processing of S605, RB start processing is executed (S605). In the RB start process, a remaining JAC winning counter for counting the number of JAC winnings that can be established is set to 8, and a remaining JAC game counter for counting the number of remaining JAC games is set to 12. Each counter such as the remaining JAC winning counter and the remaining JAC game counter is provided in the state information storage area 106c. In addition, in the RB start process, an RB command to be transmitted to the display control device 81 is also set so that the player can recognize that the RB game will start.

Next, in the process of S606, a status command is set (S607). Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to make the player grasp the current game state. That is, when it is determined in the processing of S602 that the BB winning winning flag is not set (S602: No), a status command indicating normal game is set, and the BB winning is established in the processing of S603. If it is determined that the game has not been played (S603: No), a state command indicating that the game is a BB carryover game is set. Set state command.

After the process of S607, the number of games display process is performed (S607), and this process ends. In the number-of-games display process, when the current gaming state is not a BB game (RB game), a process of clearing the display of the remaining payout number display section 61, the number of payout display section 62, and the like is performed.

Further, when the game state is the bonus state in the process of S601 (S601: Yes), a small winning combination set in the payout determination process executed in the process of S513 of the reel control process (see FIG. 16) is executed. It is checked whether or not a watermelon prize or a bell prize, which are role prizes, has been established (S608). In the processing of S608, when a watermelon prize or a bell prize is established (S608: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining JAC prize counter (S609), and further, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining JAC game counter (S610). Further, when the watermelon winning prize and the bell winning prize are not established (S608: No), one JAC game has been completed, so the value of the remaining JAC game counter is decremented by 1 without performing the processing of S609 ( S610).

Subsequently, in the processing of S611, it is confirmed whether or not either the remaining JAC winning counter or the remaining JAC game counter has become 0 (S611). In the processing of S611, when any one of them is 0, that is, when JAC wins are established 8 times or JAC games are completed 12 times (S611: Yes), it means that the end condition of the RB game is established. Therefore, RB end processing for resetting the values of the remaining JAC winning counter and the remaining JAC game counter is executed (S612). As a result, 12 JAC games are played in one RB state, and the RB state can be terminated even before the 12 JAC games are played when winning is established 8 times during the JAC game.

Then, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the remaining payout number counter is 0 (S613), and if it is not 0 (S613: No), the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number. , the BB game end condition is not met, so the above-described RB start process is executed (S614). After that, a status command indicating that it is a BB game is set (S606), the number of games display process is executed (607), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S611, when neither the value of the remaining JAC winning counter nor the remaining JAC game counter is 0, that is, when the JAC winning has not been established 8 times and the JAC games have not been completed 12 times. (S611: No), it is checked whether the count value of the remaining payout counter is 0 (S615). In the processing of S615, if the counter value is not 0 (S615: No), it means that the number of medals paid out during the BB game has not reached the predetermined number and the conditions for ending the BB game have not been met. Therefore, a status command indicating that it is a BB game is set (S606), the number of games display process is executed (S607), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S615, if the count value of the remaining payout counter is 0 (S615: Yes), it means that the end condition of the BB game is met, so the bonus state end process shown in S616-S617. to run. In the bonus state end processing, the RB end processing described above is first executed (S616), and then the BB end processing for clearing the data in the state information storage area 153b is executed (S617). Also, in the processing of S613 described above, even if the count value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts is 0 (S613: Yes), it means that the end condition of the BB game is satisfied, so the BB end processing of S617 is executed. do. After the BB end processing is performed, a state command indicating normal game (that is, normal game state) is set (S606), the number of games display processing is performed (S607), and this processing is terminated. As a result, the bonus state can be terminated when the number of medals paid out reaches 250. Further, when the number of paid out medals reaches 250 in the middle of the RB state, not only the bonus state but also the RB state can be ended by the processing of S616.

Next, each control process executed by the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. The processing of the MPU 181 can be broadly classified into display main processing that is started when the power is turned on, display timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1 msec in this embodiment), and command input from the main control unit 101. and stores the received command in the received command storage area 185a. The commands stored in the received command storage area 185a are checked during the display main process, and various processes are performed according to the contents of the commands. Below, display main processing, start command processing for processing a start command among commands stored in the received command storage area 185a, lottery result command processing for processing a lottery result command, and processing for an error command are performed. Error command processing will be explained.

First, the display main processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 18 . FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing display main processing. This display main processing is executed when the power is turned on by the recovery from a power failure or the ON operation of the power switch 71. conversion processing, check processing of commands received from the main controller 101, power failure processing when a power failure occurs, and the like are performed. Transfer processing of resident image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 is also executed by the display surface processing as one processing of the initialization processing.

When the display main process is executed, first, as one process of the initialization process, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 181, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 181 and the I/O device. (S701). Next, the process shifts to S702, and as one process of the initialization process, the images to be resident in the resident video RAM 189, that is, the main image at power-on, the back image, the character pattern, and the notification are displayed in the processes of S702 to S710. Image data corresponding to each image such as an effect image and an error message image are read from the character ROM 187 and transferred to the resident video RAM 189 .

Specifically, first, in the process of S702, the main image data at power-on is first read from the character ROM 187, and the data is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a (S702). After the power-on main image data is stored in the buffer RAM 188a, the power-on main image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is transferred to the resident video RAM 189 and stored in the power-on main image area 189a. (S703). If the data capacity of the main image data at the time of power-on is equal to or less than the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 187a (for example, 132 kilobytes), which is also the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 188a, the processing of S702 and S703 once will: When the power is turned on, all the main image data are transferred to the resident video RAM, so the process proceeds directly to S704. If the data capacity of the power-on main image data is larger than the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 187a, all the power-on main image data is stored in the power-on main image area of the resident video RAM 189. 189a, the processes of S702 and S703 are repeatedly executed, and then the process proceeds to S704.

Then, in the process of S704, the image controller 188 is instructed to draw the power-on main image (S704). As a result, the image controller 188 reads the power-on main image data stored in the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189, draws the power-on main image, and renders the drawn power-on main image. After the corresponding drawing image data is temporarily stored in the normal video RAM 190, the process of transferring it to the auxiliary display section 65 in accordance with the display timing of the auxiliary display section 65 is executed. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. This display is such that the other image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, and the normal image is drawn by the image controller by the processing of S711, which will be described later. continue until instructed to do so.

Since the slot machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 187a for the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident memory due to its slow read speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred to the video RAM 189 . Therefore, as in the present display main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and the power-on main image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. By doing so, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 189, the player or hall staff can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. . Therefore, the display control device 81 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display section 65 when the power is turned on. can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 at the time of power-on, the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 189 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 when the power is turned on, it can be immediately confirmed that the slot machine 10 has started to operate without any problem when the power is turned on. Using the NAND flash memory 187a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 187 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

After the processing of S704, it is then checked whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state, that is, whether or not the drive voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage (less than 10 volts in this embodiment) (S705). If it is in a lowered state (S705: Yes), it is determined that the power supply has been cut off, and power failure processing is executed (S706).

On the other hand, in the process of S705, if the system state is not in the voltage drop state (S705: No), then the resident target image data other than the main image data at power-on is sequentially transferred from the character ROM 187 to the NAND flash memory 187a. One block is read out and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 188a (S707). When one block of image data is stored in the buffer RAM 188a, it is determined whether or not the resident video RAM 189 is in use due to reading accompanying drawing of the main image when the power is turned on (S708). While the video RAM 189 is in use (S708: Yes), the process of S708 is repeatedly executed and the process is waited. When it is determined that the resident video RAM 189 is unused (S708: No), the image data stored in the buffer RAM 188a is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, and the area corresponding to the image data, that is, the rear image is displayed. It is stored in one of the area 189b, the character design area 189c, the notification effect image area 189d, and the error message image area 189e (S709).

In this way, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, the buffer RAM 188a made up of SRAM is interposed in the middle so that the character ROM 187 made up of the NAND flash memory 187a whose read speed is slow can be transferred in time. To temporarily store the read image data in a buffer RAM 188a and transfer the image data from the buffer RAM 188a to the resident video RAM 189 in a short time when the resident video RAM 189 becomes unused. can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 189 from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189. The data stored in the resident video RAM 189 can be read out without delay at the time of image drawing, the image to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 can be drawn without delay, and the drawn image data can be transferred to the auxiliary display section 65. can be done.

After the process of S709, it is determined whether or not all the resident image data have been transferred to the resident video RAM 189 (S710). , S705, the processing of S705 to S710 is executed again, and the processing of transferring one block worth of image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 is performed. Here, by the processing of S705, it is determined whether or not the system state is the voltage drop state each time one block of image data is transferred. As a result, even if the system is in a voltage drop state while the resident target image data is being transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 over time, the state can be grasped with certainty. can.

When it is determined by the process of S710 that all the image data to be resident have been transferred to the resident video RAM 189 (S710: Yes), then the image data is displayed normally (when the special effect is not displayed). The image controller 188 is instructed to draw a normal image (S710). As a result, the image controller 188 reads out the back image and the character design stored in the back image area 189b and the character design area 189c of the resident video RAM 189, draws the normal image, and transfers the drawn image data to the normal video temporarily. After being stored in the RAM 190 , a process of transferring to the auxiliary display section 65 in accordance with the display timing of the auxiliary display section 65 is executed. Therefore, the normal image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the initialization of the display control processing has been completed.

In addition, by the processing of S702 to S710, all the image data to be resident are transferred to the resident video RAM 189 in the initialization processing immediately after the power is turned on. Image drawing processing can be performed by the image controller 188 while using the resident image data. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 189, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND type flash memory 187a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 .

In particular, in the resident video RAM 189, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by the main controller 101 or the display controller 81 are resident. Even if the character ROM 187 is composed of the NAND flash memory 187a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness from the operation of the start lever 41 and the stop buttons 42 to 44 by the player to the display of some image on the auxiliary display section 65. can.

Subsequently, an interrupt mode that permits command interrupt processing and display timer interrupt processing is set (S712), the initialization processing is terminated, and the process proceeds to S713. In the processing of S713, whether or not the system state is a voltage drop state, that is, whether or not the drive voltage has decreased to a predetermined voltage (less than 10 volts in this embodiment) is confirmed (S713), as in the processing of S705. If the system state is a voltage drop state (S713: Yes), it is determined that the power has been cut off, and power failure processing is executed (S714).

On the other hand, in the processing of S713, if the system state is not the voltage drop state (S713: No), then it is determined whether display timer interrupt processing has been performed (S715), and display timer interrupt processing has been performed. If so (S715: Yes), drive data output processing for outputting drive data to the auxiliary effect section is executed (S716). As a result, the output of the driving data to the auxiliary rendering section is controlled so as to be executed in a cycle of 1 msec in which the timer interrupt processing for display is performed. It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the timer interrupt processing for display has been performed is performed by an interrupt processing execution flag ( (not shown) is provided in the work RAM 185, and is performed by detecting the value of this interrupt processing execution flag. That is, if the interrupt process execution flag is ON, it is determined that the display timer interrupt process has been performed (S715: Yes), and the driving data output process is executed (S716).

If it is determined in the process of S715 that the display timer interrupt process is not executed (S715: No), or if the process of S716 is completed, then the unprocessed received command is stored in the received command storage area 185a. It is determined whether or not there is (S717). If there is an unprocessed received command (S717: Yes), the received command check process is executed (S718), the received command stored in the received command storage area 185a is analyzed, and the Processing is executed (S719). For example, if the received command is a start command, start command processing (see FIG. 19) is executed; if the received command is a lottery result command, lottery result command processing (see FIG. 20) is executed; 21) is executed. Details of each command process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 19 to 21. FIG.

In the process of S717, if it is determined that there is no unprocessed received command in the received command storage area 185a (S717: No), or if the process of S718 is completed, then a random value used for selecting an auxiliary effect, etc. The update process is executed (S719), the process returns to S713, and thereafter the processes of S713 to S719 are repeatedly executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, start command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing start command processing. This start command process is executed when the start lever 41 is operated and a start command is received from the main controller 101 indicating that a game start command has been issued. The MPU 181 stores the command received from the main controller 101 in the received command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 in the received command check processing (see S718 in FIG. 18) of the display main processing, and the command is the start command. This start command process is executed when it is determined that

In this start command process, first, information about the bet number included in the start command is extracted, and the extracted information about the bet number is stored in the bet number storage area 185b of the work RAM 185 (S801). As described above in the description of S209 in FIG. 13, the number of bets indicated by the information included in the start command is the number of medals inserted by the player for the game for which the start command was indicated by the start command. , and the display control device 81 stores information about the number of bets in the bet number storage area 185b, thereby assisting an effect corresponding to the number of bets placed on the game for the game to be started from now on. It is possible to perform control so as to be executed by the production section (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display section 65).

In the start command process, other processes corresponding to the start command are executed, such as controlling the auxiliary effect section to execute various effects in response to the game start command grasped by receiving the start command (S802). ), the process ends. As a result, various effects can be performed by the auxiliary effect section when the game starts.

Next, lottery result command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing. This lottery result command process receives from main controller 101 a lottery result command indicating the result of a lottery (determining whether a role is right or wrong) performed by main controller 101 in response to a game start command by operating start lever 41 . This process is executed when The MPU 181 stores the command received from the main controller 101 in the received command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 in the received command check processing (see S718 in FIG. 18) of the display main processing, and the command is the lottery result command. If it is determined that there is, this lottery result command process is executed.

In the lottery result command process, first, information about the number of bets stored in the bet number storage area 185b is confirmed, and whether the number of bets placed on the game for which the start command is indicated by the start command is three. It is determined whether or not (S901). Then, when the number of bets is 3 (S901: Yes), the effect corresponding to the number of bets of 3 is started in the auxiliary effect section (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display section 65). set (S902), and the lottery result command process is terminated. As a result, each auxiliary effect section is driven so that the set effect is executed by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process.

At this time, if the back image or character design to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed based on other commands received from the main controller 101, the back image area 189b and the character design area 189c of the resident video RAM 189 can be changed. If the image data of the back image or character design is resident, the image controller 188 reads the image data corresponding to the back image or character design from the resident video RAM 189 and draws the image. As a result, it is possible to omit the time for newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND flash memory 187a having a long read time, so that the image controller 188 can immediately draw and generate a predetermined image. . Therefore, even if the character ROM 187 uses a NAND flash memory 187a with a slow read speed, the rear image and character design can be changed immediately.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of bets is not 3 as a result of the process of S901 (S901: No), the number of bets placed on the game for which the start command is indicated by the start command is 1 or 2. It can be understood that it is a sheet. Therefore, next, it is determined whether or not the winning combination grasped by the lottery result command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is in the BB winning mode (S903). Then, when the BB winning mode is the winning combination (S903: Yes), the message "BB winning winning!" "BB winning announcement effect" is set (S904), and the lottery result command is terminated. As a result, each auxiliary effect section is driven by the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process so that the BB winning notification effect is executed.

As a result of the process of S903, if the winning combination is not in the BB winning mode (S903: No), then the winning combination ascertained by the lottery command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is the watermelon winning combination. It is determined whether or not it is in the mode (S905). Then, if the watermelon winning mode is the winning combination (S905: Yes), the message "Watermelon winning!" A "watermelon winning announcement effect" is set (S906), and the lottery result command is terminated. As a result, the driving data output processing (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main processing drives each auxiliary effect section so that the watermelon winning notification effect is executed.

If the winning combination is not the watermelon winning mode as a result of the process of S905 (S905: No), then the winning combination grasped by the lottery command, that is, the winning combination of the game started by the start command is the bell winning combination. It is determined whether or not it is in the mode (S907). Then, if the bell winning mode is the winning combination (S907: Yes), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a message "Bell winning!" A "Bell Winning Notification Effect" is set (S908), and the lottery result command is terminated. As a result, the driving data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process drives each auxiliary effect section so that the bell winning notification effect is executed.

In this way, by the processing of S903 to S908, the winning combination in the game in which the number of bets is set to 1 or 2 is selected from the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode. In the case of (1), the auxiliary effect section can be made to execute a BB award announcement effect, a watermelon award announcement effect, and a bell prize announcement effect for notifying the player that the winning combination has been won.

Here, as described above, when the number of bets is 1 or 2, the winning probability of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is extremely low. There is a high possibility that players will play the game with little expectations for the establishment of the watermelon prize mode and the bell prize mode, and on the contrary, expecting the establishment of the cherry bells prize mode and the 7 bells prize mode. In addition, when the cherry bell winning mode or the 7 bell winning mode becomes a winning combination, the winning combination can be established without fail even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at any timing. A player who has started a game with a double bet is highly likely to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, if any one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode has been won as a winning combination, the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode and the bell winning mode are all missed if the player does not notice it. Since this is a possible winning mode, there is a risk of missing the establishment of the winning combination. Winning of the BB winning mode is valid across games until the BB winning mode is established. establishes the BB winning mode based on the winning of the BB winning mode, and the player who wins the BB winning mode may lose as a result.

On the other hand, if any one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode is won in the game in which the number of bets is set to 1 or 2 by the processing of S903 to S908, the winning mode is determined. is announced by the BB award announcement effect, the watermelon award announcement effect, and the bell prize announcement effect. Since the notification is made without delay in accordance with the reception of the lottery result command transmitted from the main control device 101, as described above, the notification can be made while the stop switches 42 to 44 cannot be operated by the player. will be Therefore, the player can know that one of the BB winning mode, the watermelon winning mode, and the bell winning mode will be won before operating the stop switches 42 to 44 . Therefore, when the player plays the game with one bet or two bets, if this notification is made by the auxiliary display unit 65, the winning combination grasped by the notification (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode or bell winning mode) Since the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated aiming at the stop pattern in order to stop the stop pattern corresponding to the mode) on the effective line, those winning modes can be established with a higher probability. In addition, when the winning of the BB winning mode is notified, even if the player misses the game, the player can receive new loan of medals and continue the game until the BB winning mode is established. can.

Further, when the BB winning mode is carried over from the past game and a plurality of winning combinations are set together with the winning combination in the current game, the sliding table setting process is executed by the MPU 102 of the main control unit 101. In (see S310 in FIG. 14), a sliding table corresponding to a winning combination other than the BB winning mode is set. The winning combination grasped by the result command is determined from the BB winning mode (see S903). As a result, if the winning combination for which the slide table is set is the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode, there is a possibility that the winning combination will be missed, but if the BB winning mode is set as the winning combination, Since the BB winning notification effect is preferentially performed, the player can surely grasp that the BB winning mode more advantageous to the player is the winning combination.

Further, in this lottery result command processing, as described above, the command received from the main controller 101 is stored in the received command storage area 185a of the work RAM 185 by the main processing executed by the MPU 181, and the command is used as the lottery result. It is executed when it is determined to be a command. The lottery result command is a reel control process (S211 in FIG. 13) for controlling the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R after the lottery (determining whether a role is appropriate) is completed in accordance with the game start command in the main controller 101. (see S309 in FIG. 14), and within about 1.5 ms at the latest (that is, after the time lag until the command is transmitted by timer interrupt processing), the lottery result command is displayed and controlled. It is sent to device 81 .

Further, in the display control device 81, image data corresponding to images displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in various notification effects such as a BB winning notification effect, a watermelon winning notification effect, and a bell winning notification effect are stored in the resident video RAM 189. Since it is resident in the effect image area 189d in advance, the display control device 81 can perform the BB winning notification effect, the watermelon winning notification effect, and the bell winning notification effect based on the lottery result command received from the main control device 101. is determined, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, the image controller 188 reads the image data previously resident in the notification effect image area 189d of the resident video RAM 189. Each notification effect image can be drawn. As a result, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 187, each notification effect image can be displayed immediately after receiving the lottery result command. These images for notification effects can be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 immediately.

Therefore, after the player operates the start lever 41, until the player operates one of the stop switches 42 to 44 to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, an effect such as notification of the winning combination is assisted. It can be executed by the production section (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display section 65). Therefore, since the player can grasp the winning combination before operating any one of the stop switches 42 to 44, the grasped winning combination (BB winning mode, watermelon winning mode or bell winning mode) is formed. can be reliably aimed at by the player.

As a result of the process of S907, if the winning combination is not the bell winning mode (S907: No), if the number of bets is 2, the cherry bell winning mode or the replay winning mode is set as the winning combination, or the winning combination is It can be grasped that it is not set (that is, it is not set), and if the number of bets is 1, the cherry bell winning mode, the 7 bell winning mode, or the replay winning mode is set as the winning combination. It can be grasped that the combination is not set (that is, it is out). Therefore, next, the information regarding the number of bets stored in the bet number storage area 185b is confirmed, and whether or not the number of bets placed on the game for which the start command is indicated by the start command is two. Determine (S909).

Then, if the number of bets is 2 (S909: Yes), the auxiliary display section 65 displays a message "Challenge Cherry Bell!" (S910), and the lottery result command process is terminated. As a result, the driving data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process drives each auxiliary effect section so that the cherry bell winning challenge effect is executed. Also, if the number of bets is not 2 (S909: No), it can be understood that the number of bets is 1, so the auxiliary display section 65 displays the message "Challenge Cherry Bell/7 Bells!" A special voice is output from the speaker 64, and a "cherry bell winning/seven bell winning challenge effect" is set (S911) to light the upper lamp 63 in a dedicated manner, and the lottery result command processing is terminated. As a result, the driving data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the display main process drives each auxiliary effect section so that the cherry bell win/7 bell win challenge effects are executed.

By the processing of S910, the "cherry bell prize winning challenge effect" is executed in the auxiliary effect section, so when the game is played with two bets, it is expected that three medals will be paid out when the cherry bell winning mode is established. It is possible to make the player have a strong feeling. Further, by the processing of S911, the "cherry bell win/7 bell win challenge effect" is executed in the auxiliary effect unit. It is possible to make the player have a strong expectation that three or two medals will be paid out by establishment. Therefore, the player can play the one-coin or two-coin game while enjoying the game, so that the player can strongly feel that he or she wants to play the game to the end without leaving any extra medals.

Next, error command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to notify the error detected by the main control unit 101 by the auxiliary effect unit. A command received from the main controller 101 is stored in the received command storage area 185a, and when the command is determined to be an error command, this error command processing is executed.

In this error command process, first, information about the error type included in the error command is extracted (S951). Then, the display of an error message corresponding to the extracted error type is set (S952), and this error command processing is terminated. As a result, the drive data output process (S716 in FIG. 18) of the main display process displays a corresponding error message on the auxiliary display unit 65, flashes the upper lamp 63, and sounds an alarm sound from the speaker 64. Each auxiliary production section is driven.

Here, as described above, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error from the viewpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. Since image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the message image area 189e, the display control device 81 reads the resident image data based on the error command received from the main control device 101. This allows the image controller 188 to render each error message image immediately. Therefore, since it is not necessary to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error messages from the character ROM 187, even if the NAND flash memory 187a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 187, each error message can be read immediately after receiving the error command. can be displayed.

As described above, according to the slot machine 10 of the first embodiment, the image data to be resident are all transferred to the resident video RAM 189 in the initialization process immediately after the power is turned on. After the processing is completed, image drawing processing can be performed by the image controller 188 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 189 . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 189, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 187 composed of the NAND type flash memory 187a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81 are made resident in the resident video RAM 189. High responsiveness can be maintained from the operation of the start lever 41 and the stop buttons 42 to 44 by the user to the display of some image on the auxiliary display section 65 .

In addition, since the slot machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 187a for the character ROM 187, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 189 can be read from the character ROM 187 due to its slow read speed. Although it takes a long time to transfer to the resident video RAM 189, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, and then the power-on main image is transferred to the resident video RAM 189. is displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 189, the player and hall officials can You can check the image.

Therefore, the display control device 81 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 while displaying the main image on the auxiliary display section 65 when the power is turned on. can. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 at the time of power-on, the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 189 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation is stopped. Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 when the power is turned on, it can be immediately confirmed that the slot machine 10 has started to operate without any problem when the power is turned on. can be verified. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 187a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 187. FIG.

Next, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 200 will be described as a second embodiment with reference to FIGS. 21 to 62. FIG. FIG. 22 is a front view of the pachinko machine 200 according to the second embodiment, FIG. 23 is a front view of the game board 213 of the pachinko machine 200, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 22, the pachinko machine 200 includes an outer frame 211 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 211 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 211. and an inner frame 212 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 218 are attached to the outer frame 211 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 22) in order to support the inner frame 212, and the side on which the hinges 218 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 212 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 213 (see FIG. 23) having a large number of nails, winning slots 263 and 264, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 212 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by causing balls to flow down the front surface of the game board 213 . In addition, the inner frame 212 includes a ball shooting unit 312a (see FIG. 26) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 213 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 312a to the front area of the game board 213. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 212, a front frame 214 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 215 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 214 and the lower tray unit 215, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 22). 214 and a lower tray unit 215 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 212 and the locking of the front frame 214 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 221 of the cylinder lock 220 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 214 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 214c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 216 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 214, and the front side of the pachinko machine 200 can be visually recognized through the glass unit 216. - 特許庁

On the front frame 214, an upper tray 217 for storing balls protrudes forward and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 217 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 22). A frame button 222 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 217 . The frame button 222 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (FIG. 23) described later is changed, or the content of super ready-to-win effect is changed. .

A stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 281 are unified. One stage is provided. Various effects such as variable effects and ready-to-win effects that are performed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 264 (starting winning), which will be described later, are designed to be performed in accordance with the themes given to each stage. It is The stage is changed when the frame button 222 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during high-speed variation. ”→“Island stage”→“City stage”→…. In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 281 is configured to display a selection screen for the effect mode of super ready-to-win during normal ready-to-win. When operated to , the contents of the production at the time of super reach are changed.

The front frame 214 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or when a predetermined reach is reached, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 229 to 233 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 214c. In the pachinko machine 200, these illumination parts 229 to 233 function as production lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and the illumination parts 229 to 233 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs when a big win or ready-to-win production is performed. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching the jackpot just before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 234 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided at the upper left portion of the front face frame 214 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 22).

In addition, a small window 235 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 214 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 232, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 23) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 200. As shown in FIG. In addition, in the pachinko machine 200, a plated member 236 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 229 to 233 in order to create more brilliance.

A ball rental operation section 240 is arranged below the window section 214c. The ball rental operation unit 240 is provided with a frequency display unit 241 , a ball rental button 242 , and a return button 243 . When the ball lending operation unit 240 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 200, the ball is released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display portion 241 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 242 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 217 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 243 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 217 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 240. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 215 positioned below the upper tray 217, a lower tray 250 for storing balls that could not be fully stored in the upper tray 217 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 250, an operation handle 251 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 213 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 251, the ball shooting unit 312a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 251a for the purpose, a push-button type stop switch 251b that stops the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 251 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in. When the operating handle 251 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 251a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the player, and the ball is hit to the front surface of the game board 213 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 251 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 251a and the stop switch 251b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 252 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 250 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 250 downward. The ball extracting lever 252 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 250 is opened and the The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 252 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 250 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 250 . The operation handle 251 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 250 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 250 .

As shown in FIG. 23, the game board 213 includes a wooden base plate 260 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 261 and 262, a general winning opening 263, a first A ball entrance 264 , a variable winning device 265 , a variable display device unit 280 and the like are assembled together, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 212 . The general prize winning port 263, the first ball receiving port 264, the variable prize winning device 265, and the variable display device unit 280 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 260 by router processing, and screwed from the front side of the game board 213 by wood screws. etc. is fixed. Also, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 213 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 212 through the window portion 214c (see FIG. 22) of the front frame 214. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 23, the configuration of the game board 213 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 213, an outer rail 262 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 262 is placed inside the outer rail 262. An arc-shaped inner rail 261 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 213 is surrounded by the inner rail 261 and the outer rail 262, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 213 and the glass unit 216 (see FIG. 22). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 213 and is a substantially circular area defined by two rails 261 and 262 and an arc member 270 (a winning opening is provided, and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 261 and 262 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 312a to the upper part of the game board 213. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 268 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 261 (upper left part in FIG. 23) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 213 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 269 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 262 (upper right in FIG. 23) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 261 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 262, an arc member 270 made of resin is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 260 .

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 237a and a 7-segment display 237b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 23). A display device 237 is provided. The first symbol display device 237 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 310, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 200. FIG. A plurality of LEDs 237a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a variable is in progress accompanying a ball entering the first ball entrance 264 (start winning) by a lighting state, or a stop pattern after the variable is completed. , the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning is indicated by the lighting state, and the ball (holding ball) that has not been changed among the balls entered in the first ball entrance 264 The number of held balls, which is a number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 237b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 237a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 200 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the emitted colors.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 200, in the lottery performed for the ball entered into the first ball entrance 264, it is determined whether or not it is a big win, and when it is determined as a big win, the type of the big win is also determined. , As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, and a time-saving jackpot are prepared. The LED 237a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also indicates a symbol corresponding to the type of the big win if the result is a big win.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “2R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "time saving jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and a time saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (during probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 264 . On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" means that the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased. 264 refers to a game state in which a ball is likely to enter. In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 200, the time when the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first ball entrance 264 opens, It is also possible to change the number of times the electric accessary is opened by winning.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 263 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Also, a variable display device unit 280 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 280 has a liquid crystal display that performs variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing the variable display on the first symbol display device 237 with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 264 (start winning) as a trigger. (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a third symbol display device 281 composed of an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the second entrance 267. A pattern display device 283 is provided.

The third pattern display device 281 is composed of an 8-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 314, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns, left, middle and right, are displayed. is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 281 .

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 281 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 281, and FIG. 25(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.25(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern in a small green color so as to be displayed in front of the accessory pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 310 (see FIG. 26) to be described later is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after it is over. When shifting to a high probability state (probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to "high probability symbols") to which odd numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when shifting to a low-probability state after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to "low-probability symbols") to which even numbers are added are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 25(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 281 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 264, and the small area Ds2. and Ds3 are areas for displaying a preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 25(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action other than the predetermined action, or another character appears. A notice effect is performed by putting out.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 264 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 281 (first symbol display device 237), the number of times the ball enters is up to four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 237 and is also displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball patterns are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In this embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 264 is held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4, and 3 times. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 281, or the area divided into four may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 237, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 281. - 特許庁Further, the variable display device unit 280 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Returning to FIG. 23, the description is continued. A center frame 286 is arranged in the variable display device unit 280 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 281 . In the third symbol display device 281 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 310 is performed by the first symbol display device 237, while the display of the first symbol display device 237 A decorative display is made according to the situation. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 281 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device 283 provides a variable display that alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbols) each time the ball passes through the second ball entrance 267. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 200, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 283 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the first ball entrance 264 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time. is configured to The number of times the ball passes through the second ball entrance 267 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 237, and the second symbol reservation lamp 284 is also lit and displayed. Four second design reserve lamps 284 are provided for the maximum number of reserves, and are arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 281 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 283 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first pattern display device 237 and the third pattern. A part of the display device 281 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 284 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 281 . Also, as with the first ball entrance 264, the maximum number of held balls passing through the second ball entrance 267 is not limited to four times, but may be three times or less, or five times or more (for example, , 8 times). Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 237, the second symbol reservation lamp 284 may not be lit and displayed.

Below the variable display device unit 280, a first ball entrance 264 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 264, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 213 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. The main controller 310 draws a jackpot lottery, and the LED 237a of the first symbol display device 237 shows a display corresponding to the lottery result. In addition, the first ball entry hole 264 is also one of the prize winning holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter the game.

A variable prize winning device 265 is arranged below the first ball entrance 264, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 265a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 200, when the lottery by the main controller 310 becomes a big win, the LED 237a of the first symbol display device 237 is turned on so that the big win stops after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has passed. A stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 265a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 265a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 265a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific prize winning port 265a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 265 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 265a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific winning opening 265a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 265a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 265a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 237a corresponding to the big win in the first pattern display device 237 is lit, the specific winning opening 265a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 265a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 265a while the opening 265a is open. You may make it form.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 213. can be viewed through a small window 235 (see FIG. 22).

Furthermore, the game board 213 is provided with an out port 266 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 263, 264, 265a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening 266.例文帳に追加The game board 213 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 24, the back side of the pachinko machine 200 is mainly provided with control board units 290 and 291 and a back pack unit 294 . The control board unit 290 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 310), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 313), and a display control board (display controller 314). The control board unit 291 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 311), a launch control board (launch control device 312), a power supply board (power supply device 315), and a card unit connection board 316.

The back pack unit 294 is formed by unitizing a back pack 292 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 293 . In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 310, sound lamp control device 313 and display control device 314, payout control device 311 and firing control device 312, power supply device 315 and card unit connection board 316 are housed in board boxes 300 to 304, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 300 to 304 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 300 (main controller 310) and the board box 302 (dispensing controller 311 and firing controller 312) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 300, 302, or if the circuit board boxes 300, 302 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 300, 302 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 293 includes a tank 330 located at the top of the back pack unit 294 and open upward, a tank rail 331 connected to the bottom of the tank 330 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 331 downstream of the tank rail 331. and a payout device 333 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 332 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 416 (see FIG. 26). ing. The tank 330 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a payout device 333 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 334 for applying vibration to the tank rail 331 is attached to the tank rail 331 .

The payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 320 , the firing control device 312 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 321 , and the power supply device 315 is provided with a RAM erase switch 322 . The state recovery switch 320 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as ball clogging in the dispensing motor 416 (see FIG. 26). The operating knob 321 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 322 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 200 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, referring to FIG. 26, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 200 will be described. FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 200. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 310 is equipped with an MPU 401 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 401 includes a ROM 402 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 401, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 402. A RAM 403 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 310 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controller such as the payout controller 311 and the sound lamp controller 313 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 310 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 310 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 200, such as the jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first and third symbol display devices 237 and 281, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 283. The RAM 403 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 27, counters and the like provided in the RAM 403 of the main controller 310 will be described. These counters, etc., set the display of the jackpot lottery, the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 283, etc. used in

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 237 and the third pattern display device 281, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first winning type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol are used. , a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. The second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 283, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 36), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 42). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 403 . The RAM 403 is provided with a holding ball storage area consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas). Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the ball entry timing.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 899), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (eg, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 36) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 42).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 264, stored in The value of the random number for the jackpot is set by a jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 402 of the main controller, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is set by the jackpot random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes a big win, it is determined as a big win. In addition, this jackpot random number table is divided into two types, one for low probability (period not in variable probability) and one for high probability (during variable probability) when the probability of winning is higher than that of low probability. The number of random numbers that will be included in the jackpot is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers for a big win different, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability is low and when the probability is high.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 at the time of the big hit. , 0 to 9, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 9). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and stored in the RAM 403 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 264. stored in the area.

Therefore, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area is not a random number that will result in a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a loss, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 237 will be displayed. The corresponding display mode is the one at the time of detachment.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area is a random number for a big win, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 237 is that of the big win. becomes. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reserved ball storage area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 200 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 899. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, the number of random number values that become a big win at low probability is 3, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the low probability big winning random number table. On the other hand, the number of random number values that become a big hit at high probability is 30, and the values are , 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892” are stored in the high probability jackpot random number table.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table and the jackpot random number value stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table overlap. In order to avoid this, the random number value for each jackpot is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the value of the random number for the jackpot regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 200, there is a risk that the value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 200 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that becomes a big win, Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value, fraud can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 200 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-9. In this first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number value is "6, 7, 8, 9" is "15R probability variable" that the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds. On the other hand, the jackpot type when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "4, 5" is "2R probability variable" that the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after two rounds Jackpot" and the value of the first win type counter C2 is "0, 1, 2, 3", the jackpot type shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. Along with this, it is a “time-saving jackpot” that is in a time-saving state during 100 fluctuations.

In this way, the pachinko machine 200 of the present embodiment is configured so that three types of winning types (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, time-saving jackpot) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. It is

The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stopping pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop pattern at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stopping symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach outside the front and rear" (for example, 98, 99) to stop at the same time, and "Reach other than the front and back" (for example, the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns such as "completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 403 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 264. Stored.

In addition, the ROM 402 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random numbers from which stop patterns are selected, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is because the selection ratio of the stop patterns is changed according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 200 is a high-probability state or a low-probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the "complete failure" stop pattern is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. "Completely out" is more likely to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, if the probability is low, a table with a narrow random number range of 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop pattern of "complete failure" is selected in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 264. This makes it difficult for “completely out” to be selected. In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop pattern of "Reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "Reach other than front and rear deviation" is more likely to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 264 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 281 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop pattern of "front-back reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 281 by the sound lamp control device 421 and the display control device 314 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined. . The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 42), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second ball entrance (through gate) 267. obtained when There are 149 random numbers to be won, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 153", it is determined that the winning is made, and the second symbol display device 283 displays the symbol "○" as the stop symbol (second symbol). is displayed, and the first ball entrance 264 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 36). It is updated and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 42).

In this way, the RAM 403 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 310 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 200 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 283 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 26, the description is continued. The RAM 403 includes various counters shown in FIG. 27, a stack area storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 401 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 401, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored. The RAM 403 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 315 even after the pachinko machine 200 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 403 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 403 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 200 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 403 . Writing to the RAM 403 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 42) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 403 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 401 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

The RAM 403 further has a reserved ball number counter 403a. The suspended ball number counter 403a suspends the variable display performed by the first symbol display device 237 (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 281) based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 264 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting times) up to four times. The initial value of the reserved ball counter 403a is set to zero, and each time a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 264 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S1403 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the pending ball number counter 403a is decremented by 1 each time the variable display based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 264 (start winning) is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 37).

The value of the pending ball number counter 403a (that is, the pending ball number) is notified to the sound lamp control device 313 by the pending ball number command (see S1406 in FIG. 39). The pending ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 310 to the sound lamp controller 313 each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 264 and the pending ball counter 403a is incremented by one.

The sound lamp control device 313 changes the value of the number of pending balls displayed by the main control unit 310 according to the pending ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 310 each time the number of pending balls counter 403a is incremented by 1. can be obtained. As a result, the number of pending balls in the variable display managed by the pending ball number counter 423a of the sound lamp control device 313 deviates from the actual number of pending balls in the variable display held by the main controller 310 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even in the event that the number of balls has been lost, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 313 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 314 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 314 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 281 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

On the other hand, the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 310 to the sound lamp control device 313 is combined with the number of reserved balls to match the timing of entering the first ball entrance 264 (start winning timing). Also included are the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 obtained from the counter buffer of the RAM 403, and notified to the sound lamp controller 313.

When the pending ball number command is received by the audio ramp control device 313, the audio ramp control device 313 counts the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 included in the pending ball number command. From each value, the stop display mode when the variable performance based on the corresponding starting prize is performed is estimated, and the estimated stop display mode and the value of the number of pending balls at that time indicated by the pending ball number command Then, it is determined whether or not to carry out a series of continuous advance notice performances for the variable performances suspended at that time.

The continuous notice effect is a kind of notice effect that suggests (notice) that the result of the lottery that is held with the start winning is likely to be a big hit, and all the variable effects that are pending at the time of winning (variable display ), the same or related symbols are displayed on the third symbol display device 281 along with the variation effect. For example, by displaying the "bubble" image on the third pattern display device 281 immediately after the stop display of the variable performance over all the suspended variable performances, the jackpot pattern does not appear as the stop pattern of the variable performance. Even if the player does not win the jackpot, the player continuously sees the "bubble" image immediately after the fluctuation stops over a plurality of fluctuation displays, so that the player can win the jackpot after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and to motivate the player to continue playing the game.

In addition, "Egg" is displayed during the first variable performance, "Chick" is displayed during the second variable performance, "Chicken" is displayed during the third variable performance, and "Chicken" is displayed during the fourth variable performance. Display ``flock of chickens'' (however, if the number of pending balls at the time when the continuous advance notice effect is set is 3 or less, display ``flock of chickens'' in the last variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is set) As a result, the symbols displayed by the continuous advance notice effect gradually change (step up) every time the variation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 281, so that the player can enjoy the gradually changing symbols. By looking at it, the player can have a feeling of expectation that when the group of chickens is displayed, it will be a big win in the variable performance in which the group of chickens is displayed.

Also, if the variable effect set for the continuous notice effect is 3, the continuous notice effect is performed in the order of "egg" → "chick" → "chicken group", and the variable effect set for the continuous notice effect is 2. In one case, the continuous announcement effect is performed in the order of "egg"→"chicken group", and when the variable effect set for the continuous announcement effect is 1, "chicken group" is suddenly displayed. In this way, when the number of variable effects set for the continuous advance notice effect is 3 or less, the symbols in the middle are skipped and the group of chickens is suddenly displayed. By looking at it, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation that the group of chickens will be a big hit in the variable performance in which the group of chickens is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 200, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 obtained at the time of start-up winning are stored in the main controller 310 by the pending ball number command. 313, and the audio lamp control device 313 determines the start of the continuous notice effect and sets the mode of the continuous notice effect based on the values of various counters and the value of the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved ball commands. conduct. As a result, the processing in the main controller 310 can be concentrated on the most important processing of the pachinko machine 200, which is the lottery processing for drawing the game state to be changed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 264. On the other hand, if the MPU 421 with high processing capability is used for the sound lamp control device 313, the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect can be set in various modes.

Also, the number of pending balls and the values of various counters can be transmitted from the main controller 310 to the sound lamp controller 313 with one pending ball number command. As a result, in the audio lamp control device 313, it is possible to accurately grasp the correspondence between the values of various counters acquired in conjunction with the starting winning and the number of pending balls at the time when the starting winning is detected. When execution of the continuous advance notice performance is determined, the number of pending balls to which the continuous notice performance is added can be accurately grasped. Therefore, compared with the case where the number of held balls and the values of various counters are transmitted from the main controller 310 to the audio lamp controller 313 by another command, the control in the audio lamp controller 313 is facilitated. be able to.

An input/output port 405 is connected to the MPU 401 of the main controller 310 via a bus line 404 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 405 includes the payout control device 311, the sound lamp control device 313, the first symbol display device 237, the second symbol display device 283, the second symbol reservation lamp 284, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 265a. A solenoid 409 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing forward, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc. is connected as a front side. to send.

The input/output port 405 is connected to various switches 408 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 453 provided in the power supply device 315, which will be described later. and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 453, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 311 drives the payout motor 416 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 411, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 412 storing control programs executed by the MPU 411, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 413 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 413 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 403 of the main control device 310, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 411 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 411, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 413 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 315 even after the pachinko machine 200 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 413 is backed up. As with the MPU 401 of the main controller 310, the NMI terminal of the MPU 411 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 411, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 415 is connected to the MPU 411 of the payout control device 311 via a bus line 414 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 415 is connected to the main controller 310, the dispensing motor 416, the launch controller 312, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 311 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 311 but not to the main control device 310 .

The shooting control device 312 controls the ball shooting unit 312a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 251 when the main control device 310 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. The sphere firing unit 312a has a firing solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 251a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 251, and the operating handle 251b is turned off (not operated) to stop the shooting of the ball. A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 251, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 251.

The audio lamp control device 313 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 426, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 229 to 233, an indicator lamp 234, a hold lamp 285, etc.) 427, It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 281 performed by the display control device 314 such as the variable effect (variable display) and the continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 421, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 422 storing control programs executed by the MPU 421, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 423 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 425 is connected to the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 via a bus line 424 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 425 is connected to the main control device 310, the display control device 314, the audio output device 426, the lamp display device 427, the vibration sensor 428, the frame button 222, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 313 monitors the input from the frame button 222, and when the frame button 222 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 281, It controls the voice output device 426 and the lamp display device 427 and instructs the display control device 314 to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 314 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 281. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 281 .

Also, the vibration sensor 428 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213 . In the pachinko machine 200, since the ball entering the ball entrance is an important factor in determining the game state, the flow of the ball is changed by vibration to prevent the ball from being intentionally entered into the ball entrance. There is a need. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 428 that the pachinko machine 200 has been vibrated by a player or the like, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 314 to convey the vibration error. In addition, the audio lamp control device 313 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 310 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 313, and issues an error command including the error type. Send to the display controller 314 . The display control device 314 controls the third pattern display device 281 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The RAM 423 of the audio lamp control device 313 is provided with at least a reserved ball number counter 423a. Like the reserved ball number counter 403a of the main controller 310, the reserved ball number counter 423a is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 237 (and the third symbol display device 281). It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the control device 310 .

As described above, the audio lamp control device 313 cannot directly access the main control device 310 to obtain the value of the pending ball number counter 403a stored in the RAM 403 of the main control device 310 . Therefore, the sound lamp control device 313 counts the number of pending balls based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 310, and manages the number of pending balls by the pending ball number counter 423a.

Specifically, when the sound lamp control device 313 receives a pending ball number command transmitted from the main controller 310 when the variable displayed pending ball number is added by entering the first ball entrance 264, , stores the value of the pending ball number counter 403a of the main controller 310 (that is, the variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 310) contained in the pending ball number command in the pending ball number counter 423a ( (See S2007 in FIG. 46).

In addition, the sound lamp control device 313 receives a variation pattern command, which is an instruction command for variation display from the main control device 310, and sets the mode of variation display in the third symbol display device 281 along with the reception. 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-balls counter 423a (see S2205 in FIG. 47). In this way, the value of the pending ball number counter 423a is updated according to the command sent from the main controller 310, so that the value can be updated while synchronizing with the pending ball number counter 403a of the main controller 310. .

The value of the number of reserved balls counter 423a is used for displaying the number of reserved balls symbols in the third symbol display device 281. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 313 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the reserved ball number counter 423a, or, in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, stores the reserved ball number counter 423a. is updated, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 314 in order to notify the display control device 314 of the stored or updated value of the reserved ball counter 423a.

When the display control unit 314 receives this command for the number of pending balls for display, the value of the number of pending balls indicated by the command, that is, the value of the number of pending balls counter 423a of the sound lamp control unit 313 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 281 (see S2751 in FIG. 57(a)). As described above, the value of the pending ball number counter 423a is changed while synchronizing with the pending counter 403a of the main controller 310. FIG. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 281 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the pending counter 403a of the main controller 310. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 281 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The RAM 423 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 310 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, and whether to start variable display. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) and the like. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 46) of the audio ramp processing device 313 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command. In addition, the fluctuation start flag is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 310 is received (see S2002 in FIG. 46), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 281. (see S2102 in FIG. 47).

The display control device 314 is connected to the sound lamp control device 313 and the third pattern display device 281, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 313, the third pattern display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Details of the display control device 314 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 315 includes a power supply unit 451 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 200, a power failure monitoring circuit 452 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 322 (see FIG. 24). and an erase switch circuit 453 . The power supply unit 451 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 310 to 314 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 451 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 408, solenoids such as the solenoid 409, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 310 to 314 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 452 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 401 of the main control device 310 and the MPU 411 of the payout control device 311 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 452 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 451, and determines that a power failure (power off, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 310 and the payout controller 311. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 310 and the payout controller 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 451 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 310 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

The RAM erase switch circuit 453 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 310 when the RAM erase switch 322 (see FIG. 24) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 200 is powered on, the main controller 310 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 311. Send to device 311 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 314. As shown in FIG. The display control device 314 includes an MPU 431, a ROM (program ROM) 432, a work RAM 433, a character ROM 434, a resident video RAM 435, a normal video RAM 436, an image controller 437, an input port 438, and an output port 439. , and bus lines 440 and 441 .

The output side of the audio lamp controller 313 is connected to the input side of the input port 438 , and the MPU 431 , ROM 432 , work RAM 433 , character ROM 434 and image controller 437 are connected to the output side of the input port 438 via a bus line 440 . ing. A resident video RAM 435 and a normal video RAM 436 are connected to the image controller 437 , and an output port 439 is connected via a bus line 441 . A third symbol display device 281 is connected to the output side of the output port 439 .

Note that even if the pachinko machine 200 is a different model with different jackpot lottery probabilities and the number of prize balls paid out per jackpot, there are models with exactly the same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 281. Therefore, the display control device 314 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

Below, the MPU 431, character ROM 434, image controller 437, resident video RAM 435, and normal video RAM 436 will be described first, and then the ROM 432 and work RAM 433 will be described.

First, the MPU 431 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 281 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 313 .

The character ROM 434, the image controller 437, the resident video RAM 435, and the normal video RAM 436 are all the character ROM 187, image controller 188, resident video RAM 189, It has the same configuration or function as the normal video RAM 190 .

That is, the character ROM 434 is a memory that stores image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 281. In order to store a large amount of image data, the character ROM 434 is an inexpensive NAND type flash memory that can obtain a large storage capacity in a small area. Consists of memory. In this embodiment, a 2 gigabyte NAND flash memory is used. As a result, since a large number of images displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be stored, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be diversified in order to further increase the interest of the player. ing.

The character ROM 434 has the same arbitration circuit 187b provided in the character ROM 187 in the first embodiment, which performs data address conversion in order to read and write data while avoiding defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 434a. A well-known arbitration circuit 434b (see, for example, US Pat. No. 6,300,003) is provided that has a function.

The image controller 437 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 281 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 437 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 35) sent from the MPU 431 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 436b or a second frame buffer 436c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 281 to display the image on the third pattern display device 281.例文帳に追加. The image controller 437 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process within the image display time of one frame on the third pattern display device 281 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). parallel processing in

The image controller 437 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 431 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 431 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 431 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 49) and instructs the image controller 437 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 437 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 281 to display the image developed by drawing previously.

In this manner, the MPU 431 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 437 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 437. Therefore, the image controller 437 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 431 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 437 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 437 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 and normal video RAM 436 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 431 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the normal video RAM 435 and normal video RAM 436 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436 based on instructions from the MPU 431 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 314, the MPU 431 instructs the image controller 437 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 435 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the initialization process is finished, the image drawing process can be performed by the image controller 437 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435 . Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 composed of the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 281 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 310 or display controller 314 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 435. Even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third pattern display device 281 displays some image.

When the display control device 314 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 435, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 314 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 434 in the normal video RAM 436. The MPU 431 is configured to instruct the image controller 437 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 436 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 281. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 436 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 435. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to provision of the resident video RAM 435 can be suppressed.

The image controller 437 has a buffer RAM 437a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is equivalent to one block of the NAND flash memory 434a, like the buffer RAM 188a provided in the image controller 188 in the first embodiment. there is

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 437 by the MPU 431 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 434 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 437 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 435 according to various information in response to this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 437a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 437a when the resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 434 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 437a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436, the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 435 and 436 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 281 from being too late.

In addition, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 is performed by the image controller 437, so that the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 281 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 435 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 434 is kept held without being overwritten while the power is turned on, similarly to the display control device 81 in the first embodiment. In addition to a time main image area 435a, a back image area 435c, a character pattern area 435e, and an error message image area 435f, at least a power-on variation image area 435b and a third pattern area 435d are provided.

Similar to the power-on main image area 189a of the first embodiment, the power-on main image area 435a is displayed on the third pattern display device 281 while the display control device 314 is performing initialization processing when the power is turned on. This is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image to be displayed. In addition, in the power-on fluctuation image area 435b, the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 164 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 310 in a varying effect when the power is turned on.

The MPU 431 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a when power supply from the power supply unit 451 is started. Then, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 437 (see S2202 and S2203 in FIG. 57).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 29 . FIG. 29 shows a power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 is being transferred from the character ROM 434 immediately after the display control device 314 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 314 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a. The remaining image data to be stored in the character ROM 434 is transferred to the resident video RAM 435 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 314 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 435a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 281 .

At this time, when a display variation pattern command, which is an instruction command to start variation, is received from the sound lamp control device 313, the display control device 314 displays the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 29(b). 29(c), a power-on stop image with a "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a power-on stop image with an "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, as shown in FIG. images are alternately and repeatedly displayed during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the sound lamp control device 313, the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 310 is judged, and if it is a "jackpot", FIG. The image shown in FIG. 29(c) is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation production is stopped, and in the case of "out", the image shown in FIG. 29(c) is displayed after the fluctuation production is stopped.

The MPU 431 instructed the image controller 437 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 435a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 was transferred to the resident video RAM 435. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player and the staff involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 281. can. Therefore, the display control device 314 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 281 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, the rest of the resident video RAM 435 is resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 281 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 281 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 434. FIG.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and the entry of the first entrance ball 264 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 435b, and the images shown in FIGS. Since the MPU 431 instructs the image controller 437 as shown in FIG. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 281 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 435b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 264 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 281, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 281. can.

Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are stored in the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on fluctuation image area 435b of the resident video RAM 435. occurs, if there is data resident in the resident video RAM 435, the image data resident in the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on fluctuation image area 435b will be used when the power is restored. The main image at power-on and the variation image at power-on can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 281 .

Returning to FIG. 28, the description is continued. The back image area 435c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 281, like the back image area 189b of the first embodiment. Here, with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 435c among the rear images will be described. 30 and 31 are explanatory diagrams for explaining three kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 for each back image, and FIG. 30(a). 30(b) is for the back surface B corresponding to the "sky stage", and FIG. 31 is for the back surface C corresponding to the "island stage". are shown respectively.

As shown in FIG. 30, the back images corresponding to the backs A and B among the backs A to C are images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 281. It is prepared in the ROM 434 . The image controller 437 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 281 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 281 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 281 displays an image between position a and position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When the player operates the frame button 222 to change the stage, the MPU 431 first sets a position between position a and position a' as the initial position of the display area, and the image at that initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device. 281 controls the image controller 437 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 437 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 281. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 437 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 281 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 281 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31, the rear image on the rear surface C is displayed in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . Displayed on device 281 . Specifically, on the back surface C, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 281 . On the other hand, an image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes its color tone with the passage of time.

When the player operates the frame button 222 to change the stage to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 31(a) is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 31(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 31(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 31(b), a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 31(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 31(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 31(a) is displayed again, and the rear images shown in FIGS.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 435c will be described. As shown in FIG. 30(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 435c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the town stage, is displayed. 435c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 434 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 314 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage, as shown in FIG. back image area 435c. Further, the rear surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 31(a), and the image data corresponding to the rear surface images between FIGS. is stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 and is resident during the start-up process.

Here, the operation of the frame button 222 by the player to change the stage is performed at arbitrary timing based on the player's will. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 435. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a' or the range shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 31(a)-(b) are stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of a NAND flash memory 434a with a slow read speed, if the stage is changed at any timing by the operation of the frame button 222 by the player, the back image area of the resident video RAM 435 will be displayed. By using the image data resident in 435c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C are immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 281, and displayed while scrolling or changing color tone with the lapse of time. be able to. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for the rear surfaces B and C, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 435 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal RAM 436 during this period. As a result, while the range from position a to position b is scrolled, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 436, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 can After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 436 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 281 .

Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images of FIGS. The range shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b) is set so that the transfer from the character ROM 434 to the normal RAM 436 can be completed while the character ROM 434 is on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images shown in FIGS. 31(b)-(c) and 31(c)-(a) are stored in the normal video RAM 436 while the images shown in FIGS. 31(a)-(b) are displayed. 31A to 31B using the image data resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the images are stored in the normal video RAM 436 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 31(b) to (c) and FIGS. 31(c) to (a) can be sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 281 as time elapses. can.

Image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 for the back B and C is stored in sub areas dedicated to back images provided in the image storage area 436a (see FIG. 28) of the normal video RAM 436. FIG. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 are images corresponding to images between position b' and position b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 437 by the MPU 431, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 281 using the image data stored in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 281 using the image data stored in the RAM 436, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 281. ing.

Furthermore, the MPU 431 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 436 to control the image controller 437 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 281. Then, The MPU 431 uses the image data in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435 to control the image controller 437 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 281 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 281 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 28, the description is continued. The third symbol area 435d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 435, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 25) with numerals "0" to "9", which are the third patterns, are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 281 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 187 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first pattern display device 237 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the first ball entrance 264, the third pattern display device 281 immediately starts the variable performance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where it is not possible.

In addition, in the third design area 435d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern imitating the . These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 281 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 200 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 281 .

The character design area 435e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 281, as in the first embodiment. In this pachinko machine 200, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are stored in the character design area 435e to control the display. When the device 314 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the main control device 313, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434, the image data is stored in the character design area 435e of the resident video RAM 435 in advance. By reading the resident image data, the image controller 437 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434, so even if the character ROM 434 uses the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 435f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 200, like the error message image area 189e of the first embodiment. In this pachinko machine 200, when vibration is detected by the sound lamp control device 313 from the output of the vibration sensor 428 attached to the back surface of the game board 213, the sound lamp control device 313 detects the occurrence of a vibration error by means of an error command. 314. Also, when the audio lamp control device 313 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 313 notifies the display control device 314 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. Then, the display control device 314 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 281 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In this pachinko machine 200, since image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 435f, the display control device 314 displays the error message in the resident video RAM 435 based on the received error command. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 435f, the image controller 437 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 435. Therefore, even if the character ROM 434 uses the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow read speed, the error message corresponding to the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal-use video RAM 436, like the normal-use video RAM 190 of the first embodiment, is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time. is provided at least.

The image storage area 436a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 281. FIG. The image storage area 436a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 431 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 434 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 436 a of the normal video RAM 436 . , instructs the image controller 437 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 437 reads out the image data instructed by the MPU 431 from the character ROM 434 and transfers the read image data to the specified predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 436a via the buffer RAM 437a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 431 instructs the image controller 437 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 431 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 437, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 281. FIG. The image controller 437 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 431 to either one of the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 281 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third pattern display device 281 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c, the image controller 437 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , it is possible to read one frame of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read one frame of image on the third pattern display device 281 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 281 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 431 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 436c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 436b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 436b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 436c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 436b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 281, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 436c. be. After that, a frame buffer for expanding one frame of image and a frame buffer for reading out one frame of image information are transferred to either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The ROM 432 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 431, and has at least a data table storage area 432a.

The data table storage area 432a is a display data table describing the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on the command from the main control device 310, and the main control In addition to one effect based on the command from the device 310, for the effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 281, the additional data table describing the display contents to be displayed with the passage of time and the display data table are displayed. This area stores the transfer data information of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435 and the transfer data table defining the transfer timing, among the image data used in one effect.

The display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 281 based on the command from the main control device 310. A display data table corresponding to display effects and restart effects is prepared.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 281 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the background image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 200 is not playing a game.

Further, the fixed display effect is performed by receiving a fixed command (display fixed command) from the main control device 310 via the sound lamp control device 313 after the variable effect. 281 is an effect displayed. For example, when the stopped symbol is a missing symbol, the effect of emphasizing the missing is performed, and when the stopped symbol is any one of 15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, and 2R probability variable jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. A performance is held. The player can easily judge the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing this fixed display effect.

In addition, the restart effect vibrates the third pattern when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 310 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third pattern was stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect. This is an effect in which the third symbol display device 281 displays the image that has been drawn. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the variation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the stopped symbol is not determined at that time. can be recognized.

The data table storage area 432a stores one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect, the confirmation display effect, and the restart effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, a total of 32 tables are prepared for one variable performance pattern in the display data table for variation, which is a display data table for variable performance.

Furthermore, in the variable display data table, when the variable effect pattern instructed by the main controller 310 via the sound lamp controller 313 does not match the stop pattern to be displayed when the variable effect is stopped, for example, the variable A display pattern table for special variation is also prepared, which is used when the main control unit 310 instructs a stop symbol for losing when the performance pattern is a variation performance pattern for winning. This special variation causes the third pattern to be displayed with high speed fluctuation until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main controller 310 via the sound lamp control device 313 is received, and the confirmation command is received. In accordance with , a special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as "3", "4", "1" in order from the left column) is determined as a stop symbol.

When the variation effect pattern instructed by the main controller 310 via the sound lamp control device 313 does not match the stop pattern to be displayed when the variable effect is stopped and displayed, the display control device 314 causes the main controller 310 to perform There is a possibility that the result of the drawn lottery cannot be correctly reflected and the variable performance and the fixed display performance cannot be performed. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 200, in such a case, a special variation effect is performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special failure is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Therefore, the main control device Even if the result of the lottery in 310 is a loss, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 281 from erroneously performing a confirmation display performance of a big win. Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, if the lottery result of the main controller 310 is a big hit, the actual game state of the pachinko machine 200 shifts to the special game state. Players can continue playing games without worry. Furthermore, by setting the fixed display as a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 200 may be in a big winning state even if the fixed display is off. The pachinko machine 200 is brought into a jackpot state in spite of the fact that the confirmation display is off, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 281 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 281 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 281 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variation table display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one background image, nine third patterns (symbol 1, pattern 2, . . . ), and Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of light, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 281, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also describes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 431 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 431 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 281) was started. In this case, the MPU 431 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 281) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 281) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the third pattern display device 281 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 281) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 310 via the sound lamp control device 313 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 310. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 310 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 32) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the effects to be defined in the display data table are displayed. Have been described.

The MPU 431 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 313, reads it from the data table storage area 432a, and displays it in a work RAM 433, which will be described later. It stores it in the data table buffer 433b and initializes a pointer 433e, which will be described later, to zero. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 433e is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e, the next The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, a drawing list (see FIG. 35) to be described later is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 437, thereby instructing drawing of the image. As a result, as the pointer 433e is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 281.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 200, the display control device 314 does not change the program to be executed by the MPU 431 in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 313. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433b.

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 431 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 314 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433b. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 314, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281. - 特許庁

Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This is because the pachinko machine 200 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation. In this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. can be realized only when the pachinko machine 200 is configured to determine the effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 281 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, details of the additional data table will be described. FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the additional data table. As described above, the additional data table describes the display contents to be displayed with the lapse of time for the effects to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 310. It is what I did. Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from main control device 310, for example, displaying an image that is not normally displayed in one effect. It includes the concept of superimposing another effect on the one effect, changing the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or changing the image displayed in the one effect. .

That is, the additional data table contains drawing contents necessary for adding and displaying an image that is normally not displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main controller 310. , the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in the one effect is.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the continuous notice displayed in addition to the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main control device 310 A case where display contents for displaying effects are defined by an additional data table will be described.

That is, the additional data table is prepared, for example, corresponding to the continuous notice effect additionally set to the variable effect, and specifically, the display mode of the continuous notice effect "bubbles" and "egg". , “chick”, “chicken”, and “chicken group” are stored in the data table storage area 432a.

In this additional data table, the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is defined in detail in association with the address defined in the display data table. The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object to be additionally displayed in the image for one frame, and display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and so on according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 281 to render a sprite, such as a translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

For example, in the example of FIG. 33, two effects (effect 1, effect 2) and two characters (character 1, character 2) are respectively associated with the address "0097H" defined in the display data table. Sprite type (effect type, character type), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information are specified. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, it means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to that address in the additional data table. None data is specified (corresponding to address "0001H" in FIG. 33).

It should be noted that "0000H", which is the top address of the additional data table, describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the last address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 33, "00FDH") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the effects to be defined in the additional data table are drawn. Have been described.

When the MPU 431 receives a continuous announcement command from the sound lamp control device 313, the MPU 431 reads an additional data table corresponding to the continuous announcement mode indicated by the continuous announcement command from the data table storage area 432a, and stores the additional data table in the work RAM 433, which will be described later. Store in the buffer 433c. Then, each time the pointer 433e is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e are drawn from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. Then, the content of the image to be drawn next is identified and a drawing list (see FIG. 35), which will be described later, is created.

For example, in the example of FIG. 33, when the pointer 433e becomes "0097H", the MPU 431 adds various sprites defined at address "0097H" of the display data table to address "0097H" of the additional data table. Effect 1, Effect 2, Character 1, and Character 2 sprites are added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 437 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 433e is "0001H", it is determined that there is no display object to be added because None data is specified at the address "0001H" of the additional data table, and the address "0001H" of the display data table is determined. 0001H" to generate a drawing list based on the various sprites defined in ".

By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 437, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 433e is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added. The prescribed image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 .

Thus, in the pachinko machine 200, the display control device 314 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) from the sound ramp control device 313, etc. When displaying another effect image (for example, a continuous preview effect image) in addition to (for example, a variable effect image), an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be additionally displayed is added to the data table buffer. By setting it to 433c, the effect image can be easily displayed in addition to the base effect image. As a result, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, it is possible to temporarily display an image in which the other effect images are superimposed on each original effect image. If a data table were to be prepared separately, 32×5=160 types of display data tables would have to be prepared. Thus, 32+5=37 types of displays and additional data tables need to be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 432a can be suppressed. Therefore, data tables corresponding to various types of effects can be stored in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 432a, and further diversification of effects images can be easily achieved.

Further, as in the pachinko machine 200, by defining other effect images to be additionally displayed as the additional data table, after the display data table corresponding to the original effect image is set in the display data table buffer 433b, Even when it is decided to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, the additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b. By simply setting it in the data table buffer 433c, the additional effect image to be displayed can be easily displayed in addition to the original effect image.

Further, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 433c From the table, while updating the pointer 433e for each time, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and to easily obtain one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. can be generated to Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the sound lamp control device 313 or the like in addition to the effects performed based on the command from the main controller 310, the effects to be additionally displayed By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of presentation displays from a small number of data tables.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 435 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 435, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 432a can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 34). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 34).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 434 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436). is included.

It should be noted that "0000H", which is the top address of the additional data table, describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the last address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 34, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 431 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 313, if a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table exists, the transfer data table is selected. The transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 432a and stored in a transfer data table buffer 433d of the work RAM 433, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 433e is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e are drawn from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. 35) is specified, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is selected from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d. and add the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 34, when the pointer 433e becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 431 stores the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table in the display data table and the additional data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list created based on the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 437 . On the other hand, when the pointer 433e is "0002H", since None data is specified at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 437 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435 required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 436a. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 436a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 434 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 436. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 281. - 特許庁In addition, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 200, the display control device 314 sets the display data table in the display data table buffer 433b in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 313. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table 344d, the image data of the sprites used in the display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 at the desired timing. can be transferred.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be finely controlled while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 436 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 281 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 28, the description is continued. The work RAM 433 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various programs by the MPU 431, and includes a simple image display flag 433a, a display data table buffer 433b, an additional data table 433c, and a transfer data table. 433d, a pointer 433e, a drawing list area 433f, a clock counter 433g, a stored image discrimination flag 433h, and a drawing target buffer flag 433i.

The simple image display flag 433a determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 433a is used to display the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 281 in the initialization process of the main process (see FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 431 after power-on. When the controller 437 is instructed to draw the main image at power-on, it is set to ON (see S2204 in FIG. 57). Then, at the stage when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 435 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 281, It is set to OFF (see S3105 in FIG. 60(b)).

The simple image display flag 433a is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 49). 433a is on, the simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 49(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2408 in FIG. ) of S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 433a is off, command determination processing (see FIGS. 50 to 54) and display are performed so that various images are displayed according to commands received from the sound lamp control device 313. Setting processing (see FIGS. 55 to 59) is executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 433a is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 431 during the V interrupt process (see S3001 in FIG. 60A), and when the simple image display flag 433a is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 435, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 60(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. However, when the simple image display flag 433a is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 61) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. FIG.

The display data table buffer 433b is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 according to a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 313. The MPU 431 determines an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 313, selects a display data table corresponding to the effect from the data table storage area 432a, and selects the display data table corresponding to the effect from the data table storage area 432a. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 433b. Then, the MPU 431 increments the pointer 433e by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, the image controller 437 A drawing list (see FIG. 35), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 281 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b.

The additional data table buffer 433c is added to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b in response to a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 313. This is a buffer for storing additional data tables corresponding to effects (continuous advance notice effects, etc.). When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 433b, the MPU 431 temporarily writes the None data to the additional data table buffer 433c, which means that there is no display object to be displayed. Clear contents.

Thereafter, the MPU 431, based on a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 313, the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b adds to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 to display the effect. Judgment of presence/absence, if there is an effect to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the effect is selected from the data table storage area 432a, and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. do.

While incrementing the pointer 433e one by one, the MPU 431 adds the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the drawing contents stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. Based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the added data table, a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 35) is generated in which the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 437 are described for each frame. . As a result, an effect corresponding to the additional data table is additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Further, when the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 433c, the None data is stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. is displayed as is.

The transfer data table buffer 433d is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b according to a command or the like from the sound lamp control device 313. FIG. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 433b, the MPU 431 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 432a, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 433d. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b is stored in the resident video RAM 435, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 431 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 433d by writing None data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 433e by one, the MPU 431 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d. (that is, if the None data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 35) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 437 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435 can always be stored in the image storage area 436a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 434 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 436. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 281. - 特許庁In addition, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 433e selects the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image from the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, the additional data table buffer 433c, and the transfer data table buffer 433d, respectively. This is for designating the address from which the transfer data information of the data should be obtained. The MPU 431 once initializes the pointer 433e to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 433b. Then, the MPU 431 executes display setting processing for V interrupt processing (S2403 in FIG. 49) based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing for one frame of image is completed. ), pointer update processing (see S2711 in FIG. 55) is executed, and the value of the pointer 433e is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 433e is updated, the MPU 431 extracts the address indicated by the pointer 433e from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. to create a drawing list (see FIG. 35), which will be described later, and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d, a predetermined sprite to start transferring at that time. acquires the transfer data information of the image data of , and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 433c, that An effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be easily changed. . Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d is stored, based on the transfer data table, by the time the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite, the sprite image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 436a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 434 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 436. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 281. - 特許庁In addition, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 433f is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 437 to draw an image for one frame.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 437 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 437 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 437 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 437 in either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 433i.

The MPU 431 selects the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 433c from the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433e and other images to be drawn. (For example, a pending image that displays the number of pending balls, a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information ) and rearrange the detailed information for each sprite to create a drawing list.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are specified from the sprite type defined in the display data table and the additional data table and other image contents. generated according to the sprite type. For each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 435 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 is fixed. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 431 stores other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table and additional data. Copy the information defined in the table as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 431 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, . . . , error pattern).

The image controller 437 executes the drawing process of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 433d contains transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 433e, the MPU 431 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 434, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 436a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 437 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 434 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 436 a of the normal video RAM 436 .

The clock counter 433g is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 433b, the MPU 431 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the rendering time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 281 .

Then, V interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 431 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame image are completed (see FIG. 49). Each time the display setting process is executed, the clock counter 433g is decremented by one (see S2713 in FIG. 55). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 433g becomes 0 or less, the MPU 431 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b has ended, and performs it in accordance with the completion of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image determination flag 433h determines whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 435 are stored in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not

This stored image determination flag 433h is generated by initial setting processing (see S2201 in FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 431 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image determination flag 433h generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 436a.

The stored image determination flag 433h is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 431. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 436a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 436a as that one sprite is always unstored by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, the MPU 431 refers to the stored image determination flag 433h to determine whether the image of the sprite to be transferred is transferred. It is determined whether the data has already been stored in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 435 (see S3212 in FIG. 61). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 436a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3213 in FIG. 61). , causes the image controller 437 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 436a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 436a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 314 and the traffic on the bus line 440 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 433i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops an image drawn by the image controller 437 from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 433i is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 436b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 436c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 437 together with the drawing list (see S3302 in FIG. 62).

As a result, the image controller 437 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 437 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 281 along with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 281 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 433i is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 437 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 433i, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 431 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 49) is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 62).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 436c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 436b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 436b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 436c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 436b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 281, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 436c. be. After that, a frame buffer for expanding one frame of image and a frame buffer for reading out one frame of image information are transferred to either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 36 to 42. FIG. The processing of the MPU 401 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (every 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Main processing will be explained.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 401 in main controller 310 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S1101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 310, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM403. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 403 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 899, 9, 99, 250) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM403.

Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 237 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 281 are executed (S1104), and then the first entrance Start winning processing associated with winning H.264 is executed (S1105). The details of the variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 39, respectively.

After executing the starting prize-winning process, the firing control process is executed (S1106), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S1107), and the timer interrupt process ends. In the shooting control process, the touch sensor 251a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 251, and the ball is shot on condition that the stop switch 251b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 310 instructs launch controller 312 to launch a ball when ball launch is on.

Next, the variation process (S1104) executed by MPU 401 in main controller 310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this variation processing (S1104). This variation processing (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 36), and controls the variation display performed by the first design display device 237 and the third design display device 281. FIG.

In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S1201). During the big win includes the middle of the big win game displayed on the third symbol display device 281 and the first symbol display device 237 at the time of the big win and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big win game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S1201: Yes), this process is terminated.

If it is not during the jackpot (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is fluctuating (S1202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is not fluctuating (S1202: No), then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 237 is stopped (S1203). As a result, if the predetermined time has not passed after the fluctuation is stopped (S1203: No), this processing is terminated. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 237 and the third symbol display device 281 for a predetermined period of time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1204, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1203: Yes), the value of the pending ball number counter 403a (variable display pending ball number N held in the main controller 310) is greater than 0 (S1204), and if the value of the retained ball number counter 403a (the number of retained balls N) is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value of the retained ball number counter 403a (the number of retained balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S1205), and shift processing is performed on the data stored in the reserved ball storage area (S1206). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on. After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 237 is executed (S1207). Note that the fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S1204, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved balls counter 403a (the number of reserved balls N) is 0 (S1204: No), the state where the demonstration effect is performed in the third symbol display device 281, that is, , it is determined whether or not a demonstration is being performed (S1208). In this determination process, after the demonstration command is transmitted to the display control device 314 via the sound lamp control device 313, until it is determined that the value of the pending ball number counter 403a (the number of pending balls N) is greater than 0 Identifies the interval as being in demonstration.

If it is determined that the demonstration is not being performed (S1208: No), the demo command is set (S1212), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S1208: Yes) This process is terminated as it is. The demo command set in the process of S1212 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 403, and is output during the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 401, which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 313 . The sound lamp control device 313 transmits this demonstration command as it is to the display control device 314, and the display control device 314 controls the third pattern display device 281 to display the demonstration effect according to this demonstration command.

Here, the demonstration command is set when, as described above, there is not even a single held ball when the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, when the variable display is not started when a predetermined time has passed after the variable stop, the demonstration command can be set and the third symbol display device 281 can be made to display the demonstration effect.

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S1210). The display time during the fluctuation of the first pattern display device 237 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has elapsed If not (S1210: No), the display of the first symbol display device 237 is updated (S1211), and this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, among the LEDs 237a of the first symbol display device 237, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, a display mode is set in which the red LED is turned on.

Note that the variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the variation processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 237 has passed (S1210: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 237 is set (S1212). The setting of the stop symbol is carried out in advance by the variation start process (S1207) which will be described later with reference to FIG. That is, by the processing of S1206, it is determined whether or not a big win is made according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, and if it is a big win, the first winning type counter is entered. Depending on the value of C2, either a 15R variable jackpot (maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds) or a 2R variable jackpot (maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds) It is determined whether it is a pattern that will be a transitional variable jackpot) or a pattern that will be a short-time jackpot (a jackpot where the maximum number of rounds will shift to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds).

In this embodiment, when the 15R probability variable jackpot is reached after the jackpot, the blue LED is lit, when the 2R probability variable jackpot is turned on, the red LED is turned on, and when the time-saving jackpot is turned on, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on. LED is turned on. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 281 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 237. A confirmation command is set (S1213), and this processing ends. When the sound lamp control device 313 receives this confirmation command, it directly transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 314 . The third symbol display device 281 stops the variation when the variation time elapses, and by receiving the determination command, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 281 is determined.

Next, the fluctuation start process (S1207) executed by MPU 401 in main controller 310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process (S1207). This fluctuation start process (S1207) is executed in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 37) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36), based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. A "jackpot" or "losing" lottery (win/fail judgment) is performed, and an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first pattern display device 237 and the third pattern display device 281 is determined.

In the fluctuation start process, first, a lottery (win/fail judgment) process for determining whether or not a big hit is performed based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S1301). Whether or not it is a big win is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, when the state (mode) that the pachinko machine 200 can take is normal low probability, "7,307,582" among the numerical values 0 to 899 of the first random number counter C1 becomes the winning value, and the pachinko machine 200 28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596 , 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892” are winning values. In the process of S1301, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with these hit values, and if they match, it is determined that the hit is a jackpot. .

Then, as a result of the process of S1301, when it is determined to be a big hit (S1301: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, the display at the time of the big hit A mode is set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first hit type counter C2, that is, the 15R variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, or the high probability after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. The display mode of the first symbol display device 237 (the lighting state of the LED 237a) is set based on whether the 2R probability variable jackpot that shifts to the state or the short-time jackpot that shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. be done. In addition, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the third pattern display device 281 stops and displays the jackpot patterns corresponding to various jackpots. set. Of the number 0 to 9 of the first per type counter C2, in the case of "0, 1, 2, 3", thereafter, it moves to a low probability state (time saving jackpot), and in the case of "4, 5" , After that, it shifts to a high probability state (2R probability variable jackpot), and in the case of "6, 7, 8, 9", it shifts to a high probability state (15R probability variable jackpot).

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S1303). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 237 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 281 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. be. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 403 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined. Note that the relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

If it is determined in the process of S1301 that the win is not a big hit (S1301: No), the display mode when the game is out is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 237 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281, it is set whether it is a front-rear out-of-order reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, or a complete out-of-order. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is a high-probability state or a low-probability state. there is

Next, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S1305), the display time of the first symbol display device 237 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 281 stops at the failure symbol. is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S1303, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 403 is checked, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach to decide.

When the processing of S1303 or the processing of S1305 is finished, next, a variation pattern is determined, and a variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern type to the display control device 314 is set (S1306). The variation pattern is selected from a variation pattern table (not shown) stored in the ROM 402 according to the result of the lottery in S1301 and the variation time determined in the processing of S1303 or S1305.

In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as fluctuation patterns for failure, "loss (for long time)", "loss (for short time)", various types of "loss normal reach", various types of "loss super reach", "loss special reach ”Various types are defined, and as fluctuation patterns for the 15R fixed jackpot and short-time jackpot, various types of “15R shared normal reach”, “15R shared super reach”, and “15R shared special reach” are specified, and variations for 15R fixed variable jackpot As a pattern, various types of "15R variable special reach" are specified, various types of "special variation" are specified as variation patterns for 2R variable jackpots, and various types of "shared normal reach" and "shared super Reach" various types and "common special reach" various types are stipulated. Then, a variation pattern is selected from various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the result of the lottery in S1301 and the variation time determined in the process of S1303 or S1305.

Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 314 of the stop type set in the process of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 403, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 42). be. The audio lamp control device 313 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 314 as it is. After the processing of S1307 is finished, the process returns to the change processing.

Next, the starting winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 401 in the main controller 310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S1105). This start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) to determine whether or not there is a win to the first ball entrance 264 (start winning). , the holding processing of the values indicated by the various random number counters, and the permission determination processing for the start of continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 281 from the values shown by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 264 (starting winning) (S1401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 264 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 264 (S1401: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a (the number N of reserved balls in the variable effect reserved in the main controller 310) is It is determined whether or not it is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S1402). Then, whether there is no winning to the first ball entrance 264 (S1401: No), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 264, if the number of balls to be held in operation N<4 (S1402: No) , return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 264 (S1401: Yes) and if the number of reserved balls N<4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 403a (the number of reserved balls N) 1 is added (S1403), and each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S1103 is stored in the empty reservation area of the reservation ball storage area of the RAM 403. The data is stored in the first area (S1404).

Next, the number of held balls N updated by the processing of S1403, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the held ball storage area by the processing of S1404 are Create a pending ball number command including (S1405), set the created pending ball number command (S1406), terminate the start winning process, and return to the timer interrupt process. This pending ball number command is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 403, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 42). The voice ramp control device 313 manages the number of pending balls in the voice ramp control device 313 based on the number of pending balls N included in the command for the number of pending balls, and controls various counters included in the command for the number of pending balls. Based on the value, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 401 in main controller 310 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 401 of the main controller 310 when the pachinko machine 200 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. Occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 403 by this NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the pachinko machine 200 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 401 in the main controller 310 . Then, the MPU 401 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 403 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 311 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 413 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 200 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 411 in the payout control device 311, and the MPU 411 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, startup processing executed by MPU 401 in main controller 310 when main controller 310 is powered on will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 313 and the payout control device 311) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 403 is permitted (S1603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 322 (see FIG. 24) provided in the power supply device 315 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 322 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 403, as will be described later in the processing of S1712 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 403 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 311 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). When the payout control device 311 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 413, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 310 executes the initialization process of RAM 403 (S1612, S1613).

As described above, the pachinko machine 200 is powered on while the RAM erase switch 322 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 322 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 403 initialization process (S1612, S1613) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 403 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 403 is set (S1613). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 403, the process proceeds to S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 322 is not turned on (S1604: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 403 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1608). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the gaming state at the time of drive power interruption (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 311 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 413 .

In the process of S1610, interrupts are permitted (S1610). Then, the process shifts to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, main processing executed by MPU 401 in main controller 310 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 234 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). ) is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S1101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 36) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 311 corresponds to the number of winning balls. Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 313 the pending ball number command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 39). Furthermore, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 281 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 313 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 312 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM403.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 are read (S1703), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the specific winning opening (large open) of the variable winning device 265 A large opening opening/closing process for opening or closing the opening 265a is executed (S1704). That is, the specific winning hole 265a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 265a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning hole 265a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 265a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 265a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, display control processing of the second pattern (for example, the pattern of "o" or "x") by the second pattern display device 283 is executed (S1705). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 267, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 283 , the variable display of the second symbol is carried out. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessary attached to the first ball entrance 264 is opened for a predetermined period of time.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 403 (S1706). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the above-described processes after S1701 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous main processing (S1707: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1708, S1709).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 403, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1709).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1706, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 403 (S1706: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 452. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 40 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1710 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1710), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 311 and the sound lamp control device 313) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1711). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1712), access to the RAM 403 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 403 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1706 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 310, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 401 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1701. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 310 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 310 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 47. FIG. The processing of the MPU 421 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 43, start-up processing executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S1917 (see FIG. 44) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 44, when the audio lamp controller 313 receives a power-off command from the main controller 310 (see S1914 in FIG. 44), it executes power-off processing in S1917. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1917 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1802: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1917. Either it was started after the execution of processing was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 310). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 423 is destroyed (S1803).

Destruction of data in the RAM 423 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 423 by the process of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 423. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 423 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM423 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), it will transfer to S1804 and will start initialization of RAM423. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 423 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 423 (the memory of the RAM 423 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 423 is destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1804. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1917 was completed, or only the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 423, so the data in the RAM 423 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the process proceeds to S1808.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1802: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the sound lamp control device 313 It is started by resetting the MPU 421 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 423 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1804 and the initialization of the RAM 423 is started.

In the processing of S1804, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 423 is checked (S1804). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 423 are cleared to 0 by checking the reading and writing of the RAM 423 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 423 (S1805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 423 to set RAM destruction check data (S1806). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 423 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 423 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 423 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 423 is notified by the display lamp 234 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 426 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 423, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 314 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 281. can be

In the process of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1917 is executed (see S1916 in FIG. 44). That is, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1917 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1917 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S1809) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 313, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 423 (S1810), an interrupt Permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 423 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 310 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1808 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 310). Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 423, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 423 (S1810), interrupt permission is set. Then (S1811), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clear processing of S1809 is skipped is that when the processing of S1808 is reached from S1804 via the processing of S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 423 have already been cleared by the processing of S1804, When only the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 423 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 313 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, main processing executed by the MPU 421 in the audio ramp control device 313 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 313 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or since the process of S1901 was last executed (S1901). If not (S1901: No), the process proceeds to S1912 without performing the processes of S1902 to S1911. In the process of S1901, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1902 to S1911 are processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display processing in S1913 and the command determination processing in S1913 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1913 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 310 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S1912 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 314 set by the processing of S1903 to S1913 are transmitted to the display control device 314. Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 234 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1904). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 314 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 281 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1905 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1905, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1906). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 200 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 281 to a title screen is performed. 314. In the pending number display update process, the process of lighting the pending lamp 285 according to the value of the pending ball number counter 423a is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1907). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input as to whether or not the frame button 222 operated by the player is pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 222 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process of setting to perform production. In this processing, when the operation of the frame button 222 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 314 that the frame button 222 has been operated.

Also, when the frame button 222 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a back image change command for the display control device 314 is set. By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 314 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 281 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 222, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 222 during the ready-to-win production, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 222 may be used as a determination button for selecting one ready-to-win effect out of a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 222 is not arranged, the process of S1907 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing ends, vibration sensor input monitoring processing is performed (S1908). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 428 and detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 200 is vibrated.

Details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313. As shown in FIG.

In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 428 is read from the vibration sensor 428 (S1951), and it is determined whether the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level from the read output value. (S1952). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S1952: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 44).

On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1952: Yes), it is determined that the pachinko machine 200 has been vibrated, and the audio output device 426 is set to output an alarm sound (S1953). An error command is set to notify the control device 314 of the occurrence of a vibration error (S1954), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 44). As a result, the display control device 31 performs a process of displaying an error message image for notifying the vibration error on the third pattern display device 281 .

Returning to FIG. 44, the description of the main processing is continued. After the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) ends, the lamp edit process is executed (S1909), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1910). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 229 to 233 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 281 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 426 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 281, and the sound is output from the voice output device 426 according to the setting. Further, when the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 45) (see S1953), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by the sound editing/output process, and the alarm sound is voiced. Output from the output device 426 .

After the processing of S1910, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1911), and the process proceeds to S1912. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 310, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 281 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1909 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1910 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 281. FIG.

In the process of S1912, in order to display the variation effect in the third symbol display device 281, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 310, and the command is sent to the display control device 314. Executes variable display processing, which is processing set for transmission. The details of this variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 310 is performed (S1913). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S1913 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 433 stores power-off occurrence information (S1914). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 310 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1914 (S1914: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1916), and the power-off processing is executed (S1917). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off (S1918), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 426 and the lamp display device 427 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1914 (S1914: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 423 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 423 (S1915), and the RAM 423 is destroyed. If not (S1915: No), the process returns to S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 423 is destroyed (S1915: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 281 does not change after that. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a hall clerk or the like to request repair of the pachinko machine 200 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 423 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 426 or the lamp display device 427 .

Next, the command determination processing (S1913) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1913). This command determination process (S1913) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp controller 313, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 310. . In addition, this processing also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 281 when the pending ball number command is received from the main control device 310 .

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 310 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 423, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 310. It is determined whether or not (S2001). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2001: Yes), the variation start flag provided in the RAM 423 is turned on (S2002), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2003). , return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 423, and in the variation display process (see FIG. 47) described later, a variation pattern for display that notifies the display control device 314 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type is displayed. Used to set commands.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from main controller 310 (S2004). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2004: Yes), the stop type command for display is set in order to transmit the stop type command as it is to the display control device 314 (S2005).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2004: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 310 (S2006). Then, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the pending ball number counter 403a of the main controller 310 included in the pending ball number command (that is, The number of pending balls of variable effect) is extracted and stored in the pending ball number counter 423a of the sound lamp control device 313 (S2007).

Here, the pending ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 310 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 264 (starting winning), so each time there is a starting winning, the process of S2008 , the value of the pending ball number counter 423a of the voice lamp control device 313 can be matched with the value of the pending ball number counter 403a of the main controller 310. FIG. Therefore, even if the value of the pending ball number counter 423a of the voice ramp control device 313 deviates from the value of the pending ball number counter 403a of the main control device 310 due to the influence of noise, etc., the voice ramp control device 313 The value of the reserved ball number counter 423 a can be corrected to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 403 a of the main controller 310 .

Further, after the process of S2007, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 314 of the value of the reserved ball number counter 423a updated by the process of S2007 is set (S2008). As a result, the display control device 314 executes a process to display the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number on the third symbol display device 281 .

After that, the continuous notice determination process is executed (S2009), and the process returns to the main process. In this continuous advance notice determination process, from the value of the number of reserved balls received from the main controller 310 by the number of reserved balls command and the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3, It is determined whether or not to carry out a continuous advance notice performance in which the notice performance images are continuously displayed over the variable performance suspended at the time point. Also, when the continuous notice effect is performed, is the continuous notice effect mode of the same effect type continuous notice effect mode in which the same image (for example, "bubble" image) is displayed over a plurality of variable effects? , Related images are displayed in order each time a variable effect is performed (for example, each image is displayed in the order of "egg" → "chick" → "chicken" → "chicken group") step-up type continuous announcement effect Decide which mode to use.

The decision as to whether or not to carry out the continuous advance notice effect is specifically based on the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3, at the time when the pending ball number command is transmitted. Estimates the result of the lottery performed corresponding to the held ball held in , and the stop type after the variable performance, and performs based on the estimated result and the number of held balls held at that time. For example, when it is estimated that the stop type after the variable effect is the 15R probability variable jackpot or the front-rear out-of-reach reach, it may be determined that the continuous advance notice effect is performed with a predetermined probability. Also, in this case, it may be determined so that the more the number of pending balls, the higher the probability that the continuous announcement effect is performed.

In addition to this, if the estimated result of the lottery is a big win, regardless of the stop type, continuous advance notice effects may be performed with a predetermined probability, or if the result of the lottery is a loss. However, when the stop type is the ready-to-win state, that is, when it is estimated to be the out-of-front-end ready-to-win state and the non-out-of-state ready-to-win state, the continuous announcement effect may be performed at a predetermined probability. In this way, the condition for determining the execution of the continuous advance notice effect may be appropriately set according to the game characteristics that the pachinko machine 200 is to have.

In addition, as the continuous advance notice effect mode, a condition may be appropriately set as to whether the same effect type or the step-up type is used. For example, a random number counter may be provided inside the sound lamp control device 313, and the continuous announcement effect mode may be determined according to the value of the random number counter.

In the pachinko machine 200, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 obtained at the time of start-up winning are set in the main controller 310 by the pending ball number command. 313, and the voice lamp control device 313 determines the start of the continuous notice effect and sets the mode of the continuous notice effect based on the values of various counters and the value of the number of reserved balls notified by the reserved ball number command. conduct. As a result, the processing in the main controller 310 can be concentrated on the lottery processing for drawing the game state to be changed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 264, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 200. On the other hand, if the MPU 421 with high processing capability is used for the sound lamp control device 313, the conditions for executing the continuous announcement effect can be set in various modes.

Also, the number of pending balls and the values of various counters can be transmitted from the main controller 310 to the sound lamp controller 313 with one pending ball number command. As a result, in the audio lamp control device 313, it is possible to accurately grasp the correspondence between the values of various counters acquired in conjunction with the starting winning and the number of pending balls at the time when the starting winning is detected. When execution of the continuous advance notice performance is determined, the number of pending balls to which the continuous notice performance is added can be accurately grasped. Therefore, compared to the case where the number of held balls and the values of various counters are transmitted from the main controller 310 to the audio lamp controller 313 by separate commands, the control in the audio lamp controller 313 is facilitated. be able to.

As a result of the process of S2006, if it is determined that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S2010), and shifts to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 313, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 423, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 314, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 314 . The demonstration command and the confirmation command received from the main controller 310 are set as the display demonstration command and the confirmation command for display by the process of S2010, and are transmitted to the display control device 314. FIG.

Next, the variable display process (S1912) executed by the MPU 421 in the audio lamp control device 313 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this variable display processing (S1912). This variable display process (S1912) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 421 in the sound lamp control device 313, and as described above, the third symbol display device 281 displays the variable effect. In order to do so, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 310, and a variation display process, which is a process for setting the command to be transmitted to the display control device 314, is executed. In addition, along with the display of the variable effect, the value of the pending ball number counter 423a is updated, and a display pending ball number command is set and generated to notify the display control device 314 of the updated pending ball number. When it is decided to carry out continuous notice performance for the fluctuation performance displayed on the third pattern display device 281 by the display variation pattern command, the continuous notice command is set after the display variation pattern command.

In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 423 is on (S2101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 310, so this fluctuation display process is executed. End and return to main processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the process of S2003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46) The variation pattern type in the variation effect thus obtained is acquired from the RAM 423 (S2103).

Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the acquired variation pattern type to the display control device 314 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 314 (S2104). In the display control device 314, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 281 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Start the display control of the variable effect.

Next, according to the setting of the display variation pattern command, the held ball is consumed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the held ball is set), the value of the held ball number counter 423a is decreased by 1. (S2105), a display pending ball number command for notifying the display controller 314 of the pending ball number indicated by the updated value of the pending ball number counter 423a is set (S2106). The display control device 314 executes a process of displaying on the third symbol display device 281 the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the command for the number of reserved balls for display. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of reserved balls by counting the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 281 .

Next, for the variable effect corresponding to the display variation pattern command set by the process of S2104, it is determined whether or not it is determined by the process of S2009 of the command determination process (see FIG. 46) to perform the continuous advance notice effect. (S2107), if it is determined to perform continuous announcement effect (S2107: Yes), to the display control device 314, to set a continuous announcement command for notifying the execution of the continuous announcement effect (S2108) , terminate this process and return to the main process. On the other hand, in the process of S2107, if the continuous announcement effect is not determined (S2107: No), the variable display process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the continuous notice command set by the processing of S2108 is displayed in addition to the variable performance according to the continuous notice performance mode determined by the processing of S2009 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 46). Continuous preview image types (one of "bubble", "egg", "chick", "chicken" and "chicken group") are included. When the display control device 314 receives the continuous notice command, the display control device 314 adds the continuous notice image of the type indicated by the continuous notice production command to the variation effect performed based on the previously received display fluctuation pattern command, and displays the third symbol. Processing is executed to display on the display device 281 .

Next, each control executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 62. FIG. The processing of the MPU 431 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 313, and processing for one frame from the image controller 437. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 431 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 431 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 313 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 431 in the display control device 314 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

When this main process is activated by the MPU 431 when the power is turned on, first, the initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2301). Specifically, the MPU 431 is initialized, and the memory of the work RAM 433, resident video RAM 435, and normal video RAM 436 is cleared. Also, various flags are provided in the work RAM 433, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 437 is initialized, the image controller 437 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 281. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 281 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 281 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the pachinko machine 200 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 435a of the resident video RAM 435 (S2202). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 434 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 435), and the transfer destination. The image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to area 435a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 437 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 431 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 431 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 437 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 437 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 431 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 437, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 435a at power-on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 435a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 437 by the process of S2202, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 435a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction includes the leading address of the character ROM 434 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 435). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 435b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the power-on variation image area 435b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 435b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

Based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 437 by the process of S2203, when the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 435b is completed, then the simple image display flag 433a is set. is turned on (S2204). As a result, while the simple image display flag 433a is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 60(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 434 to transfer the image (see S3002 in FIG. 60A).

Further, the simple image display flag 433a indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 are transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 434 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 49B), the simple command is executed so that the images at the time of image input shown in FIG. Determination processing (see S2408 in FIG. 49B) and simple display setting processing (see S2409 in FIG. 49B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 200 uses the NAND flash memory 434a for the character ROM 434. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 281, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 314 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 314 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 281 when the power is turned on, the third pattern display device 281 can start operating without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 434. FIG.

In the display control device 314 of the pachinko machine 200, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 281, a ball enters the first ball entrance 264 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is given by the main controller 310 under voice lamp control. If it is received via the device 313, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, immediately display the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 281 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, the third pattern display device 281 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 200, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 435 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2204, interrupt permission is set (S2205), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2205, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49(a), command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 49(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp controller 314, the MPU 431 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 433 (S2301), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314 will be described. FIG. 49(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 281, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 35) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 437, the image controller 437 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 437 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 437 and sent to the MPU 431 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 437 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 49B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 433a is on (S2401). If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third pattern display device 281, command determination processing (S2402) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2403) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2402), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 313 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 433b, and the set display data table is set. The transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 433d. Further, when a continuous announcement command is stored, a continuous announcement additional data table corresponding to the continuous announcement image type is set in the additional data table buffer 433c.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 310 decides to start the variable effect, there is a high possibility that a variable pattern command for display, a stop type command, a continuous notice command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the aspect of the variable effect or the continuous advance notice effect selected by the main control device 310 or the sound lamp control device 313 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the drawing of the image can be controlled. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S2403), based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table buffer 433c by the command determination process (S2402) and the like, in the third symbol display device 281 Next, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed is specifically specified. Also, according to the status of processing, etc., the effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 281 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect is set in the display data table buffer 433b. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S2404). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting processing (S2403) or the simple display setting processing (S2409). The type of sprite (display object) is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 433a is on, the image controller 437 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 435. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 433b is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the image controller 437 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 433d. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 436 a of the video RAM 436 , even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 313 , the image controller 437 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2404) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2405), , generates the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 437 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 437 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display device 314 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 433, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, short time jackpot, front and back reach, reach other than front and back reach , complete failure) are compared with the stop type counter, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 281 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the simple image display flag is ON (S2401: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has not been completed. In order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. to

Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54, the details of the command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314, will be described. First, FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 50, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S2503).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, it is first determined whether or not there is a command for the number of reserved balls for display (S2504), and if there is a command for the number of reserved balls for display (S2504: Yes), the command for the number of reserved balls is processed. is executed (S2505), and the process returns to S2501.

Here, with reference to FIG. 51(a), the details of the pending ball count command process (S2505) will be described. FIG. 51(a) is a flow chart showing the pending ball count command process. This reserved ball number command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 314 .

In the pending ball number command process, first, the new pending ball number command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2403) that the display pending ball number command has been processed in the ON state is turned on (S2601), and then the display pending ball number command flag is turned on (S2601). Retained pitch information included in the pitch command is acquired (S2602). In addition, in the process of S2602, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball number information is obtained from the last stored display reserved ball number command. This makes it possible to acquire the latest information on the number of pending balls.

Then, among the number discrimination flags provided for each number of held balls, the number discrimination flag corresponding to the number of held balls acquired in the process of S2602 is turned on, and the number discrimination flag corresponding to the other number of held balls is turned off. (S2603) and returns to the command determination process.

As a result, in the display setting process, when the new pending ball number command flag is on, by referring to the number discrimination flag, the number of pending ball patterns for the number of pending balls corresponding to the number discrimination flag set to ON is displayed. is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, the reserved image data is expanded.

Returning to FIG. 50, in the processing of S2504, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of pending balls for display (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a determination command for display among the unprocessed commands. (S2506), and if there is a confirmation command for display (S2506: Yes), the confirmation command process is executed (S2507), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the confirmation command process (S2507) will now be described with reference to FIG. 51(b). FIG. 51(b) is a flow chart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command processing is to execute the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 314 .

In the confirmation command processing (S2507), the confirmation command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2403) that the confirmation command for display has been received in the ON state is set to ON (S2611), this processing is terminated, and command determination is performed. Return to processing. Thus, in the display setting process, the state of the confirmation command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the third symbol display device 281 starts displaying the confirmation display effect. to run. Further, when the setting of the display of the variable performance is processed, if the fixed command flag is not turned on even after the performance time set for the variable performance has passed, the restart performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 281. Display setting processing is executed so that

Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the processing of S2506 that there is no display confirmation command (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( S2508), if there is a display demo command (S2508: Yes), the demo command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the demonstration command processing (S2509) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51(c) is a flow chart showing the demonstration command process. This demonstration command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display demonstration command received from the audio lamp control device 314 .

In the demonstration command process (S2509), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the data table storage area 432a and set in the display data table buffer 433b (S2621). Next, it is necessary to clear the content of the additional data table buffer 433c by writing None data to it, and to newly transfer the image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 in the demonstration display data table. Since the image drawing is stipulated so that no corresponding transfer data table is prepared in the data table storage area 432a, the None data is also written to the transfer data table buffer 433d to clear its contents (S2622). ).

Next, the time data corresponding to the demonstration display is set in the clock counter 433g (S2623), and the pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2624). Then, the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is displayed in the ON state on the third pattern display device 281 is set to ON, and the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 281 in the ON state. is set to OFF, and the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to OFF (S2625), the demo command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

By executing this demonstration command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 433e initialized by the processing of S2624, the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 433b by the processing of S2621 is updated. , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 433e, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 281. FIG. In the display setting process, the timer counter 433g to which the time data corresponding to the demonstration display has been set by the process of S2623 is used to measure the duration of the demonstration effects defined in the demonstration display data table, and the process of S2625 is performed. Based on the states of the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag set by the display setting control timing counter 433g, when it is determined that the demonstration effect in the demonstration display data table has ended, the effect to be displayed next , control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

Returning to FIG. 50, in the process of S2508, if it is determined that there is no demonstration command for display (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a variation pattern command for display among the unprocessed commands. (S2510), if there is a variation pattern command for display (S2510: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S2511), and the process returns to S2501.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2511) will be described with reference to FIG. 52(a). FIG. 52(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 314 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process (S2509), first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 432a. and set in the display data table buffer 433b (S2631).

Here, since the main controller 310 always determines the start of variation at a distance of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is also the risk of being interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2631, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time The table is set in the display data table buffer 433b.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 433b, the variation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control. If instructed by the device 310, the determination command (display determination command ) is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, as in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 433b, the display data table that is actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the variable effect having the variable time is instructed by the main controller 310, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 433b is completed, the confirmation command from the main controller 310 is issued. Since the display of the third symbol display device 281 is controlled by the display setting process so that the restart effect is displayed until the (display confirmation command) is received, the player can change the restart effect. It is visually recognized as part of the performance, and the variation of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 281 can be continued without discomfort until the stop display of the third pattern is confirmed.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2631 is determined, read from the data table storage area 432a, and set in the transfer data table buffer 433d (S2632). Then, by writing None data to the additional data table buffer 433c, the content is cleared (S2633).

After that, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2631 is turned on, and other The data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table is set to OFF (S2634). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2634, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 433b corresponds to. can be judged. Then, in the display setting process, it is determined whether or not there is a contradiction between the fluctuation pattern of the set fluctuation display data table and the stop pattern set by the display stop type command to be received later. sets a display data table corresponding to the special variation in the display data table buffer 433b, as will be described later.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for fluctuation set in the display data table buffer 433b by the processing of S2631, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 433g (S2635), The pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2636). Then, the fixed command flag, the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are all set to off (S2637), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2638), and the variation pattern command and return to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 433e initialized by the process of S2636, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b by the process of S2631 , extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e, specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 281, and at the same time specifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e. The image controller 437 is operated so that the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 in advance. Control.

In the display setting process, the time counter 433g to which the time data corresponding to the demonstration display has been set by the process of S2635 is used to measure the time for the variable effect specified in the variable display data table. When it is determined that the variable effect on the table has ended, if a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 310 is received, the fixed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, and after the variable effect ends, a predetermined If the determination command (determination command for display) cannot be received within the time, the setting of the display is controlled so as to display the restart effect on the third symbol display device 281. - 特許庁

Here, if both the display fixed command and the display fluctuation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display fixed command is given priority, the display Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, since it is first determined whether there is a confirmation command for display, the confirmation command process corresponding to the confirmation command for display is always executed first. The processing corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command for is executed later, and as in the processing of S2637, the determination command flag set by the display determination command can be set to OFF by overwriting. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display determination command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be preferentially displayed on the third pattern display device 281 .

Similarly, when both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, the display Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, since the presence or absence of the display demo command is determined first, the demo command process, which is the process corresponding to the display demo command, is always executed first. A process corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed later, and like the process of S2631, the demonstration display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b by the display demonstration command is rewritten to the variation display data table by overwriting. can be done. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demonstration command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be preferentially displayed on the third symbol display device 281 .

Returning to FIG. 50, in the process of S2510, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands. Then (S2512), if there is a display variation type command (S2511: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2513), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the stop type command process (S2513) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52(b) is a flow chart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 314 .

In the variation type command process, first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, time-saving jackpot, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete off either) stop corresponding to The type table is determined (S2641), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49(b)) is executed, and the third symbol Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the display device 281 is set (S2642).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to off (S2643).

Here, as described above, in the display data table for variation, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the type information specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is displayed. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the process of S2642 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2404), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2642 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S2643, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 435d of the resident video RAM 435, as described above.

After the processing of S2643, the comparison flag is then turned on (S2644), the stop type command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to. By turning on this comparison flag, in the display setting process, it is determined whether or not there is a contradiction between the variation pattern of the variation display table set by the above-described variation pattern command setting process and the stop pattern set by the process of S2642. If there is a contradiction, a display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 433b, as will be described later.

It should be noted that since the main controller 310 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2641, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S2642.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is set, the third symbol display device 281 will display the stop symbol of the big win even if it is actually out. There is a possibility that the game state of the pachinko machine 200 is misunderstood as a big win, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 200 is lowered. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, the stop symbol of the complete loss is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 281 if the jackpot is won. Also, since the game state of the pachinko machine 200 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the processing of S2512 that there is no stop type command for display (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a continuous notice command among the unprocessed commands ( S2514), if there is a continuous notice command (S2514: Yes), the continuous notice command process is executed (S2515), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the continuous notice command process (S2515) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53(a) is a flow chart showing continuous notice command processing. This continuous announcement command process is for executing a process corresponding to the continuous announcement command received from the sound lamp control device 314 .

In the continuous notice command process, first, the new continuous notice command flag for notifying the transfer setting process (S2405) that the continuous notice command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2651). Next, a continuous announcement additional data table corresponding to the continuous announcement image type (one of "foam", "egg", "chick", "chicken" and "chicken group") indicated by the continuous announcement command is determined. , the determined additional data table for continuous announcement is read from the data table storage area 432a and set in the additional data table buffer 433c.

As a result, in the display setting process, for the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, the continuous announcement corresponding to the additional data table for continuous announcement stored in the additional data table buffer 433c by the process of S2652. The display contents of the image for the next one frame in the third pattern display device 281 are specified so that the notice effect is additionally displayed.

After that, among the continuous notice determination flags provided for each continuous notice image type, the continuous notice determination flag corresponding to the continuous notice image type included in the continuous notice command is turned on, and the continuous notice judgment flag corresponding to the other continuous notice image type is turned on. The advance notice determination flag is set to OFF (S2652), the continuous advance notice command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the new continuous announcement command flag set by the process of S2651 is turned on, it is determined that a predetermined continuous announcement additional data table has been set in the additional data table buffer 433c by the continuous announcement command process. Then, the continuous announcement type corresponding to the continuous announcement additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433c is specified from the continuous announcement determination flag set by the process of S2652. Then, the image controller 437 is instructed to transfer the image data necessary for displaying the specified continuous announcement type.

Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the processing of S2514 that there is no continuous notice command (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2516). ), if there is a back image change command (S2516: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the back image change command process (S2517) will now be described with reference to FIG. 53(b). FIG. 53(b) is a flow chart showing the back image change command process. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 314 .

In the back image change command process, first, a back image change flag is set to ON (S2661) for notifying the transfer setting process (S2405) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state (S2661). Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2662), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2661 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2662. Then, if the specified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 437 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the rear image of a predetermined range from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 436 a of the normal video RAM 436 .

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image determination flag set in S2662 is used to determine that back face image. The type of the background image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 435 for normal use or video RAM 436 for normal use) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 222 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2662, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 200, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 200. FIG.

Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the process of S2516 that there is no back image change command (S2516: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a frame button operation command among the unprocessed commands ( S2518), if there is a frame button operation command (S2518: Yes), the frame button operation command process is executed (S2519), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the frame button operation command process (S2519) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54(a) is a flow chart showing frame button operation command processing. In this frame button operation command processing, processing corresponding to the frame button operation command received from the sound lamp control device 314 is executed.

For the frame button operation command, the frame button operation flag indicating that the frame button has been operated in the ON state is set to ON (S2671), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, based on the frame button operation flag set by the process of S2671, the frame button is operated while the super ready-to-win selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 according to the variable display data table. When it detects, it executes processing to update the type of super reach to be displayed later. As a result, the player can select a desired super ready-to-win effect.

Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the process of S2518 that there is no frame button operation command (S2518: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2520). If there is an error command (S2520: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2521), and the process returns to S2501.

Details of the error command processing (S2521) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 314 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2681). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2682). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2681, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2682, and the error type is handled. Then, the third symbol display device 281 is caused to display the warning image to be executed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the processing of S2682, error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 281, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Returning to FIG. 50, if it is determined in the process of S2520 that there is no error command (S2520: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2522), and the process returns to S2501.

In the process of S2501, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes ), and the processing of S2502 to S2522 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2501 to S2522 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2408) executed when the simple image display flag 433a is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Only commands and stop type commands for display are extracted, and processing corresponding to each command, fixed command processing (see FIG. 51(b)), fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52(a)) and stop type The command processing (see FIG. 52(c)) is executed, and other commands are discarded without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 52(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S2631, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 433b. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 435a and the power-on varying moving image area 435b of the resident video RAM 435. Therefore, in the process of S2632, the process of writing None data to the transfer data table buffer 433b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S2403), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314, will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59. FIG. First, FIGS. 55 and 56 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 55, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2701). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, the processes of S2702 to S2710 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2711. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S2701: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S2702), S2703 to S2710 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not the new pending ball number command flag is ON (S2703), and if the new pending ball number command flag is ON (S2703: Yes), the It is determined that the reserved ball number command has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed (S2704).

Details of the pending image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57(a) is a flowchart showing the pending image setting process. This pending image setting process causes the third pattern display device 281 to display the number of pending balls patterns corresponding to the number of pending balls notified by the voice lamp control device 313 in accordance with the processing of the command for the number of pending balls for display. This is processing for developing image data.

In the pending image setting process, first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of pending ball patterns for the number of pending balls corresponding to the number determination flag set to ON is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 281 (see FIG. 25). ) is developed (S2751). In the task processing, based on this expanded reserved image data, the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the reserved image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. Determine the various parameters required.

In the pending image setting process, after the process of S2751, the new pending ball number command is set to OFF (S2752), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 55, after the pending image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S2703, if it is determined that the new pending ball number command flag is not ON, that is, OFF (S2703: No), then , the error occurrence flag is turned on (S2705). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S2705: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S2706).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57(b) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 281. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 281 is developed (S2761).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle are determined. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S2761, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2762), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 55, after the warning image setting process (S2706) or in the process of S2705, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S2705: No), then the frame button is pressed. It is determined whether or not the operation flag is on (S2707). Then, if the frame button operation flag is ON (S2707: Yes), frame button operation processing is executed (S2708).

Here, the details of the frame button operation process will be described with reference to FIG. 57(c). FIG. 57(b) is a flowchart showing frame button operation processing. In this process, when the frame button 222 is operated by the player while the third symbol display device 281 is displaying the selection screen for selecting the display mode of the super ready-to-win, the super ready-to-win to be displayed according to the operation. This is a process for selecting a mode.

In the frame button operation process, first, after setting the frame button operation flag to OFF (S2771), it is determined whether or not the super ready-to-win selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (S2772). This super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 according to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b. When the image controller 437 is instructed to draw a sprite for the super ready-to-win selection screen based on the display data table, it is determined that the super ready-to-win selection screen is being displayed on the third symbol display device 281 .

Then, in the process of S2772, if it is determined that the super ready-to-win selection screen is not displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (S2772: No), the frame button operation process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S2772, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (S2772: Yes), the super reach type flag provided for each display mode of super reach Of these, according to a predetermined order, only the super reach type flag corresponding to one display mode is turned on, and the other super reach type flags are set to be off (S2773), Return to display setting processing.

In this embodiment, when defining the super reach display mode selected by the player in the variable display data table, the drawing contents corresponding to the super reach display mode are defined for each address. In the display setting process, when the contents of the display data table are expanded in the process of S2712 described later, only the drawing contents corresponding to the super reach display mode with the super reach type flag turned on are extracted. As a result, in the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) corresponding to the selected super reach display mode is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc. required for drawing are specified. Since various parameters are set, the super ready-to-win effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the selected display mode.

Returning to FIG. 55, after the frame button operation processing (S2708) or in the processing of S2707, if it is determined that the frame button operation flag is not ON, that is, is OFF (S2707: No), then comparison is performed. It is determined whether the flag is on (S2709). Then, if the comparison flag is on (S2709: Yes), comparison processing is executed (S2710).

Now, with reference to FIG. 58, the details of the comparison process will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing comparison processing. This process is performed when the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 433b and the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display are inconsistent based on the variation pattern command for display. To change the production to a special variable production that variably displays the third pattern at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 310 via the sound lamp control device 313 is received. is the processing of

In the comparison process, first, among the data table discrimination flags, the data table discrimination flag set to the ON state is specified, and from the specified data table discrimination flag, the variation stored in the display data table buffer 433b is determined. The type of the display data table for is specified (S2781). Next, among the stop design determination flags, the stop design determination flag that is set to the ON state is specified, and the set stop design is specified from the specified stop design determination flag (S2782).

Then, it is determined whether or not the type of the display data table for variation specified by the process of S2781 matches the stop symbol specified by the process of S2782 (S2783). As described above, the display data table for variation is prepared for each variation pattern, and each variation pattern includes: for out, 15R fixed jackpot/time-saving jackpot common, 15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, ··and so on. Therefore, in the process of S2783, for example, even though the display data table for variation corresponds to the variation pattern for loss, if the stop symbol is set to the jackpot symbol, it is determined that they do not match. .

In the process of S2783, if it is determined that they match (S2783: Yes), the process proceeds to S2788, sets the comparison flag to off (S2788), and returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S2783: No), first, the display data table for special fluctuation, which defines the special fluctuation, is set in the display data table buffer 433b, and the additional data table buffer 433c and the transfer data table are set. By writing None data to each of the buffers 433d, those contents are cleared (S2784).

Next, the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to special stop symbols (for example, symbols displayed as "3", "4", "1" from the left column) are turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned on. is set to OFF (S2785), and further, time data corresponding to the effect time of the special variation effect is set to the clock counter 433g (S2786). In the special variation effect, as described above, the third symbol is varied at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 310 via the sound lamp control device 313 is received. Since it is to be displayed, the performance time is set to a long time (for example, 3 minutes). Therefore, 3 minutes (180000 milliseconds)÷20 milliseconds=9000 is set in the timer counter 433g as time data corresponding to the performance time of the special variable performance.

Then, the pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2787), the comparison flag is set to OFF (S2788), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Thus, if the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 433b based on the variation pattern command for display contradicts the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display, a special Since the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b, the third symbol display device 281 displays a special variable effect in which the third symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed. Then, since a special stop pattern is set as the stop pattern, when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main controller 310 via the sound lamp controller 313 is received, the special stop pattern is displayed. can be confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display 281 .

Here, when the variation performance pattern instructed by the main controller 310 via the sound lamp controller 313 does not match the stop pattern to be displayed when the variation performance is stopped, the display controller 314 controls the main controller. There is a possibility that the result of the lottery performed in 310 cannot be correctly reflected and the variable effect and the fixed display effect cannot be performed. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 200, in such a case, a special variation effect is performed, and after the variation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special failure is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. Therefore, the main control device Even if the result of the lottery in 310 is a loss, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 281 from erroneously performing a confirmation display performance of a big win. Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 281, if the lottery result of the main controller 310 is a big win, the actual game state of the pachinko machine 200 shifts to the special game state. The player can continue playing the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, by setting the fixed display as a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 200 may be in a big winning state even if the fixed display is off. The pachinko machine 200 is brought into a jackpot state in spite of the fact that the confirmation display is off, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

Returning to FIG. 55, after the comparison process (S2708) or when it is determined that the comparison flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF in the process of S2709 (S2709: No), then the process proceeds to S2711. do.

In S2711, pointer update processing is executed (S2711). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process is performed by extracting the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data from the display data table, additional data table, and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, additional data table buffer 433c, and transfer data table buffer 433d, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 433e designating the address from which the transfer data information of the target image data should be acquired.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 433e (S2791). That is, the pointer 433e is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 433e is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 433e, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 433e is updated by the processing of S2791, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 433e in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b is End information. is determined (S2792). As a result, if it is End information (S2792: Yes), it means that the pointer 433e has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b is the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table (S2793). If it is a table (S2793: Yes), the pointer is set to 1 (S2794), and the time corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table or restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b The data is set in the clock counter 433g (S2795), and the process proceeds to S2797. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the beginning of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so that the third symbol display device 281 repeats the demonstration effect or the restart effect. can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2793, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b is neither the demonstration display data table nor the restart display data table (S2793: No), the pointer 433e The value is decremented by 1 (S2796), and the process proceeds to S2797. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a variable display data table or a fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b, , End information is always displayed at the previous address, so that the third pattern display device 281 is caused to display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

As a result of the process of S2792, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b, if it is determined that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 433e updated by the process of S2791 is not the End information, S2793 to S2795 , skipping the processing of S2797.

In the process of S2797, it is determined whether or not the fixed command flag is on (S2797). Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is ON (S2797: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main controller 310 via the sound lamp controller 313, so the display data table buffer The value of the pointer 433e is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the End information is stored in the display data buffer set to 433b (S2798), and the value of the clock counter is set to 1. (S2799) and returns to the display setting process. As a result, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content specified at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

Returning to FIG. 55, after the pointer update process, the address indicated by the pointer 433e updated by the pointer update process is retrieved from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data table buffer 433c. The drawing contents are expanded (S2712). In the task processing, based on the rendering content developed in the process of S2712 together with the reserved image and warning image developed earlier, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified, and each sprite , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle. If None data is written in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. Also, when the additional data table buffer 433c is cleared with None data, the None data is always developed from the additional data table buffer 433c.

Next, the value of the clock counter g is decremented by 1 (S2713), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 433g after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2714). Then, if the value of the clock counter 433g is 1 or more (S2714: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 433g is 0 or less (S2714: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is sent from the main controller 310 via the sound lamp controller 314 in accordance with the end of the presentation. ) should be transmitted, in the subsequent processing of S2715, it is checked whether or not the determination command flag is ON (S2715).

As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2715: Yes), it means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main controller 310 via the sound lamp controller 314. The display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b, and the contents of the additional data table buffer 433c and the transfer data table buffer 433d are cleared by writing "None" data (S2716). Next, the time data corresponding to the production time of the finalized display is set in the clock counter 433g (S2717), and the value of the pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2718). Then, the determination command flag is set to OFF (S2719), and after setting the determination display flag indicating that the determination display effect is being performed in the 0 state to ON (S2720), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly stored in the work RAM 433. (S2721), and returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received, the drawing contents can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 . Further, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 281 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b to the fixed display data table. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 431 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 314, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 281.

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2721 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start of is described, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation performance performed one before is described. In the task processing (S2404), from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, from the last stop design determination flag set by S2721, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S2715, if the confirmation command flag is not ON but OFF (S2715: No), the process proceeds to S2721 shown in FIG. 56 to determine whether the confirmation display flag is ON (S2722). ). Then, if the fixed display flag is on (S2722: Yes), the result of determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the fixed display effect has ended, so the fixed display flag is set to off. After that (S2723), the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 433b (S2724), and then the time data corresponding to the performance time of the data display is set in the timer counter 433g (S2725). Then, the pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2726), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2727), and the V interrupt processing ends.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received before the fixed display effect ends, The drawing contents can be set so that the third pattern display device 281 displays the demonstration effect.

It should be noted that the branch condition of S2722: Yes is satisfied when the confirmation display effect is being performed. Cleared. Therefore, in the process of S2724, clearing of those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 431 can be reduced.

In the process of S2722, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S2722: No), then it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S2728). Then, if the demonstration display flag is on (S2728: Yes), the result of determination in the processing of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended. Return to interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 281 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

On the other hand, in the process of S2728, if the demonstration display flag is not ON but OFF (S2728: No), the determination result in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the variable effect has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the variable performance, the variable display data table corresponding to the variable performance is set in the display data table buffer 433b in order to start the restart performance. At the same time, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S2729), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after addition reaches a predetermined value (S2730).

Then, if the restart timer counter does not reach the predetermined value (S2730: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. If the restart timer counter is at a predetermined value (S2730: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b, and None data is set in the additional data table buffer 433c and transfer data table buffer 433d. are written to clear their contents (S2731). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the clock counter 433g (S2732), the value of the pointer 433e is initialized to 0 (S2732), and the process returns to V interrupt processing.

As a result, in the display control device, even if a predetermined time has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect, the confirmation command ( When the confirmation command for display) is not received, the drawing contents can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 281. - 特許庁Then, as described above, the restart effect is a effect of causing the third symbol display device 281 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated. When the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the variation of is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stop symbol is not determined at that time.

After the last drawing content specified by the restart display data table is developed, the drawing content is developed again from the beginning of the restart display data table by the above-described pointer updating process. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 281 until the confirmation command for display is received from the sound lamp control device 313 or a new variation pattern command for display is received.

Note that the simple display setting process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 433a is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 49B) is similar to the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the presentation time of the variation presentation by the power-on variation image has ended, if a confirmation command (a confirmation command for display) is received from the main controller 310 via the sound lamp controller 313, For a predetermined time, one image (either of FIGS. 29(b) and 29(c)) of the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is stopped and displayed. A process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 433i is performed. Further, when the confirmation command (the confirmation command for display) which should be received from the main control device 310 via the sound lamp control device 313 is not accepted after the presentation time of the variation presentation by the power-on fluctuation image has ended. 2, a process of setting a display data table specifying that the variation rendering of the variation image at power-on is restarted as it is in the display data table buffer 433b is performed.

In addition, in the comparison process, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the stop type indicated by the display stop type are compared, and if they do not match, the stop pattern is an outlier pattern (Fig. 29 ( c) set ).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the details of the transfer setting process (S2405), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314, will be described. First, FIG. 60(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 433a is ON (S3001). If the simple image display flag 433a is ON (S3001: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has not been transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3002), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 437 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 433a is not turned on as a result of the processing of S3001, that is, if it is turned off (S3001: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 435 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S2603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 434 is performed to the normal video RAM 436 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S3002), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S2405) executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314, will be described with reference to FIG. 60(b). FIG. 60B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3002).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 437 (S3101). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 437 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S3102). In the processing of S3102, after instructing the image controller 437 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 437, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S3102 that the transfer process has not ended (S3102: No), the resident image transfer setting process ends because the image controller continues the image transfer process. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3102: Yes), the process proceeds to S3103. Also, as a result of the process of S3101, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 437 (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3103.

In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 have been transferred (S3103). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 437 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 (S3104), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 437 in the drawing process, and the image controller 437 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 437 to the resident video RAM 436 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 434 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 435), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 435 for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 437 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 434, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 431 .

As a result of the process of S3103, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S3103: Yes), the simple image display flag 433a is set to off (S3105), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S2408 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 50 to 54) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 55 to 59) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and third symbol display device 281 has A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 434 is performed to the normal video RAM 436 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) (see S3001: No in FIG. 60(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 431 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 435, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 . Then, the MPU 431 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 435 to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to 435 by the resident video RAM 435 is resident in the resident video RAM 435 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the display controller 314 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 435 and controls the image controller. At 437, image drawing processing can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 composed of the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 282 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 435 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 310, sound lamp controller 313, and display controller 314. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 434a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 281 displays some kind of image.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3003), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3003).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 433d, the pointer 433e updated by the pointer update process (S2711) of the previously executed display setting process (S2403) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S3201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3202). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 433 ( S3203), furthermore, a transfer start flag indicating that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state is set to ON (S3204), and the process proceeds to S3205.

Also, in the process of S3202, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but is None data (S3202: No), the processes of S3203 and S3204 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3205. In the process of S3205, it is determined whether or not an image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 437 after the previous transfer process is completed (S3205). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 437 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S3206).

In the process of S3206, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 437, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 437, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S3206 that the transfer process has not ended (S3206: No), the image controller 437 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3206: Yes), the process proceeds to S3207. Also, as a result of the process of S3205, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 437 after the previous transfer process is completed (S3205: No), the process proceeds to S3207.

In the processing of S3207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3207). is turned off (S3208), the image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3203 is set as the transfer target image, and then the processing proceeds to S3216. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S3207: No), then it is determined whether or not the new continuous notice command flag is ON (S3209).

If the new continuous announcement command flag is ON (S3209: Yes), it means that the continuous announcement command has been processed and the continuous announcement additional data table for the continuous announcement effect has been set in the additional data table buffer 733c. Therefore, after the new continuation notice command flag is set to OFF (S3210), the image data of the continuation notice image corresponding to the continuation notice discrimination flag in the ON state among the continuation notice discrimination flags provided for each continuation notice image type is set to OFF (S3210). are stored in the character ROM 434 (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436) are specified (S3211). After the image data indicated by the information is set as the image to be transferred, the process proceeds to S3216.

In the processing of S3209, if the new continuation notice command flag is not ON but OFF (S3209: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is ON (S3212). If the back image change flag is on (S3212: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Among the discrimination flags, the first address (storage source first address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 434 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer The top address of the destination (normal video RAM 436) is specified (S3214), the image data indicated by the specified various information is set as the image to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to S3216.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 436 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S3214, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

In the process of S3216, it is determined whether or not the image to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 436 (S3216). The determination in the process of S3216 is performed by referring to the stored image determination flag 433h. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image discrimination flag 433h, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 436. If it is determined that the image data is stored and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 436. FIG.

As a result of the process of S3216, if the image to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 436 (S3216: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. The normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 314 and the traffic on the bus line 440 can be reduced. can.

On the other hand, if the image to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 436 as a result of the process of S3216 (S3216: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image to be transferred is set (S3217). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 437 in the drawing process, and the image controller 437 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Also, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 437 to the normal video RAM 436 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 434 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 436), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 437 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 434, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 431 .

After the process of S3217, the stored image determination flag 433h is updated (S3218), and this normal transfer setting process ends. Updating the storage image determination flag 433h is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image to be transferred to "on", as described above, and storing the image in the same subarea of the image storage area 436a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process for the continuous announcement command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and the continuous announcement image corresponding to the continuous announcement command is executed. When the additional data table is set in the additional data table 433c, the image data of the continuous preview images used in the additional data table can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 435 . Image data not stored in the image area 435c can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the audio ramp control device 313, the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b. Since the corresponding transfer data table is set in the transfer data table 344d, the sprite image data used in the display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 at desired timing.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 436a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435 required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 436a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 434 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 436 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 281. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be finely controlled while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, details of the drawing process (S2406), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 431 of the display control device 314, will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S2404) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 35 is generated (S3301). That is, in the processing of S3301, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined by the task processing, for each sprite, the type and address of the storage RAM where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Parameters required for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process, at the end of the drawing list, as transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address of the character ROM 434 where the transfer target image data is stored. (storage source final address) and transfer destination (normal video RAM 436) top address are added.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 435 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 433i are transmitted to the image controller (S3302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 433i is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 433i includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 436b as the drawing target buffer information. contains information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 436c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 434 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 436), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 434 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 437a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 437a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination top address of the normal video RAM 436, when the normal video RAM 436 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 436 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 431 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 437 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 281. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 281 . In addition, while developing an image drawn in one frame buffer, an image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 281, and drawing processing and display processing can be processed simultaneously and in parallel. can be done.

In the drawing process, after the process of S3302, the drawing target buffer flag 433i is updated (S3303). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 433i is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 436b and the second frame buffer 436c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 431 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 437 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is done each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 49) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 436c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 436b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 436b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 436c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 436b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 436c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 436b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 281, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 436c. . After that, a frame buffer for expanding one frame of image and a frame buffer for reading out one frame of image information are transferred to either the first frame buffer 436b or the second frame buffer 436c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 200 of the second embodiment, the display control device 314 uses the A display data table is selected, read from the data table storage area 432a, stored in the display data table buffer 433b, and a pointer 433e is initialized to zero. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 433e is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 433b, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 35), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 437, thereby instructing drawing of the image. As a result, as the pointer 433e is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 281.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 200, the display control device 314 does not change the program to be executed by the MPU 431 in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 313. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433b.

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 431 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 314 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 433b. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 314, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281. - 特許庁

Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This is because the pachinko machine 200 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents must be changed moment by moment based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each effect like this. In this manner, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. can be realized only when the pachinko machine 200 is configured to determine the effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 281 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 200, the display control device 314 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 313, etc., to display an effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 (for example, When another effect image (for example, a continuous notice effect image) is displayed in addition to the effect image (variable effect image), an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be additionally displayed is stored in the additional data table buffer 433c. By setting, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. As a result, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, display data defined by adding other effect images for each of the original effect images If a table is prepared separately, 32 x 5 = 160 kinds of display data tables must be prepared, but like this pachinko machine 200, a data table corresponding to other effect images is separately defined as an additional data table. Therefore, 32+5=37 types of displays and additional data tables need to be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 432a can be suppressed. Therefore, data tables corresponding to various types of effects can be stored in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 432a, and further diversification of the effect images can be easily achieved.

Further, as in the pachinko machine 200, by defining other effect images to be additionally displayed as the additional data table, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 433b, Even when it is decided to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, the additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b. By simply setting in the data table buffer 433c, the additional effect image to be displayed can be easily displayed in addition to the original effect image.

Since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 433c From the table, while updating the pointer 433e at each time, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and to easily obtain one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. can be generated to Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the sound lamp control device 313 or the like in addition to the effects performed based on the command from the main control device 310, the effects to be additionally displayed By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of presentation displays from a small number of data tables.

Further, in the pachinko machine 200, all the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 435 in the initialization process immediately after the power is turned on. An image drawing process can be performed by the image controller 437 while using the obtained image data. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 435, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 434 composed of the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device. In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 310, the sound lamp controller 313, the display controller 314, etc. are stored in the resident video. Since it is resident in the RAM 435, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness from various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing to displaying some image on the third symbol display device 281.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the pachinko machine 200, when a display data table to be used is selected in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) from the sound ramp control device 313, the effect specified in the display data table is used. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 435, and transfer data specifying the transfer timing. A table is set in the transfer data table 433d, and each time the pointer 433e is updated, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time specified by the address indicated by the pointer 433e is obtained. , and transmits the transfer data information to the image controller 437 by a transfer instruction or a drawing list.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 431, the image controller 437 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 434 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 436a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 436a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the image storage area 436a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 435 required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 436a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 434 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 436 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 281. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 436 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 434 is configured by the NAND flash memory 434a having a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 281 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 200 uses the NAND flash memory 434a for the character ROM 434, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 due to its slow read speed. Although it takes a long time to be transferred to the resident video RAM 435, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is first transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435, and then the power-on main image is transferred to the resident video RAM 435. is displayed on the third symbol display device 281, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 435, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The main image can be checked when the power is turned on.

Therefore, the display control device 310 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 281 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 281 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 . Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the pachinko machine 200 can be confirmed that the pachinko machine 200 has started operating without any problem by turning on the power by displaying the main image on the third display device 218 immediately when the power is turned on. You can check it immediately. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 434. FIG.

The "drawing content" described in the above embodiments corresponds to the "drawing information" described in the claims, and the "sprite type", "back surface type", and "symbol type offset" described in the above embodiments. ” corresponds to the “specific information” described in the claims, and the “drawing list” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “instruction information” described in the claims, and is described in the above embodiment. corresponds to the "image indication information" described in the claims, and the "transfer data information" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the Corresponds to "transfer instruction information" described in the range. Further, the "variation effect", "demonstration effect", "fixed display effect", and "restart effect" described in the above embodiment correspond to the "display type" described in the claims, and in the above embodiment The "variable effect" described corresponds to the "dynamic display effect" described in the claims, and the "continuous advance notice effect" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "second display type" described in the claims. ", the "display data table" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "first prescribed information" described in the claims, and the "additional data table" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the claims The "second stipulated information" described in the scope corresponds to the "transfer data table" described in the above embodiment, and the "third stipulated information" described in the claims. In addition, the "third pattern" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" described in the claims, and the "15R probability variable jackpot", "2R probability variable jackpot", and "time saving The "jackpot" corresponds to the "predetermined game value" described in the claims. Further, the "determined command" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "first command" described in the claims, and the "fluctuation pattern command" described in the above embodiments corresponds to the claims. , and the "stop type command" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "third command" described in the claims.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

For example, in the above-described first embodiment, the MPU 181 directly accesses the character ROM 187, reads image data from the character ROM 187, and transfers it to the resident video RAM 189 or normal video RAM 190. However, this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, the MPU 181 transmits an image data transfer command to the image controller 187, and the image controller 181 receives the transfer command and transfers the image data from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 or normal video RAM 190. you can go In this case, the address of the character ROM 187 where the image data to be transferred is stored, the video RAM of the transfer destination (either the resident video RAM 189 or the normal video RAM 190), and the image data are stored in the video RAM of the transfer destination. is specified in the transfer command transmitted by the MPU 181, and the image controller 188 reads the image data stored in the address position of the character ROM 187 specified by this transfer command, and transfers the data to the specified transfer destination. The read image data may be stored in the designated address area of the video RAM. In this case, the image controller 188 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 187 in the buffer RAM 188a. may be stored in the transfer destination video RAM.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the MPU 431 transmits the transfer data information of the image data to the image controller 437 including the transfer data information in the drawing list. Although the case of transferring the image data to the RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 431 may directly access the character ROM 434 , read image data from the character ROM 434 , and transfer it to the resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436 . In this case, the MPU 431 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 434 in the buffer ROM 437a, and then the MPU 431 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436 of the transfer destination is unused. If unused, the image data may be transferred from the buffer ROM 437a to the resident video RAM 435 or normal video RAM 436 as the transfer destination.

In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436 of the transfer destination is unused is determined by the image controller 437 accessing the resident video RAM 435 (that is, being in use). and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 437 is accessing the normal video RAM 436 (that is, that it is in use). ) may be provided in the image controller 437, and the MPU 431 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

Alternatively, the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 437 and the resident video RAM 435 or the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 437 and the normal video RAM 436 are monitored by the MPU 431, and the resident It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 437 starts accessing the resident video RAM 435 or the normal video RAM 436, or terminates the access, the image controller 437 notifies the MPU 431 of the information as needed so that the MPU 431 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 435 and the normal video RAM 436 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 437 scans the third pattern display device 281, the MPU 431 checks the driving state of the image controller 437 or checks whether the scanning is during the blank period (see FIG. 11) or not. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 435, 436 and 536 is unused. As a result, only the scanning state of the third pattern display device 281 of the image controller 437 is checked to determine whether or not it is unused, so that determination can be easily made.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPUs 181 and 431 do not use the addresses of the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 to manage the respective video RAMs, but manage the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and In the address system commonly used by the normal video RAMs 190 and 436, each video RAM may be assigned a different address area to manage each video RAM. In this manner, the MPU 181, 431 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 189, 435 or normal video RAM 190, 436) to be accessed from the MPU 181, 431 to the image controller 188, 437. The image controller 188, 437 can determine whether the area specified by the address is for the resident video RAM 189, 435 or for the normal video RAM 190, 436 simply by specifying it. That is, when the MPU 181, 431 designates the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controllers 188, 437, the address set in the common address system is simply designated. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction that performs the specification. For example, in the second embodiment, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 431 to the image controller 437, information indicating the storage location of sprite data is simply set within a common address system without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination using the given address, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiments, the character ROMs 187, 434 are directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) connecting the MPUs 181, 431 and the image controller. A ROM 187,434 may be provided in direct connection with the image controller 188,437. A bridge circuit is provided to convert the input/output specifications of the character ROMs 187 and 434 into the input/output specifications of the mask ROM. may be provided by connecting to By providing this bridge circuit, existing image controllers 188, 437 designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as a character ROM or an internal bus (bus line 440) can be used as they are, and a NAND type flash memory can be used. Character ROMs 187, 434 constituted by 187a, 434a can be connected. Even when the character ROMs 187, 434 are connected via the image controllers 188, 437 or a bridge circuit, the MPUs 181, 431 may directly access the character ROMs 187, 434.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROMs 187 and 434 are configured by the NAND flash memories 187a and 434a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , a hard disk, or the like. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed. can be displayed without

In each of the above-described embodiments, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are connected to the image controllers 188 and 437 and provided. , 437 may be directly connected to an internal bus (bus line 440). When the character ROMs 187, 434 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188, 437 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAMs 189, 435 may be connected to the bridge circuit. . If the resident video RAMs 189, 435 are connected to the bridge circuit, the existing image controllers 188, 437 or the internal bus (bus line 440) are not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAMs 189, 435. However, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 can be easily provided in the display controllers 81 and 314. FIG.

In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 81, 314 is provided with one resident video RAM 189, 435 and one normal video RAM 190, 436, but the number of video RAMs is limited to this. However, more video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In each of the above embodiments, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 and the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 are composed of 1-port type (one input/output port) DRAMs, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a multiport RAM may be used.

In each of the above embodiments, the resident video RAMs 189, 435 and the normal video RAMs 190, 436 are configured by different memories, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. and normal areas, and the same contents as those of the resident video RAMs 189, 435 and the normal video RAMs 190, 436 may be stored in the respective areas. In addition, when a resident area and a normal area are configured in one RAM, the input/output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by either the resident area or the normal area during read or write processing. , it is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The types of image data stored in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 in each of the above embodiments are examples, and the types are appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the third pattern display device 281. It may be In this case, an image corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the third pattern display device 281 in response to a command received from the main control device 101 or the sound lamp control device 313 or other input from the outside. Preferably, data resides at least in resident video RAM 189,435.

In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which part of the image data stored in the character ROMs 187, 434 is transferred to the resident video RAMs 189, 435 and made resident. may be transferred to the resident video RAM 189,435. In this case, since the resident video RAMs 189, 435 do not contain the image data stored in the non-resident character ROMs 187, 434, the normal video RAMs 190, 436 store the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controllers 188, 437. It may be used as a dedicated memory for storage.

In the above embodiments, the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 retain their contents without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Image data to be resident in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 on a predetermined occasion, such as when the image to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the third pattern display device 281 is greatly changed based on the command received from the control device 313. may be overwritten and updated. In this case, while the image displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the third pattern display device 281 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 when power is turned on, and is held in the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. You can let it continue. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 181, 431 directly accesses the character ROM 187, 434 to read the image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is transferred via the buffer RAM 188a, 437a. , while the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 181, 431 transmits to the image controller 188, 437 a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident, and the image controller 188, 437 , according to the transfer command (transfer data information), the image data to be resident is read from the character ROMs 187, 434, and transferred via the buffer RAMs 188a, 437a to the unused video RAMs 189, 435 (that is, the image corresponding to the transition image). during a period in which data is not read).

When the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 are updated, image data corresponding to transition images are transferred from the character ROMs 187 and 434 to the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 in advance, and the images stored in the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 are updated. The transition image may be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the third pattern display device 281 using the data. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPUs 181 and 431 directly access the character ROMs 187 and 434 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read image data via the buffer RAM 188a. You may make it Alternatively, the image controllers 188, 437, which have received instructions to transfer the image data to be resident from the MPUs 181, 431, access the character ROMs 187, 434, read the image data to be newly resident, and store the read image data in the buffer. You may make it transfer via RAM188a. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 189 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 189 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a are provided inside the image controllers 188 and 437 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 440). If the character ROMs 187, 434 are connected to the internal bus (bus line 440) or the image controllers 188, 437 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided within the bridge circuit. Furthermore, a resident video RAM 189, 435 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit with the buffer RAM. In this case, the image data can be transferred from the character ROMs 187, 434 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAMs 189, 435 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the bus line 440).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the storage capacity of the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a is set to one block of the NAND flash memories 187a and 434a. may For example, of the scanning period of the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third pattern display device 281, the period during which the blank area, which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed, is scanned (blank period ), the storage capacity of the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a may be a data capacity sufficient to complete transfer of image data from the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 or the normal video RAMs 190 and 436. As a result, transfer of image data from the buffer RAMs 188a and 437a to the resident video RAMs 189 and 435 or the normal video RAMs 190 and 436 occurs during the unused period of each of the video RAMs 189, 190, 435, 436 and 536 which occurs during this blank period. This can be done reliably by using

In each of the above embodiments, the case where one buffer RAM 188a, 437a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 187, 434 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image stored in the resident video RAM 189, 435 or the normal video RAM 190, 436 from another buffer RAM It may be configured to transfer data. Also, one buffer RAM is divided into two or more areas, and image data is stored while image data read from the character ROMs 187 and 434 is stored in one area. The image data may be transferred from another area to the resident video RAM 189, 435 or the normal video RAM 190, 436. FIG. In either case, the image data read from the character ROM 187, 434 is written to the buffer RAM, and the image data written in the buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 189, 435 or normal video RAM 190, 436. can be processed in parallel, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the first embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189 after the power is turned on has been described. Image data corresponding to the image may be transferred from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 190 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 190 is used to display the power-on main image on the auxiliary display unit 65 while the character ROM 187 is resident in the resident video RAM 189 . image data can be transferred. Since the image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 189 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 189. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the second embodiment, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 435 from the character ROM 434 after the power is turned on. Although the case of transferring to the image area 435b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image may be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 after the power is turned on. As a result, by using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 436, the third symbol display device 281 displays the power-on image while the character ROM 434 Image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 can be transferred. Since no image data is read out from the resident video RAM 435 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 435. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

In the first embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the power-on main image area 189a of the resident video RAM 189 via the buffer RAM 188a has been described. While the image data corresponding to the main image is being transferred, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image is stored resident from the character ROM 187 without going through the buffer RAM 188a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 189a of the video RAM 189 when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 190, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 190 is used for auxiliary display. By causing the unit 65 to display the main image when the power is turned on, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 189 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 187 to the resident video RAM 189. If so, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character RAM 187 to the resident video RAM 189 without passing through the buffer RAM 188a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 188a.

Similarly, in the second embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a and the power-on main image area 435a of the resident video RAM 435 via the buffer RAM 437a. Although the case of transferring to the time-varying image area 435b has been described, image data is not read from the resident video RAM 434 while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on changing image is being transferred. , the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are directly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a and power-on varying image area 435b of the resident video RAM 435 without going through the buffer RAM 437a. You may Further, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 436 are stored in the normal video RAM 436 . By causing the third pattern display device 281 to display an image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 435 is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. If the image data is not read out from the character ROM 434, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 without passing through the buffer RAM 437a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 437a.

In the first embodiment, the display control device 81 changes the rear image displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 101. In addition, Alternatively, apart from this, the slot machine 10 is provided with an operation button that allows the player to change the rear image of the auxiliary display section 65, and the rear image is changed when the player operates the operation button. You may Specifically, when the operation button is operated by the player, an output signal output from the operation button is input to the input/output port 186 of the display control device 81, and the MPU 181 responds to the input from the operation button. When it is confirmed that the operation button has been operated by the player, it decides to change the rear image, and the image data corresponding to the rear image to be displayed after the change stored in the rear image area 189b of the resident video RAM 189 is displayed. may be used to instruct the image controller 188 to draw an image. As a result, after the operation button is operated by the player, the image data stored in the rear image area 189b of the resident video RAM 189 is used to immediately display the rear image after the change on the auxiliary display section 65.例文帳に追加be able to. Therefore, even if the character ROM 187 is configured using the NAND flash memory 187a with a read speed, the rear image after the change is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in response to the player's operation immediately. be able to.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the frame button 222 is operated by the player, the back image change command and the frame button operation command are generated by the sound lamp control device 313, and the back image change command is generated by the display control device 314. Based on the command and the frame button operation command, the case of changing the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 281 and the effect mode of super ready-to-win has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 313 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 200 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 310, and according to the game state, for example, according to the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 314 can change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 314 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 200, and change the rear image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state. Then, if image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the back image after the change or the back image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. , the rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 435c.

Further, the display control device 314 may not only change the back image based on the back image change command, but may also change the back image according to the display data table and the transfer data time table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed back image may be transferred in advance from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, a new rear image is stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 in which the rear images A to C are stored. may be stored in the transfer data table, or a new sub-area different from the sub-area of the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 in which the back images A to C are stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined such that the rear image is stored. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image. An increase in load can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the output signals of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are input to the main controller 101, and when the main controller 101 detects a sensor error, an error command is issued. to the display control device 81 so that the display control device 81 immediately displays an error message on the auxiliary display unit 65 using the image data resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM 189. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. The output signals of the first inserted medal detection sensor 45a and the second inserted medal detection sensor 45b are input to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 detects a sensor error. When a sensor error is detected in the display control device 81, an error message is immediately sent to the auxiliary display unit 65 using the image data resident in the error message image area 189e of the resident video RAM 189. may be displayed. This eliminates the need to send and receive an error command from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81, so that the error message can be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 more quickly.

In the second embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 is input to the audio lamp control device 313, and when the audio lamp control device 313 detects a vibration error, an error command is sent to the display control device 314. Thus, the case where the display control device 314 immediately displays the warning image on the third pattern display device 281 has been described. may be input, the main controller 310 detects a vibration error, and an error command notifying the error may be sent from the main controller 310 to either the sound lamp controller 313 or the display controller 314. . When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 313, the audio lamp control device 313 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the error to the display control device 314. may

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor 428 may be input to the display control device 314 so that the display control device 314 detects the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 55). A warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 57(b)) when is determined. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 313 to the display control device 314, the warning image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 281 more quickly.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor 428 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213 has been described. It may be attached to the back side. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of balls from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. , and the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any one of the main controller 310 , the sound lamp controller 313 and the display controller 314 . When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 310, when the main controller 310 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is corrected. A signaling error command may be sent from the main controller 310 via the audio lamp controller 313 or directly to the display controller 314 . Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound ramp control device 313, when the sound ramp control device 313 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command may be sent from the audio lamp controller 313 to the display controller 314 to communicate the error. In the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 435 of the display control device 313, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third pattern display device 218 is resident. , and upon receiving an error command conveying a magnetic field error from the main controller 310 or the audio lamp controller 313, the display controller 313 may display the warning image on the third symbol display 218. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 310, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 by the display control device 314 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 313 , the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 218 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 314 receives an error command from the main control device 310 or the sound lamp control device 313, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 434 Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 434a, the error message image resident in the error message image area 435f of the resident video RAM 425 is used to display the error message image informing the magnetic field error without delay as the third pattern. It can be displayed on the display device 281 . Therefore, when the player applies a magnetic field to the game board, the error message image is displayed by the third symbol display device 281 to notify the player of the magnetic field error immediately. can be deterred.

In the first embodiment, the case where the display control device 81 drives the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be configured to be driven by an audio lamp control device provided separately from the driving display control device 81 . In this case, the command sent from the main controller 101 is received by the audio lamp controller, and the display controller 81, based on the command sent from the audio lamp controller based on the command from the main controller 101, The auxiliary display section 64 may be controlled. Also, the command transmitted from the main controller 101 may be received by the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 may transmit the command to the sound lamp control device according to the received command. By separately providing the display control device 81 that drives the auxiliary display section 65 and the audio lamp control device that drives the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64, the display control device 81 can concentrate on driving control of the auxiliary display section 65. , the auxiliary display unit 65 can display more colorful and complicated images, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In the above-described first embodiment, a configuration was described in which only one type of BB prize is provided as a prize mode in which a privilege to shift to a bonus state when a prize is established is provided, but a plurality of types of state transition winning combinations are provided. may be configured. Further, the total number of medals to be paid out in the bonus state may be set to a different value according to the state transition winning combination in which the winning is established. That is, in the processing of S604 of the bonus state processing (see FIG. 17), the value set in the remaining payout number counter may be changed according to the state transition winning combination in which the winning is established. In addition, in the processing of S606 of the bonus state processing (see FIG. 17), when the state command indicating that it is a BB game is set, the type of state transition winning combination in which a prize is established is also set. may As a result, in the display control device 81, the effects performed by the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, and the upper lamp 63 can be changed according to the state transition winning combination in which the winning has been established.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the total number of medals paid out in the bonus state that transitions to when a BB win is established is set to 250 has been described (the setting of the remaining number of payouts counter in S604 of FIG. 17). ), it is not necessarily limited to this, and the value set as the total number of medals to be paid out (remaining number of medals to be paid out) may be any number within the range stipulated by law or the like.

In the above-described first embodiment, in the JAC game played when the game state is in the bonus state, the probability of winning the watermelon prize and the bell prize, which are minor prizes, is set higher than in the normal game state. However, the winning probability of either the watermelon winning prize or the bell winning prize may be set higher than in the normal game state. Further, each winning probability in the bonus state may be determined so that the degree of increase in the winning probability of the watermelon winning prize, which pays out more medals, is greater than that of the bell winning prize. As a result, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game can be increased, so that the player can receive a large number of medals to be paid out with a small number of medals. In addition, since the medals corresponding to the total number of medals to be paid out can be paid out in a short time, the operating rate of the slot machine 10 can be increased on the hall side as well. In addition, a bonus-only winning mode that is established only when the game state is in the bonus state is provided, the number of medals to be paid out is set to be large, and the winning probability of the bonus-only winning mode is set higher than other winning modes in the bonus state. may be configured to be Further, the establishment of winning in this bonus-dedicated winning mode may be performed only in the case of three bets. As a result, even when the bonus game can be played with a one-coin or two-coin bet, the player can play the bonus game with a three-coin bet.

In the above-described first embodiment, only when the game is played with one or two medals inserted, that is, when the game is played with one medal or two medals, the cherry bell prize, which is a special small prize, is won. Although the case where the lottery table is set so that is established has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. Also in this case, the lottery table may be set so that a cherry bell win is established. When a game is played with a 3-coin stake and a cherry bell win is established, the number of medals to be paid out may be 3, or may be another number. Also, the probability of winning a cherry bell prize when playing a game with three bets may be set by a lottery table so as to be lower than other BB prizes, watermelon prizes, bell prizes, and replay prizes. As a result, it becomes difficult for the cherry bell winning to be established when three are bet, so that the player can easily recognize that it is a special small combination winning.

Similarly, in the above-described first embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the 7-bell prize, which is a special small prize, is established only when the game is played with one bet. The lottery table is not limited to this, and the lottery table may be set so that the 7-bell win is established even when the game is played with two or three bets. When a 7-bell win is established by playing a game with 2 or 3 bets, the number of medals to be paid out may be 2 or any other number. In addition, when a 7-bell win is established in the case of bet 2, it is more preferable to set the number of medals to be paid out to 3. This is because the player can play one more game using the three medals, so that the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. . Also, the winning probability of winning 7 bells when playing a game with 3 bets may be set by a lottery table so as to be lower than other BB winnings, watermelon winnings, bell winnings, and replay winnings. As a result, it becomes difficult for the 7-bell winning to be established when three are bet, so that the player can easily recognize that it is a special small combination winning. On the other hand, the probability of winning a 7 bell prize when playing a game with 2 medals is set so that the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game is less than 2, combined with other prizes including a cherry bell prize. Preferably, it is set by a lottery table.

In the above-described first embodiment, when a game is played with a one-coin or two-coin scheme, if a watermelon win or a bell win, which are normal small wins, is established, three medals are paid out as the number of medals to be paid out. has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be configured to set other number of medals to be paid out. In this case, a different number of medals to be paid out may be set for the watermelon winning and the bell winning. Further, the number of medals to be paid out for winning a watermelon prize or winning a bell prize in the one-to-one or two-to-two prize may be set to be larger than the maximum number of bets (3 in the first embodiment). As a result, the player can play the game while expecting the establishment of a watermelon prize or a bell prize that pays out a lot of medals when playing the game with one or two bets. Further, the number of medals to be paid out for winning a watermelon prize or winning a bell prize in the case of a single bet or a double bet may be set to a multiple of the maximum number of bets (3 in the first embodiment). As a result, if a watermelon prize or a bell prize is established, a lot of medals can be expected to be paid out by establishing a BB prize. can be consumed, the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Also, the number of medals to be paid out for a watermelon prize or a bell prize in the case of one-to-one or two-to-two bets may be set to 12 or 6, as in the case of the three-toe bet. This eliminates the need to change the number of medals to be paid out according to the number of bets, thereby suppressing an increase in the processing load. Further, the number of medals to be paid out for winning a watermelon prize may be set to be different between the case of one-price and the case of two-price. The number of medals to be paid out for winning a bell may be set to a different number depending on the case. In addition, the number of medals to be paid out for at least one of the watermelon winning prize and the bell winning prize may be set to two. As a result, the player can enjoy one more game by inserting the two medals and expecting the achievement of a Cherry Bell prize, which will result in the payout of three more medals. It should be noted that the winning probability of each prize mode is set by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted is less than 100%. desirable. Moreover, the ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

In the above-described first embodiment, the game is played with one or two bets, and three medals are paid out when a cherry bell win is established, but this is not necessarily the case. In this case, the number of medals to be paid out may be a multiple (eg, 6, 9, etc.) of the maximum number of bets (3 in the first embodiment). . As a result, if a cherry bell win is established, the player can consume medals simply by playing a game (three-bet game) in which the maximum number of bets that can be expected with a high probability of winning a BB prize can be played. You can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. On the other hand, the number of medals to be paid out may be set to 2 when a cherry bell win is established at the time of betting one. As a result, the player can enjoy one more game by inserting the two medals and expecting the achievement of a Cherry Bell prize in which three more medals are paid out, without leaving any extra medals. You can enjoy the game until the end. Also in these cases, it is desirable to set the winning probability of each prize mode by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted is less than 100%. Moreover, the ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

In the above-described first embodiment, the game is played with one medal and two medals are paid out when a 7-bell win is established. However, this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the number of medals to be paid out in this case may be set to a multiple (eg, 3, 6, 9, etc.) of the maximum number of bets (3 in the first embodiment). As a result, if a 7-bell win is established, medals will be consumed simply by playing a game with the maximum number of bets (a game with 3 bets) that can be expected to pay out a large number of medals if a BB win is established. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Also in this case, it is desirable to set the winning probability of each prize mode by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted is less than 100%. Moreover, the ratio is more preferably less than 100% and close to 100%.

In the above-described first embodiment, when a game is played with a single bet, a lottery is drawn as to whether or not a cherry bell win or a 7 bell win is possible as a winning combination candidate. Although the explanation has been given of the case in which two medals are paid out when a seven-bell win is established, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two medals are paid out when a cherry-bell win is established. 3 medals are paid out, and when 7 bells are won, 3 medals are paid out. As a result, when a cherry bell win is established, two medals are paid out, so the player throws in the two medals and expects that a cherry bell win will be established in which three further medals are paid out. At the same time, one more game can be enjoyed, and the game can be enjoyed to the end without leaving any extra medals. Also, when a 7-bell win is established, three medals are paid out, so the player can insert the three medals and play another game while expecting a BB win. You can enjoy the game until the end without leaving any extra medals. On the other hand, when the game is played with a single bet, it may be configured such that only the winning of the cherry bell is judged. As a result, when the number of bets is any of 1 to 3, the 7-bell prize is not included as a winning combination, so the index value IV=5 can be omitted from the lottery table, and the lottery storing the lottery table It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the table storage area 105a and reduce the processing load of the lottery process. Further, in this case, if the number of medals to be paid out when a Cherry Bell win is established is set to three, the player inserts the three medals to be paid out when a Cherry Bell win is established, and Furthermore, one more game can be played while expecting the establishment of a BB prize, and the player can enjoy the game to the end without leaving any extra medals. Further, if the number of medals to be paid out when a Cherry Bell win is established is set to two, the player inserts the two medals to be paid out when a Cherry Bell win is established, and the player can pay out three more medals. One more game can be enjoyed while waiting for the establishment of a cherry bell prize in which medals are paid out, and the game can be enjoyed to the end without leaving any extra medals. Also in these cases, it is desirable to set the winning probability of each prize mode by the lottery table so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out in one game to the number of medals inserted is less than 100%. Moreover, it is more preferable that the ratio is less than 100% and close to 100%. For example, if 7 bell prizes are not included as special child prizes in a single bet, and only Cherry Bell prizes are supported, and the number of medals to be paid out for the Cherry Bell prizes is set to 3, the winning probability is about 3. It may be set to 1/6, or if the number of medals to be paid out for the cherry bell win is set to 2, the winning probability may be set to about 1/2.4.

In the first embodiment, one of the BB prize, the watermelon prize, the bell prize, the cherry bell prize, the 7 bell prize, and the replay prize is assigned as the prize mode corresponding to the index value IV in the lottery table. In the lottery described above, the case where one of these winning modes is set as the winning combination has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. are assigned, and winning is confirmed for one index value IV, a plurality of prize modes assigned to the one index value IV may be set as winning combinations at the same time. For example, by assigning a BB win and a bell win to one index value IV, a BB win and a bell win may be set as winning combinations at the same time, or a watermelon win and a replay win may be set to one index value IV. By assigning , a watermelon winning prize and a replay winning prize may be simultaneously set as winning combinations. Here, if a BB winning that is carried over to the next game if no winning is established and another winning mode that is not carried over to the next game (for example, a bell winning) are set as winning combinations at the same time, then the next game will A slide table corresponding to another winning mode (bell winning) that cannot be carried over may be preferentially stored in the slide table storage area 106b. As a result, it is possible to establish the establishment of the winning in the other winning mode, and to establish the establishment of the winning by carrying over the BB winning to the next game. In addition, when a watermelon winning prize and a replay winning prize are simultaneously set as a winning combination, a slide table is prepared so that either the watermelon winning prize or the replay winning prize is stopped on the effective line. It may be stored in the storage area 106b. The slide table can stop a stop symbol corresponding to a watermelon winning that is more advantageous to the player than a replay winning, from reaching symbols reaching a base position when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. In this case, the stop pattern is specified to stop at the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon winning, and if the stop symbol corresponding to the watermelon winning cannot be stopped, the stop is stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the replay winning. It is preferable to use one whose mode is specified. As a result, the watermelon winning which is more advantageous to the player than the replay winning can be established as much as possible, and the replay winning can be established when the watermelon winning cannot be established. In this case, the player can play the game again without inserting medals.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the game is played with one bet, seven bells are won, and two medals are paid out, the gaming state of the slot machine 10 remains the normal gaming state. The game state of the slot machine 10 may be shifted to a special game state when two coins are bet when a game is played with a coin bet and 7 bells are won and two medals are paid out. Then, in the case of shifting to the special game state with two bets, the lottery table may be constructed so as to set the winning probability of the cherry bell winning mode at the time of two bets higher than in the case of the normal game state. good. As a result, when two medals are paid out due to winning seven bells at the time of one bet, the player throws in the two medals and is strong against winning three medals in Cherry Bell. You can enjoy one more game while having a sense of anticipation.

In the above-described first embodiment, the specified number of bets for medals is set to 1 to 3 when in the normal game state, and it corresponds to any of 1, 2, and 3 bets. , the case where the game is configured to start the game has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. The game may be configured to start only in response to As a result, when the player has two medals left in his hand, the player is made to insert the remaining medals one by one while expecting that three medals will be paid out by winning a cherry bell prize. so that at least two games in total can be entertained.

In addition, not only in the normal game state, but also in the bonus state, the prescribed number of bets for medals is set to 1 to 3, and it corresponds to any of 1, 2, or 3 bets. to start the game. Alternatively, even in the bonus state, the prescribed number of medal bets may be set to 1 and 3, and the game may be started corresponding to the 1-coin and 3-coin bets. . When a game with one bet or two bet is played in the bonus state, the lottery table is configured so that the winning probability of the cherry bell winning prize and the 7 bell winning prize is set low or the winning probability is zero. good too. Also, the lottery table may be constructed so that the probability of winning a watermelon prize or winning a bell prize in the one-price and two-price bets is higher than the probability of winning in the normal game state. Further, the number of medals to be paid out for watermelon winning or bell winning in the one-to-one and two-to-two bets may be set to be larger than the number of medals to be paid out (three) in the normal game state. However, the winning probability of each winning mode and the number of medals paid out are adjusted so that the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game in the 1-coin and 2-coin bets in the bonus state is smaller than the expected value in the 3-coin bet. may be configured to be set. As a result, the player can be encouraged to play the bonus game with a 3-coin wager as much as possible. Also, the winning probability and the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each winning mode in the case of playing the one-coin and two-coin games in the bonus state may be set to be the same as in the normal game state. In this case, the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game to the number of bets is less than 100% for both 1- and 2-game bets. decreases. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play a bonus game with a 3-coin wager.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case was described in which the game can be played with one token or two tokens in a normal game state, regardless of the number of tokens remaining in the player's hand. It is not necessarily limited to this, and only when the number of virtual medals stored by the credit function is less than 3, the winning mode and winning probability of the above-described first embodiment are changed by the one-coin and two-coin bets. and the number of medals to be paid out may be used to play the game. For example, in the processing of S205 of the normal processing (see FIG. 13), when determining whether or not the number of bets is the specified number, the value of the credit counter that counts the number of virtual medals is checked, and the value is 3. If this is the case, by setting the prescribed number of bets to 3, the game can be played only with 3 bets, and if the value of the credit counter is less than 3, By setting two coins, the game may be played with the winning mode, winning probability, and number of medals to be paid out according to the above-described first embodiment with one-coin and two-coin betting. Thus, when there are three or more virtual medals, the game can always be played only with three virtual medals, so the medals are quickly consumed, and the operating rate of the slot machine in the hall can be reliably increased. . On the other hand, if there are less than 3 virtual medals, the 1 or 2 medals can be used to win a Cherry Bell prize with 3 medals paid out or a 7 Bells prize with 2 medals paid out. Since the player can be targeted to play the game, the slot machine 10 can motivate the player to use up all the tokens.

In the above-described first embodiment, not only the remaining number of medals in the player's hand, but also the winning mode, the winning probability, and the number of medals to be paid out of the game, which is played by one-to-one and two-to-one games in the normal game state, are fixed. Although the case where it is configured to be is described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the processing of S206 of the normal processing (FIG. 13), when it is determined that there is a start command, the value of the credit counter (that is, the number of virtual medals) immediately before the start command is temporarily held in the RAM 106. , when setting the lottery table for one-piece bet (see S406) or the lottery table for two-bet (see S405) in the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), or payout determination in the reel control process (see FIG. 16) When the processing (see S513) is performed, if the number of virtual medals temporarily stored immediately before the start command is 3 or more, medals are paid out per game with 1 or 2 bets. The winning mode, the winning probability and the number of medals to be paid out are set so that the expected value of the number of medals is smaller than the expected value obtained from the winning mode, the winning probability and the number of medals to be paid out shown in FIGS. may be configured. In this case, the expected value may be reduced by setting the probability of winning a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize to be low when a game is played with one bet or two bets. As a result, when there are three or more virtual tokens, the game can be played with three tokens under extremely advantageous conditions compared to one or two tokens. The player starts playing the game with 3 tokens, and the medals are consumed quickly. Therefore, it is possible to reliably increase the operating rate of the slot machines in the hall. On the other hand, when the number of temporarily stored virtual tokens immediately before the start command is less than 3, the winning modes shown in FIGS. , winning probability and the number of medals to be paid out may be set. As a result, if there are less than 3 virtual medals, the 1 or 2 medals will be used to win a Cherry Bell prize with 3 medals paid out or a 7 Bells prize with 2 medals paid out. The slot machine 10 can motivate the player to use up all the tokens without leaving any excess tokens.

In addition to the above two modifications, or apart from the above two modifications, if the number of virtual medals accumulated and stored by the credit function is two, it is possible to use the above-described FIG. 7 or FIG. The game may not be played with the winning mode, winning probability, and number of medals to be paid out shown in FIG. In this case, it may be configured such that the one-to-one game is not played at all. The winning mode, the winning probability and the number of medals to be paid out may be set so as to be smaller than the expected value obtained from the winning probability and the number of medals to be paid out. In the former case, in the processing of S205 of the normal processing (see FIG. 13), when determining whether or not the number of bets is the prescribed number, the value of the credit counter that counts the number of virtual medals is checked, and the value of the credit counter is checked. is 2, the prescribed number of bets may be set to 2, thereby disabling a one-coin game. In the latter case, when it is determined that there is a start command in the processing of S206 of the normal processing (FIG. 13), the value of the credit counter (that is, the number of virtual medals) immediately before the start command is stored temporarily in the RAM 106. , and in the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), when setting the lottery table (see S406) at the time of placing one, or in the reel control process (see FIG. 16), the payout determination process (see S513) is performed. In this case, when the number of virtual medals temporarily stored immediately before the start command is 2, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game with one bet is shown in FIGS. 7 and 9. The winning mode, the winning probability and the number of medals to be paid out may be set so as to be smaller than the expected value obtained from the shown winning mode, the winning probability and the number of medals to be paid out. As a result, when only two virtual medals remain, the player can be made to play the game with two tokens. Therefore, it is possible to decide whether or not three medals will be paid out in one game.

In the above-described first embodiment, even if the game is played with a 1-coin or 2-coin bet when the BB winning winning flag is carried over, the winning mode and winning of the game performed with the 1-coin and 2-coin bets are performed. Although the case has been described where the probability is the same as when the BB prize winning flag is not carried over, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the lottery table setting process (see FIG. 15), when setting the lottery table for one-bet (see S406) or the lottery table for two-bet (see S405), the winning flag storage area 106a carries over from the previous game. The lottery table may be set so that the probability of losing is high if the BB prize winning flag is set. As a result, if the result of the lottery is lost, only the BB winning prize winning flag carried over is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. In the process, a slide table corresponding to BB wins can be stored. Therefore, the probability of establishing a BB prize can be increased.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the start command includes information about the number of bets and is transmitted from the main controller 101 to the display control device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Information about the number of bets may be transmitted from the main controller 101 to the display controller 81 by command. For example, information about the number of bets may be transmitted by a dedicated command (hereinafter referred to as a "number of bets notification command"), or may be included in a lottery result command and transmitted. When a bet number notification command is prepared, a command received from the main controller 101 is stored in the received command storage area 185a in the main process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, and the command is used for the bet number notification. If it is a command, the bet number notification command process is executed, the bet number notification command process extracts the bet number information included in the bet number notification command, and stores the extracted bet number information in the bet number storage area. 185b. If the lottery result command includes information about the number of bets, the information about the number of bets is extracted from the lottery result command and stored in the lottery result command before the process of S901 in the process of the lottery result command (see FIG. 20). It may be stored in the area 185b. When the information about the number of bets is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 by a command different from the start command and the lottery result command, the timing of transmission of the command is after the transmission of the start command and the lottery result command. preferably prior to the transmission of As a result, in the display control device 81, based on the number of bets placed on the game started by operating the start lever 41 and the result of the lottery performed for the game, the auxiliary effect section (upper lamp 63, The mode of various effects to be performed by the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65) can be determined, and the player can play the game with various expectations by the effects of the auxiliary effect unit.

In the first embodiment, in the lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, when the number of bets is 1 or 2, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is the BB winning mode. In the case of a plurality of winning combinations including the winning combination, the auxiliary effect unit (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65) is configured to preferentially start the BB winning notification effect that notifies that the BB winning mode is the winning combination. ) has been described (see S903 and S904 in FIG. 20), but if the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is two of the BB winning mode and the watermelon winning mode, the BB winning mode and the watermelon The auxiliary effect section may be controlled to start the "BB winning/watermelon winning notification effect" for notifying that two of the winning modes are set as the winning combination. In addition, when the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is two of the BB winning mode and the bell winning mode, it is notified that both the BB winning mode and the bell winning mode are set as winning combinations. BB winning/Bell winning announcement effect" may be controlled to be started by the auxiliary effect section. As a result, when the "BB prize/watermelon prize announcement effect" or the "BB prize/bell prize prize announcement effect" is executed in the auxiliary effect unit, the player can perform the BB prize mode and the watermelon prize mode or the bell prize mode at the same time. It can be grasped that it is set as a winning combination. Therefore, in the game in which the notification effect is performed, the player can be induced to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in order to establish the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode, and the BB winning mode in subsequent games. It is possible to allow the player to continue the game while giving the player a sense of expectation that is established.

In the first embodiment, in the lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command when the number of bets is 1 or 2 is the BB winning mode. In this case, the case where the BB winning notification effect for notifying that the BB winning mode is the winning combination has been explained, but as a candidate for the winning combination when the number of bets is 1 or 2, the special game state When a plurality of types of state transition winning combinations that provide transitional benefits are provided, in the lottery result command processing executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is placed in a predetermined state. If it is determined that the transition winning combination is included, a notification effect for notifying that the predetermined state transition winning combination is a winning combination is displayed in the auxiliary effect section (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display section 65). It may be controlled to be executed. The predetermined state transition winning combination for which the notification effect is performed may be a part of the plurality of types of state transition winning combinations, or may be all the winning combinations.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, in the lottery result command process executed by the MPU 181 of the display control device 81, when the number of bets is 1 or 2, the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is Watermelon Wins. In the case of the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode, the case where the watermelon winning notification effect or the bell winning notification effect to announce that the watermelon winning mode or the bell winning mode is a winning combination has been explained, but the number of bets is 1 or 2. If there is another winning combination that may be missed depending on the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 by the player, the MPU 181 of the display control device 81 is provided as a winning combination candidate. In the lottery result command processing executed by , if it is determined that the winning combination notified by the lottery result command is a winning combination that may be missed, an announcement is made to announce that the winning combination is a winning combination. The effect may be controlled to be executed by the auxiliary effect section (upper lamp 63, speaker 64, auxiliary display section 65). If there are a plurality of winning combinations that may be missed, the notification effect may be executed only when some of the winning combinations become the winning combination. Also, when the player wins, the notification effect may be executed.

The stop symbols for each winning mode in the first embodiment are only examples, and are not limited to the above stop symbols. However, it is desirable that the stop symbols for the cherry bell winning prize and the 7 bell winning prize are set to symbols that do not leave any winnings.

The probability of winning each prize type in the above-described first embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the above-described winning probability. Also, the number of medals to be paid out for winning a watermelon prize or winning a bell prize in the first embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the number of medals to be paid out. However, it is desirable to set the probability of winning a cherry bell prize or a 7 bell prize to be higher than those of the other prize modes in the 1-price bet or the 2-price bet. In addition, the probability of winning and the number of medals to be paid out for each winning mode are set so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of bets is less than 100% and close to 100% in the 1-bet and 2-bet bets. It is desirable to

In the above-described first embodiment, a slot machine having three reels arranged in parallel and five lines as active lines has been described. A slot machine or a slot machine having three active lines may be used. Also, the activated line may be changed according to the number of bets. For example, when the number of bets is 3, the effective line is set to 5 lines, when the number of bets is 2, the effective line is set to 3 lines, and when the number of bets is 1, the effective line is set. may be set to one line. When setting three effective lines, for example, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, and a lower line L3 shown in FIG. An upper right line L5 may be set.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the maximum bet number is three has been described, but the maximum bet number is not necessarily limited to this, and the maximum bet number may be set to an arbitrary value of two or more. For example, the maximum number of bets may be four. In this case, if the game is played with the number of bets less than the maximum number of bets, the winning probability of each winning mode should be set so that the winning mode in which the maximum number of bets (or a multiple thereof) of medals is paid out has a high probability of being won. Just do it. Further, when the maximum number of bets is 4, if the game is played with a single bet, for example, a winning mode in which two medals are paid out is won with a high probability. If the probability is set and the game is played with 2 medals, the winning probability of each winning mode in the 2-coin bet is set so that, for example, a winning mode in which 3 medals are paid out will be won with a high probability. When a game is played with bets, for example, the winning probability of each winning mode in the three-bet mode may be set so that the winning mode in which four medals are paid out has a high probability of being won. In this way, when the number of bets is small, by setting the number of medals to be paid out in the winning mode with a high probability of winning, the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of bets is less than 100%. Even when the winning probability is set, the winning probability of the winning mode can be increased. It is desirable to set the winning probability of each prize mode and the number of medals to be paid out so that the ratio of the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of bets is less than 100% and close to 100%.

In the above-described second embodiment, a description has been given of a case in which drawing contents for adding and displaying a continuous advance notice effect, which is not normally displayed in the variable effect, to the third symbol display device 281 are defined as the additional data table. The additional data table is not limited to this, and the additional data table is various data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 in addition to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 310. The drawing content for drawing the effect of is defined. Further, in the additional data table, drawing contents necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed with respect to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main controller 310 are displayed. or in addition to stipulating such drawing content, the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of part or all of the one presentation, or the drawing content displayed in one presentation The drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image to be displayed may be predetermined.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of part or all of one effect are specified by the additional data table, an image of one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 281 in the additional data table. The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time and the color information specifying the changed color tone of the sprite are associated with an address expressed in units of time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds). It may be specified. Then, in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433c, the MPU 431 stores, at the address indicated by the pointer 433e, the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the color information specifying the changed color tone of the sprite. If defined, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b, the color information of the corresponding sprite type defined at the address indicated by the pointer 433e is replaced with the color information defined by the additional data table. may be used to create a drawing list. As a result, the image controller 437 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect are specified by the additional data table, the additional data table allows the third symbol display device 281 to display the image for one frame. is displayed as one unit (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 431 stores the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 433c. is specified, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 433b, among various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 433e, instead of the sprite to be replaced, new The sprite type to be displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 437 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

In the second embodiment, the case where the transfer data table is prepared corresponding to each display data table has been described. You may prepare. In this transfer data table for addition, the address specified in the additional data table (or the display data table) is associated with the address of the sprite used in the corresponding additional data table and whose transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address. Transfer data information of image data may be described.

Further, in this case, when an additional transfer data table buffer is provided in the work RAM 433 of the display control device 281 and one additional data table is set in the additional data table 433c, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is , the additional transfer data table corresponding to the one additional data table may be set in the additional transfer data table buffer. Then, if transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 433e in the transfer data table for addition set in the transfer data table buffer for addition, the MPU 431 adds the transfer data information to the drawing list. You may do so. As a result, the image controller 437 can transfer the sprite image data used by the additional data table to the normal video RAM 436 according to the drawing list in advance before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow read speed, the effect defined by the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 easily and reliably. Further, by using the transfer data table for addition corresponding to the additional data table, it is possible to transfer necessary image data to the normal video RAM 436 while instructing drawing of an image based on the additional data table. Additional data tables can specify the rendering of many sprites. Therefore, even if the character ROM 434 is composed of the NAND flash memory 434a with a slow read speed, the third symbol display device 281 can display various effects.

In the second embodiment, in the display control device 314, in addition to the display data table that defines the drawing contents of the base effects (for example, variable effects), effects that are additionally displayed (for example, continuous advance notice effects) Although a case has been described in which an additional data table that defines the drawing content of is set and the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 433e is acquired from each data table, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the base effect (For example, when the display of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) to be displayed in addition to the (for example, variable effect) is determined, add to the display data table corresponding to the base effect The drawing content of the additional data table corresponding to the effect to be displayed is added for each address indicating the display time to generate a new display data table, and the drawing content of the image is changed based on the new display data table. It may be acquired. This makes it possible to easily display an effect that is displayed in addition to the base effect. In addition, for each type of base effect, a display data table that defines the drawing contents of only the base effect, and display data that defines the image content of the superimposed effect to be displayed in addition to the base effect. Since it is not necessary to have a table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of data tables. In addition, since the drawing contents can be specified using only the newly created display data table, the process required for specifying the drawing contents can be compared with the case where the drawing contents are specified from both the display data table and the additional data table. load can be lightened.

In addition, when it is decided to hide the effect to be displayed in addition to the base effect, the display data table corresponding to the base effect is used as it is, and the drawing content of the image is acquired. may

In addition, in the display data table, the drawing content of the additionally displayed effect (for example, continuous advance notice effect) is displayed in addition to the drawing content of the base effect (for example, variable effect). If you describe it in a format that clearly states that it is the drawing content of the effect that is displayed in addition to it, it will be displayed in addition to the drawing content of the base effect. The drawing contents of the effect are specified from the display data table, and when the additionally displayed effect is hidden, the drawing content of the additionally displayed effect is discarded and the base effect is generated. may be specified from the display data table. This eliminates the need for an additional data table that defines the drawing contents of the effects that are additionally displayed, so control over the additional data table becomes unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

In the above-described second embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all super reach that can be selected by the player are specified in the display data table, Although the case of specifying only the drawing contents corresponding to the super reach selected by the player has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. A corresponding additional data table may be prepared, and the additional data table corresponding to the super reach selected by the player may be set in the additional data table buffer 433c. Also, the drawing contents corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. As a result, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player. In addition, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the data size of the display data table from increasing.

In the second embodiment, in the display control device 314, a transfer data table that defines transfer data information of image data corresponding to sprites used in the display data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table. Although a case has been described in which a transfer data table corresponding to a predetermined display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 433d at the same time that the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. However, when a predetermined display data table is set in the display data table buffer 433b, the transfer data information defined by the corresponding transfer data table is added to the display data table for each address indicating the display time. Then, a new display data table may be generated, and based on the new display data table, the drawing content of the image and the transfer data information may be obtained at the same time. As a result, the drawing content and the transfer data information can be specified using the display data table. It is possible to lighten the processing load required for identification.

Further, when the above-mentioned transfer data table for addition, which is a transfer data table associated with each additional data table, is prepared, when a predetermined additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 433c, the additional data table On the other hand, the transfer data information specified by the corresponding transfer data table for addition is added for each address indicating the display time to generate a new additional data table, and based on the new additional data table, the image is displayed. , and the transfer data information may be obtained at the same time. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing. The processing load required for the specification can be reduced compared to the case of specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information respectively.

In addition, when the display of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) to be displayed in addition to the base effect (for example, variable effect) is determined, the display data table corresponding to the base effect On the other hand, the drawing contents of the additional data table corresponding to the effect to be additionally displayed are added for each address indicating the display time to generate a new display data table, and based on the new display data table , when acquiring the drawing contents of an image, the transfer data information defined by the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is added to the display data table for each address indicating the display time, and A new display data table may be generated by adding the transfer data information defined by the transfer data table for addition corresponding to the additional data table for each address indicating the display time. As a result, using the display data table, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the base effect, the drawing content of the effect to be added, and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing. Compared to the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified respectively from the table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table for addition, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

Also, transfer data information may be described in advance in the display data table. In this way, the drawing content and the transfer data information can also be specified using the display data table. It is possible to lighten the processing load required for the identification. In addition, in the display data table, the drawing content of the additionally displayed effect (for example, continuous advance notice effect) is displayed in addition to the drawing content of the base effect (for example, variable effect). When writing in a format that clearly states that the rendering content of a performance that is The transfer data information of the image is described in a format that clearly indicates the transfer data information of the effect to be additionally displayed, and when the effect to be additionally displayed is displayed, If the drawing content and transfer data information of the other effect and the drawing content and transfer data information of the additionally displayed effect are specified from the display data table, and the additionally displayed effect is hidden, It is also possible to discard the drawing content of the additionally displayed effect and the transfer data information, and specify only the drawing content of the base effect and the transfer data information from the display data table. As a result, by using the display data table, it is possible to specify the drawing content and transfer data information of the base effect and the drawing content and transfer data information of the effect to be added. , the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition, respectively, the processing load required for the identification can be reduced compared to the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are identified respectively.

In the second embodiment, the display control device 314 prepares a display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. For example, prepare a display data table for each element such as "variable startup", "high-speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command After specifying the elements necessary for the variable performance, the display data table corresponding to the paper required for the specified variable performance is put together into one, and the final regular display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is created. may be generated. In many cases, "fluctuating startup", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach" and the like are displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the data table can be provided efficiently by dividing the variable effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

In the second embodiment, the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table use a common pointer 433e, and the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 433e. , a pointer may be provided for each data table.

In the second embodiment, the image controller 437 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 431 at each display interval of the one-frame image at which drawing processing ends (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment). , the image controller 437 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 431 each time the third pattern display device 281 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third pattern display device 281 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending a , the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the second embodiment described above, the image controller 437 identifies the frame buffer to which the rendered image should be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 431, and the other frame buffer is rendered first. Although the case where the image information is read out and transmitted to the third pattern display device 281 has been described, the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 437 receives the drawing list. The frame buffers may be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third pattern display device 281.例文帳に追加Also, every time the image controller 437 transmits the image information for one frame to the third pattern display device 281, the image information is output to the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed and to the third pattern display device 281. You may make it replace the frame buffer which carries out.

In the second embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 433b, before the finalized display effect ends, the main controller When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demonstration command (demonstration command for display) is received from 310, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 433b. Although the case has been described, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 433b again. Also, in this case, until both the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) and the demonstration command (demonstration command for display) are received from the main controller 310 via the sound lamp controller 313, the fixed display effect is completed. Each time, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 433b. This allows the third symbol display device 281 to continue displaying the fixed display effect until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 310 .

In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the background image and to stop display the third symbols consisting of the main symbols to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the second embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control means 314 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on changing image from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a of the resident video RAM 435 and the image data corresponding to the power-on main image area 435a. After transferring to the power-on variation image area 435b, after the transfer is completed, the main image at power-on is displayed on the third pattern display device 281, and then the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435. Although the case of doing so has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the power is turned on, the display control means 314 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 434 to the power-on main image area 435a of the resident video RAM 435. After the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 281 , the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the resident video RAM 435 . As a result, the main image when the power is turned on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation has started without any problems when the power is turned on.

In this case, the MPU 431 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 435b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 313 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 435b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on this, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 281 to display a simple variable display using the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image stored in the power-on variable image area 435b. It is preferable to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image to the power-on varying image area 435b immediately after the third symbol display device 281 displays the main image at power-on. As a result, it is possible to quickly perform the variable display using the power-on variable image.

In the second embodiment, the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds. Although a case has been described in which the information of the image data to be transferred at that time (transfer data information) is defined, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, as long as the display content is defined for each predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third pattern display device 281 . For example, if the frame rate of the third pattern display device 281 is 30 fps, that is, if the third pattern display device 281 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third pattern display device 281 is 1/30 Since one frame image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents for every 1/30 second interval.

In addition, in the display data table and the additional data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not indicated, but the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. It may define the address of the character ROM 434 . In the display control device 314, in order to read the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 281 from the character ROM 434, the character ROM 434 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored is associated with each sprite type. manages the addresses of Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 434 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite can be associated with each sprite type. and the address of the character ROM 434, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In the second embodiment, the work RAM 433 of the display control device 314 is provided with the stored image determination flag 433h, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 436a of the normal video RAM 436 is stored for each sprite. However, instead of this, the work RAM 433 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 436a. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 431 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 436a stored in the work RAM 433, and transfers the predetermined image data. is already stored in the image storage area 436a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 431 sets a transfer instruction for image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 431 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 433, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 436a may be deleted.

In the second embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 437 based on the storage image discrimination flag 433h. The case where the MPU 431 determines whether or not the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 436 and, if the image data is stored in the normal video RAM 436, does not execute the transfer processing has been described. This processing may be performed by the image controller 437 . In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image determination flag 433h is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 437, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 436 is stored for each sprite. You may let Also, the work RAM provided in the image controller 437 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 436 a of the normal video RAM 436 . In this case, if image data of a predetermined sprite type needs to be transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal-use video RAM 436, the MPU 431 sends the image data to the image controller 437 regardless of the image data storage state in the normal-use video RAM 436. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the second embodiment described above, only the image data corresponding to the "back surface A" among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 435 c of the resident video RAM 435 . For example, the image data of the rear image used in part of the super reach may be resident in the rear image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435. FIG. In particular, by making the back image of the super reach that appears frequently or expected to be high reside in the back image area 435c of the resident video RAM 435, the transfer processing of the image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times

In the second embodiment, the transfer data table defines the transfer command of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 433e, and the MPU 431 instructs the transfer command at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case where the image controller 437 is controlled to transfer the image data obtained from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Information on the required sprite type is described, and the MPU 431 causes the image controller 437 to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 313, the MPU 431 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 281 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is displayed from the character ROM 434 normally. The image controller 437 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 436 for use.

In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the back surface C, which is the back image of the "island stage", changes with time has been described, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time. may In addition, the back image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes color tone with the passage of time. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above-described second embodiment, the third symbol display device 281 that performs the variable performance has explained the case where the continuous notice performance is also executed. A fourth pattern display device separate from 281 is provided, and by displaying the fourth pattern on the fourth pattern display device together with the variation performance executed by the third pattern display device 281, the continuous notice performance is executed. may In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 314 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 313 . Also, the pachinko machine 200 may be provided with a role that operates according to various effects, and the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by activating the role in a predetermined mode together with the variable effect. Further, by controlling the sound lamp control device 313, by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the sound output device 426 of the pachinko machine 200, the continuous notice effect may be executed, or the illumination part of the pachinko machine 200 By lighting or blinking 229 to 233 together with the variable effect, a continuous advance notice effect may be executed.

As a result, every time the variation effect is performed in the third pattern display device 281 (and the first pattern display device 237), the pattern is continuously displayed in the fourth pattern display device, or the role is operated in a predetermined manner. Or, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 426, or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 229 to 233, the player can be given a feeling of anticipation of a big win. In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third symbol display device 281 where the variable effect is performed, but the symbol is displayed by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 281. , the operation of the character, the sound output from the sound output device 426, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination parts 229 to 233, the continuous announcement effect is performed. can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily continued by simple control such as display of the pattern by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character, sound output from the sound output device 426, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 229 to 233. It is possible to perform a preview performance.

In addition, if the continuous notice effect is performed by outputting sound from the sound output device 426 or by lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 229 to 233, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 313, so that when starting winning By causing the main control device 310 to perform the winning judgment and the lottery processing at the time of fluctuation start, the voice lamp control device 313 to perform the continuous notice effect, and the display control device 314 to perform the variation effect, the pachinko machine 200 continuously When the advance notice effect is performed, each control device can be made to take charge of each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, display of symbols for continuous advance notice effect on the third pattern display device 281, display of symbols for continuous notice effect on the fourth pattern display device, operation in a predetermined mode of the role, sound from the sound output device 426 At least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 229 to 233 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute a continuous advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous announcement effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice effect (display by the third pattern display device 281, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role, sound output from the sound output device 426, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 229 to 233 , or a combination of them), by changing the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, short time jackpot, off) Even if you prepare multiple continuous notice effect modes selected according to good.

Further, in the above-described second embodiment, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, the case where the image for the continuous notice effect different from the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 281 has been described. Not limited to this, the continuous advance notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined patterns, as a stop pattern to be displayed when the variable effect ends. In this case, in the continuous notice command processing (see FIG. 53) of the command determination processing executed by the MPU 421 of the display control device 313, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on, and other stop symbol determination is performed. Alternatively, the flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, since the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process, instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the stop identification command for display, the chance number is set as the stop symbol. At times, it is possible to confirm and display the chance eye. Then, if the third symbol display device 281 continuously displays chance numbers as stop symbols for each variable performance, the player can be given an expectation that a big win will be finally obtained.

In the second embodiment, the main control device 310, various counters acquired at the time of start winning notified to the sound lamp control device (first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3) information is included in the number of pending balls command, but it is not necessarily limited to this. C2 and the information of the stop pattern selection counter C3) may be notified to the audio lamp control device 313 .

In the second embodiment, the main control device 310, in the number of pending balls command, the information of various counters (first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3) acquired at the time of start winning After including, the pending ball number command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 313, and the audio lamp control device 313 transmits the pending ball number command according to the values of various counters included in the pending ball number command. Estimate the results of the lottery that will be held in response to the suspended ball at the time and the stop type after the variable production, and based on the estimation result and the number of suspended balls that are withheld at that time, continuous notice production Although the case of determining whether to perform For example, main controller 310 estimates the result of the lottery corresponding to the start winning and the stop type after the variable effect from the values of various counters acquired at the time of starting winning, and at least a part of the estimation result is used as the number of pending balls. It may be included in the command and notified to the audio ramp control device 313, and the audio ramp control device 313 may determine whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect based on the notified estimation result. In addition, the main controller 310 determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect may be performed based on the result of the lottery corresponding to the start win and the stop type after the variable effect estimated from the values of the various counters acquired at the time of the start win. It is judged whether or not, at least the judgment result is included in the pending ball number command and notified to the audio lamp control device 313, and based on the judgment result, the audio lamp control device 313 finally determines whether continuous notice effect is performed. may be determined. Furthermore, the main control device 310 determines whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect, and notifies the voice lamp control device 313 of the judgment result including the pending ball number command. Alternatively, only the mode of presentation may be determined. The information to be included in the pending ball number command includes the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated starting winning prize, information on the stop type after the variable effect, information on whether or not continuous advance notice effect can be performed, or continuous advance notice effect is performed. By including the information as to whether or not, the command size of the pending ball number command can be reduced compared to the case where the values of various counters are included. Information on the result of the lottery corresponding to the estimated starting prize, information on the type of stop after the variable effect, information on whether or not to perform the continuous advance notice effect, or information on whether to perform the continuous notice effect, It may be sent from main controller 310 to audio ramp controller 313 by a command other than the pending pitches command.

In the second embodiment, when the continuous announcement command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 313 to the display control device 314, the display control device 314 corresponds to the continuous announcement image type indicated by the continuous announcement command. Although the transfer instruction is given to transfer the image data from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command constitutes a continuous notice effect of the same effect type. In some cases, after the image data corresponding to the continuous announcement image type indicated by the continuous announcement command is once transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436, it is overwritten with other image data until the continuous announcement effect is completed. may be controlled so as not to This makes it possible to prevent the same image data from being repeatedly transferred.

In addition, when the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command constitutes a step-up type continuous notice effect, not only the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command, but also the step A transfer instruction may be given to transfer image data corresponding to all types of continuous announcement images used in the up-type continuous announcement effect from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 . Also in this case, the image data corresponding to these continuous announcement image types once transferred to the normal video RAM 436 are controlled so as not to be overwritten by other image data until the continuous announcement effect is completed. good too. As a result, the image data corresponding to the continuous announcement image type can be reliably stored in the normal video RAM 436 before the image data corresponding to the continuous announcement image type is used by the continuous announcement effect. Also, it is possible to prevent the same image data from being repeatedly transferred.

Further, in the sound lamp control device 313, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined by the continuous announcement determination process (S2009) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 46), and the continuous announcement effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 314 to notify the display control device 314 of the execution decision of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode. Then, in the display control device 314, with the reception of this command as a trigger, a transmission instruction is set so that the image data of the continuous announcement image type used in the continuous announcement mode is transferred from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436. good too. As a result, the transfer of the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 434 to the normal video RAM 436 can be started before the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is started. , the image data can be reliably stored in the normal video RAM 436 before the image data corresponding to the continuous announcement image type is used by the continuous announcement effect.

Further, the display control device 314 may store the image data used in the continuous announcement effect in a sub-area dedicated to the continuous announcement effect image provided in the image storage area 436 a of the normal video RAM 436 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous announcement effect from being overwritten by other image data. You can increase the probability. Therefore, it is possible to suppress repeated transfer of the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect.

Further, the continuous notice command transmitted from the display control device 314 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect in which the variable effect is set. As a result, in the display control device 314, it can be recognized that the display of the continuous advance notice effect is the last. When control is performed so that image data is not overwritten, the overwrite control can be easily released.

Further, in the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the execution of the continuous announcement effect and the type of the continuous announcement image are notified from the sound lamp control device 313 to the display control device 314 by means of the continuous announcement command. It may be included in the variation pattern command. That is, in the variable display process (see FIG. 47) executed by the sound lamp control device 313, when generating the variable pattern command for display (S2104), it is determined whether or not to perform the continuous announcement effect, and the continuous When a preview effect is performed, the display variation pattern command may include information about the performance and the type of continuous preview images. Then, in the display control device 314, when the received display variation pattern command includes information about the execution of the continuous announcement effect and the continuous announcement image type, the image data corresponding to the continuous announcement image type is read from the character ROM 434. At the same time as instructing transfer to the normal video RAM 436, an additional data table corresponding to the continuous preview image type may be set in the additional data table buffer 433c. Since this reduces the number of commands, it is possible to simplify the processing.

In addition, if the display variation pattern command includes information about the execution of the continuous announcement effect and the continuous announcement image type, a display data table that does not support continuous announcement images for each variation pattern and a display data table that does not support continuous announcement images and each continuous announcement image type The display control device 314 sets the corresponding display data table in the display data table buffer 433b according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the continuous preview image type. may That is, the display data table may include both the drawing contents corresponding to the variation pattern and the drawing contents of the continuous announcement effect corresponding to the continuous announcement image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set an additional data table corresponding to the continuous announcement type. Therefore, the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, thereby suppressing an increase in processing load. In this case, the instruction to transfer the image data corresponding to the continuous preview image type may be issued in accordance with the reception of the display variation pattern command. As a result, it is sufficient to prepare one transfer data table for each variation pattern, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of data tables.

In the second embodiment, the stop pattern of the variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is based on the stop pattern (front-rear off reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete off reach) determined by the main control device 310, based on the sound lamp. Although the case where it is set by the control device 313 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and when the voice lamp control device 313 determines the execution of the continuous notice performance, the suspension of the last variable performance is stopped. If the pattern is not a big hit, the stop pattern of the final variable performance may be set by replacing the stop pattern determined by the main control device 310 with the stop pattern of the front and rear out reach mode. As a result, the stop pattern of the last variable performance in which the continuous advance notice performance is performed is not the stop pattern determined by the main control device 310, but always the front-rear deviating reach, so that the player has a high expectation. be able to.

In the above-described second embodiment, when the continuous notice effect is performed together with all the suspended variable effects, each variable effect is performed in the effect mode based on the result of the lottery performed at the start of each variation. When the continuous advance notice performance is performed together with all the suspended variable performances, the performance mode of the variable performances other than the last suspended variable performance may be changed to the variable performance. In this case, the process of generating a display variation pattern command in the sound lamp control device 313 (see S2104 in FIG. 47) changes the variation pattern according to the setting status of the continuous announcement effect and the number of times the continuous announcement effect is executed. can be In addition, when the stop symbol after the variable performance is a big hit, the performance mode of the variable performance is not updated, and the performance mode of the variable performance is displayed as it is based on the variation pattern determined by the main control device 310. may Here, even if the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed, if the situation where the big win does not appear as a result continues even though the aspect of the corresponding variable effect is, for example, the super reach variable effect, the expectation of the player. Although there is a risk of retreating, the continuous notice effect is performed continuously, and the variable effect other than the variable effect that is executed at the end is continuously removed and performed in the variable effect, so that it is executed last. It is possible to make the player have higher expectations for the variable presentation.

In the above-described second embodiment, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the case where the continuous notice effect is always executed on the third symbol display device 281 has been explained, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the frame button 222 is pressed by the player in a situation where execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the continuous announcement effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 281.例文帳に追加

In the above-described second embodiment, when executing the variable effect, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. Alternatively, all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an unrecognizable degree and displayed, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. .

In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the game board 213 is provided with one first ball entrance 264 for starting the jackpot lottery when a ball enters has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the game board 213 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances, each of which is independently detected to start a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first ball entrances, the number of held ball commands sent by the main controller 310 to the voice lamp controller 313 indicate which of the first ball entrances is being held. May contain information. In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 310 transmits to the sound lamp control device 313 when starting the variation also includes information indicating which of the first entrances is the suspended variation effect. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 313, a holding ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a holding ball number command is received, the first ball entering indicated by the holding ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of held balls can be counted every time.

Further, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, when the voice lamp control device 313 determines to start the continuous announcement effect when receiving the pending ball number command, all the first ball entrances are determined at that time. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed over the variable effect (retained ball) held by the mouth. In addition, in a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of first ball entrances and preferentially executing the variable performance reserved for one first ball entrance, the variable performance is preferentially executed. The start of the continuous advance notice performance may be determined only when the ball is entered into the first ball entrance. As a result, since the continuous notice performance is not started for the variable performance reserved for the first ball entrance with low priority, the continuous notice performance is not started for the variable performance reserved for the first ball entrance with low priority. is started and the variable performance is continuously suspended in the first ball entrance having a high priority, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the continuous advance notice performance does not end easily.

In the second embodiment, when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 310 is received in the sound lamp control device 313, the value of the pending ball number counter 423a is decreased by 1 (see S2105 in FIG. 47). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 37) executed by the MPU 401 of the main controller 310, the number of held balls of the main controller 310 subtracted in accordance with the variation pattern command set by the variation start process (S1207) A pending ball number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 403a (see S1205 in FIG. 37) is transmitted from the main controller 310 to the sound lamp control device 313, and the pending ball number command is a variation pattern. It may be transmitted from the main controller 310 to the audio lamp controller 313 together with the transmission of the command. In this case, S2105 of FIG. 47 is omitted. When transmitting the subtracted value (N) of the number of reserved balls counter 403a of the main controller 310, the number of reserved balls command contains information indicating the number of reserved balls after subtraction (i.e., starting winning prize (Information meaning that it is not the number of pending balls added along with . Since the determination as to whether or not to permit the continuous advance notice effect is made when there is a starting prize, the voice lamp control device 313, in the command determination process (see FIG. 46), determines whether the pending ball number command is When the reception is detected, if the number of reserved balls indicated by the number of reserved balls command is the number of reserved balls after subtraction, that is, if it is not the number of reserved balls added along with the start winning, continuous notice determination processing may be skipped.

In the second embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 313 receives the command for the number of pending balls and the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the continuous notice effect is performed for all the variable effects that are suspended at that time. Although the case of execution has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, it is further determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect. good. As a result, the continuous advance notice performance appears or does not appear for each variable performance, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous notice performance, and the performance is performed so that the player does not get bored. can be done. In this case, the MPU 421 of the audio lamp control device 313 is updated each time the variable display process (see FIG. 47) is executed, and a counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect is provided. may Then, in the variable display process, when the continuous announcement effect is performed (S2107: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in each variable effect is limited to a predetermined value, A continuous notice command may be set (S2108). Further, in this case, the number (range) of the predetermined value of the counter for setting the execution of the continuous announcement effect for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the conditions. The conditions include, for example, the value of the pending ball number counter 423a when determining whether or not to start the continuous announcement effect, the number of times the remaining continuous announcement effect is executed, the variation pattern of the variable effect for which the determination is made, and the series (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, time-saving jackpot, loss) after the end of the continuous announcement effect, or a combination of two or more of these. As a result, the probability of determining the execution of the continuous advance notice performance in each variable performance is changed according to the conditions, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous notice performance in each fluctuation performance. .

In the second embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main controller 310 to the audio lamp controller 313, and the audio lamp controller 313 instructs the display controller 314 to display. , the command may be sent directly from the main controller 310 to the display controller 314 . Alternatively, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may transmit commands for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the audio lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of the commands generated by the audio lamp control device 313 and notified to the display control device 314, such as the continuous notice command and the error occurrence command, the continuous notice Various flags such as flags and error occurrence flags are generated, and based on the flags, display data tables and additional data tables are set in the display data table buffer 433b or additional data table buffer 433c, and various image data such as warning images are stored. You may generate|occur|produce, and you may set the transfer instruction|indication of necessary image data.

In the above-described second embodiment, winning into the first ball entrance 264 and passing through the second ball entrance 267 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is four. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 264 is displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 281, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 237, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in the second embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 281. , along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shaped pattern. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The invention described in the second embodiment may be applied to the first embodiment. That is, in the slot machine 10, a display data table and an additional data table are prepared in advance for each of various effects displayed on the auxiliary display device 65 in response to commands received from the main controller 101. According to the content of the received command, the display data table or additional data table to be used is selected, the drawing content described in the selected data table is expanded in order of address according to the update of the pointer, and the expanded The image displayed on the auxiliary display device 65 may be drawn by instructing the image controller 188 to draw the image according to the drawn content. In addition, according to the setting of the display data table, a corresponding transfer data table is set, the transfer data information described in the transfer data table is expanded in order of address according to the update of the pointer, and the expanded transfer data Image data may be transferred from the character ROM 187 to the normal video RAM 190 according to the information.

Here, in game machines other than game machines (pachinko machines and slot machines), the display contents must be changed moment by moment based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. , it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each effect as described above. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, the display control device 81 controls the game state of the slot machine 10 determined by various commands received from the main control device 101, and the lottery performed based on the start command by operating the start lever 41. Since the performance mode is selected based on the results of (judgment of winning mode) and the like, and the auxiliary performance section executes various performances, a display data table is prepared for each performance, and the performance to be displayed. It is possible to easily create a drawing list for each frame according to the set data table by setting the display data table buffer corresponding to the data table. With this configuration, like a conventional slot machine, each time the effect image to be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed, the program executed by the MPU 181 is started, so that the effect image can be displayed. With the diversification of applications, there is a huge load on the startup and execution of programs that are becoming more complex and voluminous. Since the effect image to be displayed on the display 65 can be changed, various types of effect images can be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 81 .

The present invention may be implemented in a slot machine of a type different from the so-called A type slot machine described in the first embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to any slot machine such as B type, C type, combination type of A type and C type, combination type of B type and C type, and type equipped with CT game. , it is clear that the same effects as those of the above-described first embodiment can be obtained in either case. Bonus wins in each of these types include BB wins, RB wins, SB wins, CT wins, and the like.

Also, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from that of the second embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is won, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a double-right product, a triple-right product, etc.) that increases the expected value of the jackpot until multiple (for example, 2 or 3) jackpot conditions occur, including that. may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepachi, jangkyu, a so-called game machine combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

As a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is not equipped with a ball-striking handle. things are mentioned. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change, for example, due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player under the condition that the finalized symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall, so the game value as seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine due to separate handling of medals and balls.

In addition to the slot machine and game machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown below.

Main control means for performing main control of the game, sub-control means for operating based on commands transmitted from the main control means, and image display means for displaying images based on control by the sub-control means. The sub-control means includes image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and a command received from the main control means from among a plurality of display modes. a first display determining means for determining a display type to be displayed by means of a display type; a first specification information storage means for storing first specification information; and a first selection for selecting the first specification information corresponding to the display type determined by the first display determination means from the first specification information storage means. means, first pointer means updated every time elapses, and every time the first pointer means is updated, the updated pointer means is based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means. Drawing information specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the first pointer means; a drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing drawing of an image for a screen, wherein the image drawing means generates the image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means; A slot machine 1 that draws a minute image.

According to the slot machine 1, in the sub control means, the first stipulation information storage means is provided for each of a plurality of display types, and one piece of drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type is stored. A first specification information specified for each screen is stored, and a first display type corresponding to a display type to be displayed in response to a command received from the main control means is determined from among a plurality of display modes by the first display determination means. The prescribed information is selected from the first prescribed information storage means by the first selection means. In addition, the first pointer means is updated every time the time elapses, and each time the update is performed, based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means, 1 corresponding to the updated first pointer means is selected. Drawing information for a screen is specified by the drawing information specifying means, and drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the specified drawing information for one screen is generated. It is generated by the instruction information generating means. Based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, an image for one screen is drawn by the drawn image means. Thus, when the display type to be displayed changes in response to a command received from the main control means, the display can be easily performed by simply selecting the first stipulation information corresponding to the display type from the first stipulation information storage means. An image corresponding to the type can be generated and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

Main control means for performing main control of the game, sub-control means for operating based on commands transmitted from the main control means, and image display means for displaying images based on control by the sub-control means. In the gaming machine, the sub control means includes image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and one of a plurality of display modes for commands received from the main control means. a first display determining means for determining a display type to be displayed by means of a display type; a first specification information storage means for storing first specification information; and a first selection for selecting, from the first specification information storage means, the first specification information corresponding to the display type determined by the first display determination means. means, first pointer means updated every time elapses, and every time the first pointer means is updated, the updated pointer means is based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means. Drawing information specifying means for specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the first pointer means; a drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing drawing of an image for a screen, and the image drawing means generates one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. A game machine A1, characterized in that it draws a minute image.

According to the game machine A1, in the sub control means, the first prescribed information storage means is provided for each of a plurality of display types, and stores one piece of drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the display type. A first specification information specified for each screen is stored, and a first display type corresponding to a display type to be displayed in response to a command received from the main control means is determined from among a plurality of display modes by the first display determination means. The prescribed information is selected from the first prescribed information storage means by the first selection means. In addition, the first pointer means is updated every time the time elapses, and each time the update is performed, based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means, 1 corresponding to the updated first pointer means is selected. Drawing information for a screen is specified by the drawing information specifying means, and drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the specified drawing information for one screen is generated. It is generated by the instruction information generating means. Based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, an image for one screen is drawn by the drawn image means. Thus, when the display type to be displayed changes in response to a command received from the main control means, the display can be easily performed by simply selecting the first stipulation information corresponding to the display type from the first stipulation information storage means. An image corresponding to the type can be generated and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In the game machine A1, the sub-control means comprises a first image information storage means for storing a plurality of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means, and the first definition information defines for each screen. The drawing information includes specific information for specifying image information necessary for drawing the image for one screen, and the drawing instruction information generating means generates the one screen image specified by the drawing information specifying means. based on the drawing information, generating drawing instruction information including image instruction information for designating image information necessary for drawing an image for one screen from the specific information included in the drawing information, wherein the image drawing means generates , based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means, an instruction is given by the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information among the plurality of image information stored in the first image information storage means. A gaming machine A2, wherein an image for one screen is drawn using the image information obtained.

According to the gaming machine A2, in the sub control means, the first image information storage means stores a plurality of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means. Further, the drawing information defined for each screen in the first defining information includes specific information for specifying image information necessary for drawing the image for the one screen. Based on the specified drawing information for one screen, drawing instruction information including image instruction information for instructing image information necessary for drawing an image for one screen is obtained from the specific information included in the drawing information. It is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, based on the generated drawing instruction information, image information designated by the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information among the plurality of pieces of image information stored in the first image information storage means by the image drawing means. is used to draw an image for one screen. Accordingly, in the first stipulation information, by specifying the image information necessary for drawing the image for one screen by the specific information included in the drawing information defined for each screen, various image types can be handled. The resulting image can be drawn and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to more easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine A2, the sub-control means is capable of reading out the image information stored in the first image storage means at a higher speed than the first image storage means, and stores the image information stored in the image information stored in the first image storage means. wherein the image drawing means draws an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the second image storage means, Further, the sub-control means, when one piece of image information is used for drawing an image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, controls the first image information before the image information is used. A gaming machine A3 comprising first transfer control means for controlling transfer of the one image information from the image storage means to the second image storage means.

According to the gaming machine A3, the sub-control means is capable of reading out the image information stored in the first image storage means at a higher speed than the first image storage means. A second image storage means capable of rewriting information is provided, and the image drawing means draws an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the second image storage means. It is configured. Then, when one piece of image information is used for drawing an image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the one piece of image information is controlled by the first transfer control means before the image information is used. is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. As a result, even if a memory with a slow readout speed is used as the first image storage means, the image drawing means can create an image using at least the predetermined image information transferred to the second storage means capable of high-speed readout operation. Since the image to be displayed on the display means is drawn, the image can be displayed at the desired time without any problem. Therefore, even if a memory having a slow read speed is used as the first image storage means, various effects can be immediately displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine A3, the first transfer control means transfers the one image information to the image drawing means before the image drawing means uses the image information according to the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information. The sub control means generates transfer instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to transfer from the first image storage means to the second image storage means, and the sub control means controls the image generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. instruction information generating means for generating instruction information including drawing instruction information and the transfer instruction information generated by the first transfer control means, wherein the image drawing means generates the image generated by the drawing information generating means; An image for one screen is drawn based on the drawing instruction information included in the instruction information, and the image is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means based on the transfer instruction information included in the instruction information. A game machine A4 characterized in that it is a machine for transferring one piece of image information.

According to the game machine A4, in the sub control means, the first transfer control means causes the one image to be displayed before the one image information is used for drawing the image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information. transfer instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to transfer information from the first image storage means to the second image storage means; Instruction information including generated transfer instruction information is generated by the instruction information generating means. Then, the image drawing means draws an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information included in the instruction information generated by the drawing information generating means, and based on the transfer instruction information included in the instruction information. The one image information is transferred from one image storage means to the second image storage means. As a result, before the image information is used for drawing an image by the image drawing means based on the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the image drawing means instructs the transfer instruction information included in the instruction information. Since the image information can be transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means, even if a memory with a slow read speed is used for the first image storage means, the image drawing means can be processed at high speed. An image to be displayed on the image display means can be reliably drawn using at least the predetermined image information transferred to the second storage means capable of read operation.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the first regulation information storage means stores the first regulation information for each element that subdivides the display mode of each display type, and the sub control means stores the An element identification means for identifying elements constituting a display mode of the display type determined by the first display determination means, wherein the first selection means corresponds to the display type determined by the first display determination means. A game machine A5 characterized in that, as the first regulation information, all the first regulation information corresponding to the elements specified by the element specifying means are selected from the first regulation information storage means.

According to the game machine A5, the first regulation information storage means stores the first regulation information for each element obtained by subdividing the display mode of each display type. Here, the display mode of each display type generally includes many common elements in the images displayed in each display type. Since it is sufficient to include only the first specification information corresponding to the element, instead of including it in the first specification information corresponding to each display type, the first specification information can be efficiently stored in the first specification information storage means. can be memorized. On the other hand, even if the first stipulation information is stored for each element, in the sub control means, the elements constituting the display mode of the display type determined by the first display determining means are specified by the element specifying means, and the first selecting means selects from the first definition information storage means all the first definition information corresponding to the elements identified by the element identification means as the first definition information corresponding to the display type determined by the first display determination means. . Thereby, it is only necessary to specify the elements constituting the display mode of the display type determined for the command received from the main control means, and select the first prescribed information corresponding to the elements from the first prescribed information storage means. An image corresponding to the display type can be easily drawn and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means while efficiently storing the first prescribed information.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, provides a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information is displayed by the dynamic display effect, wherein the first stipulation information storage means stores the first stipulation information; is stored for each of the plurality of dynamic display effects.

According to the gaming machine A6, a dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information is displayed on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, and the predetermined identification information appears by the dynamic display effect. If so, the player is awarded a predetermined game value. By this dynamic display effect, the player can have a sense of anticipation that a predetermined game value will be given, and by variously changing the effect mode of the dynamic display effect, it is possible to change the effect according to the effect mode. A sense of expectation can be given to the player. Here, since the first regulation information storage means stores the first regulation information for each of a plurality of dynamic display effects, the first display determining means causes the image display means to display one effect mode based on the command. When it is determined to display the dynamic display performance, the first selection means selects the first stipulation information corresponding to the dynamic display performance of the one performance mode from the first stipulation information storage means. Thereby, in the dynamic display effect that gives the player various expectations, the first stipulation information corresponding to the dynamic display effect of one effect mode set based on the command is selected from the first stipulation information storage means. By simply doing so, an image corresponding to the effect mode can be easily drawn and displayed on the image display means. Therefore, since it is possible to easily diversify the dynamic display effects displayed on the image display means, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player through the dynamic display effects.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the sub-control means determines, from among a plurality of display modes, a second display type to be displayed in addition to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means. second display determination means provided for each of the plurality of second display types and defining drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type for each screen; a second specification information storage means for storing specification information; and a second selection for selecting, from the second specification information storage means, the second specification information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determination means. and a second pointer means updated together with the update of the first pointer means, wherein the drawing information specifying means is selected by the first selection means each time the first pointer means is updated. drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the first specified information thus updated, and based on the second specified information selected by the second selection means; A gaming machine B1, wherein drawing information required for the entire image is specified by specifying drawing information of an image to be additionally displayed on the one screen corresponding to the updated second pointer means.

According to the gaming machine B1, the second display type to be displayed in addition to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from among the plurality of display modes is selected by the second display determination means. determined by The second specified information storage means is provided for each of the plurality of second display types, and defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type for each screen. Second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specifying information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specifying information storage means by the second selecting means. Also, the second pointer means is updated together with the update of the first pointer means. Then, each time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information specifying means, based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means, draws information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means. By specifying the drawing information and specifying the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on one screen corresponding to the updated second pointer means based on the second specified information selected by the second selection means , is configured to identify the drawing information required for the entire image. Thereby, when an image of the second display type is additionally displayed to the image of the display type corresponding to the command received from the main control means, the second stipulation information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second stipulation information storage means. , the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine B1, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, When predetermined identification information appears by display effect, a predetermined game value is given to the player, and the sub control means controls the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means. and the second display determining means adds to the dynamic display effect for each of the dynamic display effects corresponding to the number of times of waiting stored in the waiting times storage means. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it determines to display an image of the second display type by doing so.

According to the game machine B2, a dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information is displayed on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, and the predetermined identification information appears by the dynamic display effect. If so, the player is given a predetermined game value. By this dynamic display effect, the player can have a sense of anticipation that a predetermined game value will be given, and by variously changing the effect mode of the dynamic display effect, it is possible to change the effect according to the effect mode. A sense of expectation can be given to the player. Further, in the sub control means, the number of standby times of the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means is stored in the standby number storage means, and based on the command from the main control device, the standby number stored in the standby number storage means is stored. In each dynamic display effect for the number of times, the second display determining means determines to display the image of the second display type in addition to the dynamic display effect. Thus, images of the second display type can be added and displayed continuously over a plurality of dynamic display effects. As a result, it is possible to give various expectations to the player who visually recognizes that the images of the second display type are continuously displayed. Even if the image of the second display type is continuously added to the dynamic display effect and displayed, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is displayed in the second display type by the configuration described in the gaming machine B1. Only by selecting from the prescribed information storage means, the image of the second display type can be easily added to the dynamic display effect and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the second display determination means determines whether or not to display an image of the second display type on the image display means, and the second selection means determines whether or not the image of the second display type is displayed. When it is determined by the determination means that the image of the second display type is not to be displayed, it should be added to the display mode of the display type determined by the first display determination means instead of the second stipulation information. A gaming machine B3 characterized by selecting information indicating that there is no drawing information.

According to the gaming machine B3, when the second display determining means determines not to display the image of the second display type, the display type determined by the first display determining means is used instead of the second regulating information. information indicating that there is no drawing information to be added to the display mode of is selected by the second selecting means. As a result, every time the drawing information identifying means updates the first pointer means, it corresponds to the updated first pointer means specified based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selecting means. The drawing information necessary for the entire image is specified without adding the drawing information related to the second display type to the drawing information for one screen. Therefore, even when the image of the second display type is displayed or hidden, the display/non-display of the image of the second display type can be easily switched. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

A game machine B4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the first pointer means also serves as the second pointer means.

According to the gaming machine B4, since the first pointer means doubles as the second pointer means, the drawing information specifying means selects the first rule selected by the first selection means each time the first pointer means is updated. Drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the information, and corresponding to the first pointer means based on the second stipulation information selected by the second selection means. By specifying the drawing information to be additionally displayed on one screen, the drawing information necessary for the entire image can be specified, and the entire image to be displayed can be easily specified from each prescribed information only by one pointer means. It is possible to specify the drawing information necessary for

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the sub-control means determines, from among a plurality of display modes, a second display type to be displayed in addition to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means. second display determination means provided for each of the plurality of second display types and defining drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type for each screen; a second specification information storage means for storing specification information; and a second selection for selecting, from the second specification information storage means, the second specification information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determination means. drawing information of an image to be additionally displayed, which is specified by the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means for each screen, to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means. and a first stipulation information generating means for generating new stipulation information, wherein the drawing information specifying means is generated by the first stipulation information generating means each time the first pointer means is updated. a gaming machine C1, wherein drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the new prescribed information.

According to the game machine C1, in the sub control means, the second display type to be displayed in addition to the image of the display type determined by the first display determining means from among the plurality of display modes is selected by the second display determining means. determined by The second specified information storage means is provided for each of the plurality of second display types, and defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type for each screen. Second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specifying information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specifying information storage means by the second selecting means. Drawing information of an image to be additionally displayed, which is specified by the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means with respect to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means by the first specifying information generating means. is added for each screen, new prescribed information is generated. Then, every time the first pointer means is updated by the drawing information specifying means, one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is based on the new definition information generated by the first definition information generation means. The drawing information for each minute is specified. Thereby, when an image of the second display type is additionally displayed to the image of the display type corresponding to the command received from the main control means, the second stipulation information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second stipulation information storage means. , the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine C1, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, When predetermined identification information appears by display effect, a predetermined game value is given to the player, and the sub control means controls the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means. and the second display determining means adds to the dynamic display effect for each of the dynamic display effects corresponding to the number of times of waiting stored in the waiting times storage means. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it determines to display an image of the second display type by doing so.

According to the game machine C2, a dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information is displayed on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, and the predetermined identification information appears by the dynamic display effect. If so, the player is awarded a predetermined game value. By this dynamic display effect, the player can have a sense of anticipation that a predetermined game value will be given, and by variously changing the effect mode of the dynamic display effect, it is possible to change the effect according to the effect mode. A sense of expectation can be given to the player. Further, in the sub control means, the number of standby times of the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means is stored in the standby number storage means, and based on the command from the main control device, the standby number stored in the standby number storage means is stored. In each dynamic display effect for the number of times, the second display determining means determines to display the image of the second display type in addition to the dynamic display effect. Thus, images of the second display type can be added and displayed continuously over a plurality of dynamic display effects. As a result, it is possible to give various expectations to the player who visually recognizes that the images of the second display type are continuously displayed. Even if the image of the second display type is continuously added to the dynamic display effect and displayed, the configuration described in the game machine C1 allows the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type to be displayed in the second display mode. Only by selecting from the prescribed information storage means, the image of the second display type can be easily added to the dynamic display effect and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the second display determining means determines whether or not to display an image of the second display type on the image display means, and the drawing information specifying means determines whether or not the image of the second display type is to be displayed. When the deciding means decides to hide the image of the second display type, the updated first pointer means corresponds to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it specifies drawing information for one screen to be played.

According to the gaming machine C3, when the second display determining means determines to hide the image of the second display type, the drawing information specifying means selects the first stipulation information selected by the first selecting means. Based on this, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified. Therefore, even when the image of the second display type is displayed or hidden, the display/non-display of the image of the second display type can be easily switched. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the sub-control means selects, from among a plurality of display modes, a second display type to be displayed in addition to the display mode determined by the first display determination means. The first definition information stored in the first definition information storage means includes drawing information necessary for drawing an image of the corresponding display type, as well as the image of the display type. The drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the second display type to be additionally displayed is specified for each screen, and the drawing information specifying means, each time the first pointer means is updated and specifying drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the first regulation information selected by the first selection means, and determining the drawing information by the second display determination means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the drawing information required for the entire image is specified by specifying the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on the one screen corresponding to the second display type.

According to the game machine D1, the second display displayed in addition to the image of the display type determined by the first display determining means from among the plurality of display modes in the sub control means. The type is determined by the second display determining means. In addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type, the second display displayed in addition to the image of the display type is displayed according to the first definition information stored in the first definition information storage means. Rendering information necessary for rendering a type of image is specified for each screen, and each time the rendering information specifying means updates the first pointer means, the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means is specified. Based on this, drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and an image to be additionally displayed on one screen corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means. is specified, and the required drawing information for the entire image is specified. Thereby, when an image of the second display type is additionally displayed to the image of the display type corresponding to the command received from the main control means, drawing of the second display type to be additionally displayed is performed from the selected first regulation information. Once the information is specified, the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine D1, the display type includes a plurality of dynamic display effects for dynamically displaying identification information on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command. When predetermined identification information appears by display effect, a predetermined game value is given to the player, and the sub control means controls the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means. and the second display determining means adds to the dynamic display effect for each of the dynamic display effects corresponding to the number of times of waiting stored in the waiting times storage means. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that it determines to display an image of the second display type by doing so.

According to the game machine D2, a dynamic display effect for dynamically displaying the identification information is displayed on the image display means in an effect mode set based on the command, and the predetermined identification information appears by the dynamic display effect. If so, the player is awarded a predetermined game value. By this dynamic display effect, the player can have a sense of anticipation that a predetermined game value will be given, and by variously changing the effect mode of the dynamic display effect, it is possible to change the effect according to the effect mode. A sense of expectation can be given to the player. Further, in the sub control means, the number of standby times of the dynamic display effect displayed by the image display means is stored in the standby number storage means, and based on the command from the main control device, the standby number stored in the standby number storage means is stored. In each dynamic display effect for the number of times, the second display determining means determines to display the image of the second display type in addition to the dynamic display effect. Thus, images of the second display type can be added and displayed continuously over a plurality of dynamic display effects. As a result, it is possible to give various expectations to the player who visually recognizes that the images of the second display type are continuously displayed. Even if the image of the second display type is continuously added to the dynamic display effect and displayed, the second prescribed information corresponding to the second display type is displayed in the second display type by the configuration described in the gaming machine D1. Only by selecting from the prescribed information storage means, the image of the second display type can be easily added to the dynamic display effect and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the second display determination means determines whether or not to display an image of the second display type on the image display means, and the drawing information specifying means determines whether the second display type is displayed. When the deciding means decides to hide the image of the second display type, the updated first pointer means corresponds to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means. A game machine D3, characterized in that the drawing information for one screen to be displayed is specified and the drawing information of the image of the second display type defined in the first regulation information is discarded.

According to the gaming machine D3, when the second display determining means determines to hide the image of the second display type, the drawing information specifying means selects the first regulating information selected by the first selecting means. Based on this, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and the drawing information of the image of the second display type defined in the first definition information is discarded. there is Therefore, even when the image of the second display type is displayed or hidden, the display/non-display of the image of the second display type can be easily switched. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the effects displayed on the image display means.

In the game machine A3 or A4, the sub-control means is capable of reading out at a higher speed than the first image storage means, and stores the image information stored in the first image storage means as third image storage means. and the image drawing means draws an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the third image storage means and the image information stored in the second image storage means. The secondary control means further controls part of the image information stored in the first image storage means to be transferred to the third image storage means at the time of power-on startup. 2 transfer control means, wherein the third image storage means retains the image information transferred under the control of the second transfer control means at least until a predetermined trigger occurs; , when image information not held in the third image storage means is used for drawing an image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the third A game machine E1 characterized by controlling the transfer of image information from one image storage means to said second image storage means.

According to the gaming machine E1, the sub-control means includes the third image storage means capable of performing a readout operation at a higher speed than the first image storage means and storing the image information stored in the first image storage means. The image drawing means draws an image to be displayed on the image display means based on at least the image information stored in the third image storage means and the image information stored in the second image storage means. is configured as Part of the image information stored in the first image storage means is transferred to the third image storage means under the control of the second transfer control means when the power is turned on, and the image information is transferred to the third image storage means. holds the image information transferred under the control of the second transfer control means at least until a predetermined trigger occurs. On the other hand, when the image information not held in the third image storage means is used for image control by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the first transfer control means is used before the image information is used. , the image information is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

As a result, even if a memory whose reading speed is slow in the first storage means is used, the image drawing means transfers the image information held in the third image storage means capable of reading out at high speed to the second image storage means. Since the image to be displayed on the image display means is drawn using the obtained image information, the image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. Further, since the image information held in the third image storage means is held at least until a predetermined trigger occurs, the amount of image information transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means can be reduced. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of transferring the image information from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

In the game machine E1, the image information held in the third image storage means is image information for displaying an image frequently displayed by the image display means.

According to the gaming machine E2, since the image information for displaying the image frequently displayed by the image display means is held in the third image storage means, each time the image is displayed on the image display means, the third image is displayed. Since there is no need to read the image information from the one-image storage means, the frequently displayed image can be reliably displayed at the desired time.

In the game machine E1 or E2, the image information held in the third image storage means is controlled by the sub control means based on the command transmitted from the main control means or the signal input to the sub control means. A gaming machine E4 characterized by image information for displaying an image to be immediately displayed on the image display means.

The signal input to the sub-control means may be an input signal from various sensors, such as a vibration sensor provided in the game machine, or a game medium detection sensor for detecting a game medium inserted into the game machine. It may be an input signal from a button operated by the player. Further, the image to be immediately displayed on the image display means may be, for example, an image for reporting an error, or may be a rear image displayed on the image display means.

According to the game machine E3, an image for displaying an image to be immediately displayed on the image display means under the control of the sub-control means based on a command transmitted from the main control means or a signal input to the sub-control means. Since the information is held in the third image storage means, after the command transmitted from the main control means or the signal input to the sub-control means is input, the image to be displayed immediately is displayed. Image control can be performed by the image control means using the image information held in the third image storage means without reading the information from the first image storage means. Therefore, an image that should be displayed immediately can be reliably displayed at a desired time.

A game machine E4 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines A3, A4, and E1 to E3, the first image storage means is constituted by a NAND flash memory.

According to the gaming machine E4, the first image storage means is composed of a NAND flash memory. Here, since the NAND type flash memory is characterized by being able to obtain a large storage capacity in a small area and being inexpensive, it is intended to increase the capacity of the first image storage means while suppressing an increase in cost. be able to. Therefore, since a large amount of image information for displaying an image on the image display means can be stored in the first image storage means, the image displayed on the image display means can be made into various modes, and the player's interest can be enhanced. can be improved. On the other hand, the NAND flash memory is characterized by a slow read speed compared to other memories, but the image drawing means can Since the image to be displayed on the image display means is drawn using at least the image information transferred to the second image storage means capable of high-speed read operation, even if the first image storage means is composed of a NAND flash memory, A given image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. Therefore, it is possible to display a predetermined image at a desired time without any problem while diversifying the images to be displayed on the image display means.

In any one of gaming machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the sub-control means selects the image information necessary for drawing an image defined by the first definition information, in association with the first definition information. third specifying information storage means storing third specifying information specifying image information to be transferred to the second image storing means; and third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means. from the third specified information storage means, and based on the third specified information selected by the third selected means, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is specified. transfer information specifying means, and the first transfer control means controls the image information to be transferred specified by the transfer information specifying means to the image according to the image instruction information whose image information is included in the drawing instruction information; The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that control is performed so that the image is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means before being used for drawing an image by the drawing means.

According to the game machine F1, in the sub-control means, the image to be transferred to the second image storage means is selected from the image information required for drawing the image defined by the first definition information in association with the first definition information. Third stipulation information that stipulates information is stored in the third stipulation information storage means. Here, the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means is selected from the third specifying information storage means by the third selecting means, and based on the selected third specifying information , image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified by the transfer information specifying means. Before the specified image information to be transferred is used for image drawing by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the first transfer control means transfers the specified image information from the first image storage means to the first transfer control means. 2 is transferred to the image storage means. Thus, it is possible to easily specify image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first defining information for the selected first defining information. Therefore, the image to be displayed based on the first defining information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine E1, the sub-control means stores image information necessary for drawing an image defined by the first definition information, which is not held in the third image storage means, in association with the first definition information. A third defining information storage means storing third defining information defining image information as image information to be transferred to the second image storing means, and corresponding to the first defining information selected by the first selecting means. a third selection means for selecting the third definition information from the third definition information storage means; and based on the third definition information selected by the third selection means, the third definition information to be transferred to the second image storage means transfer information specifying means for specifying image information, wherein the first transfer control means controls the image information to be transferred, specified by the transfer information specifying means, to the image whose image information is included in the drawing instruction information; The game machine F2 is characterized in that the image is controlled to be transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means before being used for image rendering by the image rendering means in accordance with instruction information.

According to the gaming machine F2, in the sub control means, the image information not held in the third image storage means, among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information, is made to correspond to the first definition information. Third definition information that defines information as image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is stored in the third definition information storage means. Here, the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means is selected from the third specifying information storage means by the third selecting means, and based on the selected third specifying information , image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified by the transfer information specifying means. Then, the first transfer control means transfers the specified image information to be transferred from the first image storage means to the first image information before the specified image information to be transferred is used for image drawing by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information. 2 is transferred to the image storage means. As a result, for the selected first definition information, among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information, the second image storage is performed because it is not held in the third image storage means. Since the image information to be transferred to the means can be easily specified, the image to be displayed based on the first defining information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the sub-control means comprises third pointer means updated together with the update of the first pointer means, and the transfer information specifying means corresponds to the updated third pointer means. and specifying the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means based on the third specified information selected by the third selection means.

According to the game machine F3, the third pointer means is updated together with the update of the first pointer means, and the third pointer means is selected by the third selection means in correspondence with the updated third pointer means by the transfer information specifying means. Image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is specified based on the third prescribed information. As a result, predetermined image information can be transferred from the first image storage area to the second image storage area in synchronization with the updating of the first pointer means, and the transfer timing can be easily set.

In the gaming machine F3, the third stipulation information stipulates image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each unit time in which an image for one screen is displayed on the image display means. Characterized game machine F4.

According to the gaming machine F4, the third specifying information specifies the image information to be transferred to the second image storing means for each unit time. In addition, it is possible to easily specify the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area to be transferred.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F4, the third specified information storage means stores image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing an image specified by the first specified information. If it does not exist, the third regulating information corresponding to the first regulating information is not stored, and the transfer information specifying means determines that the third regulating information corresponding to the first regulating information selected by the first regulating means is not stored. When the third selecting means determines that the image information is not stored in the third specified information storing means, it specifies that there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storing area. A game machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, if there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information, the image information corresponding to the first definition information is not present. The third stipulation information is not stored in the third stipulation information storage means. When the third selection means determines that the third definition information corresponding to the first definition information selected by the first definition means is not stored in the third definition information storage means, the transfer image specification means , that there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storage area. Thus, whether or not there is image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information can be easily determined based on the presence or absence of the third definition information. Therefore, the processing can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent unnecessary third regulation information from being stored in the third regulation information storage means, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the storage means.

In any one of the game machines A3, A4 and E1 to E4, the sub-control means selects a second image displayed in addition to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from among the plurality of display modes. second display determining means for determining a display type; and drawing information provided for each of the plurality of second display types and indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type for each screen. second regulation information storage means for storing defined second regulation information; and said second regulation information corresponding to said second display type determined by said second display determination means is selected from said second regulation information storage means. and a second pointer means updated together with the update of the first pointer means, wherein the drawing information specification means, each time the first pointer means is updated, the first drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the first specification information selected by the selection means, and the second specification selected by the second selection means; Based on the information, by specifying the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on the one screen corresponding to the updated second pointer means, the drawing information necessary for the entire image is specified, and the sub control means further selects the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means from among the image information necessary for drawing the image to be additionally displayed, which is defined by the second definition information, in association with the second definition information. a fourth specifying information storage means storing specified fourth specifying information; and a fourth specifying information corresponding to the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means from the fourth specifying information storing means. 4 selecting means; and transfer information identifying means for identifying image information to be transferred to said second image storing means based on said fourth defining information selected by said fourth selecting means, said first transfer Before the image information to be transferred specified by the transfer information specifying means is used for drawing an image by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information, the control means: A game machine F6 characterized in that it is controlled to transfer from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

According to the game machine F6, in the sub control means, the second display type to be displayed in addition to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from among the plurality of display modes is selected by the second display determination means. determined by The second specified information storage means is provided for each of the plurality of second display types, and defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type for each screen. Second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specifying information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specifying information storage means by the second selecting means. Also, the second pointer means is updated together with the update of the first pointer means. Then, each time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information specifying means, based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means, draws information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means. By specifying the drawing information and specifying the drawing information of the image to be additionally displayed on one screen corresponding to the updated second pointer means based on the second specified information selected by the second selection means , is configured to identify the drawing information needed for the entire image. Thereby, when an image of the second display type is additionally displayed to the image of the display type corresponding to the command received from the main control means, the second stipulation information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second stipulation information storage means. Only by selecting from , the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

Further, in the sub control means, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image to be additionally displayed, which is defined by the second definition information, in association with the second definition information. is stored in the fourth regulation information storage means. Here, the fourth specifying means selects the fourth specifying information corresponding to the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means from the fourth specifying information storing means, and based on the selected fourth specifying information , image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified by the transfer information specifying means. Then, the first transfer control means transfers the specified image information to be transferred from the first image storage means to the first image information before the specified image information to be transferred is used for image drawing by the image drawing means in accordance with the image instruction information included in the drawing instruction information. 2 is transferred to the image storage means. Thus, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means can be easily selected from among the image information necessary for drawing the image to be additionally displayed, which is specified by the second specifying information, for the selected second specifying information. , the image to be additionally displayed can be reliably drawn based on the second defining information and displayed on the image display means.

In any one of the game machines A3, A4 and E1 to E4, the sub-control means selects the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information, in association with the first definition information. third specifying information storage means storing third specifying information specifying image information to be transferred to the second image storing means; and third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means. from the third specifying information storage means, and the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means and the third specifying information selected by the third selecting means second definition information generating means for generating new definition information by adding image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, wherein the drawing information specifying means updates the first pointer means; each time, on the basis of the new definition information generated by the second definition information generation means, drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and the second image storage area is specified. and the first transfer control means transfers the image information to be transferred, specified by the drawing information specifying means, from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. A gaming machine G1 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G1, in the sub control means, the image to be transferred to the second image storage means is selected from the image information required for drawing the image defined by the first definition information in association with the first definition information. Third stipulation information that stipulates information is stored in the third stipulation information storage means. Here, the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means is selected from the third specifying information storage means by the third selecting means, and the third specifying information is specified by the selected third specifying information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is added to the first definition information selected by the first selection means by the second definition information generation means to generate new definition information. Each time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information specifying means specifies image information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the newly generated definition information. At the same time, image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means by the first transfer control means. be done. As a result, for the selected first definition information, the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information can be easily specified, and the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information can be easily specified. Since the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means can be easily identified from among the image information, the image to be displayed based on the first definition information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means. can be made

In the gaming machine E1, the sub-control means stores image information necessary for drawing an image defined by the first definition information, which is not held in the third image storage means, in association with the first definition information. A third defining information storage means storing third defining information defining image information as image information to be transferred to the second image storing means, and corresponding to the first defining information selected by the first selecting means. a third selection means for selecting the third regulation information from the third regulation information storage means; and the third regulation selected by the third selection means for the first regulation information selected by the first selection means. second definition information generating means for generating new definition information by adding image information to be transferred to the second image storage means defined by the information; Each time the means is updated, drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the new definition information generated by the second definition information generation means, and The image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the first transfer control means transfers the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means from the first image storage means to the second image storage area. A gaming machine G2 characterized by transferring to image storage means.

According to the game machine G2, in the sub control means, the image information not held in the third image storage means is selected from the image information required for drawing the image defined by the first definition information in association with the first definition information. Third definition information that defines information as image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is stored in the third definition information storage means. Here, the third specifying information corresponding to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means is selected from the third specifying information storage means by the third selecting means, and the third specifying information is specified by the selected third specifying information. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is added to the first definition information selected by the first selection means by the second definition information generation means to generate new definition information. Each time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information specifying means specifies image information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the newly generated definition information. At the same time, image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means by the first transfer control means. be done. As a result, for the selected first definition information, the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information can be easily specified, and the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the first definition information can be easily specified. Since the image information that should be transferred to the second image storage means because it is not held in the third image storage means can be easily specified, the image information is displayed based on the first definition information. An image can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the third defining information defines the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each unit time in which an image for one screen is displayed on the image display means. A gaming machine G3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G3, the third defining information defines the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each unit time in which the image for one screen is displayed on the image display means. The second specifying information generating means selects the image information to be transferred in one unit time among the image information to be transferred to the second image storing means specified by the third specifying information selected by the third selecting means. New stipulation information can be easily generated in addition to drawing information for one screen to be displayed in one unit time stipulated by one stipulation information.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the third specified information storage means stores image information to be transferred to the second image storage means out of the image information necessary for drawing an image specified by the first specified information. If it does not exist, the third defining information corresponding to the first defining information is not stored, and the drawing information specifying means determines that the third defining information corresponding to the first defining information selected by the first defining means is not stored. When the third selection means determines that the information is not stored in the third stipulation information storage means, the updated first pointer is based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means. A gaming machine G4 characterized in that it specifies drawing information for one screen corresponding to means.

According to the gaming machine G4, if there is no image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image specified by the first specification information, the image information corresponding to the first specification information is provided. The third stipulation information is not stored in the third stipulation information storage means. When the third selection means determines that the third definition information corresponding to the first definition information selected by the first definition means is not stored in the third definition information storage means, the drawing information specifying means , drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means. Accordingly, when the third defining information is not stored, the drawing information of the image to be displayed can be easily specified by using the first defining information selected by the first selecting means. 2 The processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the drawing information of the image to be displayed is specified from the new regulation information generated by the regulation information generating means.

In any one of the game machines A3, A4 and E1 to E4, the sub-control means selects a second image displayed in addition to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from among the plurality of display modes. second display determining means for determining a display type; and drawing information provided for each of the plurality of second display types and indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type for each screen. second definition information storage means for storing defined second definition information; a fourth specifying information storage means storing fourth specifying information specifying image information to be transferred to the second image storing means; second selection means for selecting the second specification information from the second specification information storage means; and fourth specification information corresponding to the second specification information selected by the second selection means from the fourth specification information storage means. a fourth selecting means for selecting, and drawing an image to be additionally displayed defined by the second defining information selected by the second selecting means for the first defining information selected by the first selecting means; Adding information for each screen and adding image information to be transferred to the second image storing means defined by the fourth defining information selected by the fourth selecting means to generate new defining information. and the drawing information specifying means, each time the first pointer means is updated, based on the new defining information generated by the third defining information generating means. The drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified. a game machine G5, characterized in that the image information to be transferred specified by is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

According to the game machine G5, in the sub control means, the second display type to be displayed in addition to the image of the display type determined by the first display determination means from among the plurality of display modes is selected by the second display determination means. determined by The second specified information storage means is provided for each of the plurality of second display types, and defines drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing an image to be additionally displayed in the second display type for each screen. Second regulation information is stored. Here, the second specifying information corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means is selected from the second specifying information storage means by the second selecting means. Drawing information of an image to be additionally displayed, which is specified by the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means with respect to the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means by the third specifying information generating means. is added for each screen, new prescribed information is generated. Then, every time the first pointer means is updated by the drawing information specifying means, one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is based on the new definition information generated by the first definition information generation means. The drawing information for each minute is specified. Thereby, when an image of the second display type is additionally displayed to the image of the display type corresponding to the command received from the main control means, the second stipulation information corresponding to the second display type is stored in the second stipulation information storage means. , the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

Further, in the sub-control means, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means is defined in association with the second definition information, out of the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the second definition information. 4 regulation information is stored in the fourth regulation information storage means. Here, the fourth specifying means selects the fourth specifying information corresponding to the second specifying information selected by the second selecting means from the fourth specifying information storing means, and the selected fourth specifying information specifies the the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means, together with the drawing information for each screen of the image to be additionally displayed, which is defined by the second definition information selected by the second selection means, and the third definition information generation means; is added to the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means to generate new stipulation information. Each time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information specifying means specifies image information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the newly generated definition information. At the same time, image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means by the first transfer control means. be done. Thus, it is possible to easily specify image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image defined by the second defining information for the selected second defining information. Therefore, the image to be additionally displayed can be reliably drawn based on the second defining information and displayed on the image display means.

In any one of the game machines A3, A4, and E1 to E4, the first definition information stored in the first definition information storage means includes drawing information necessary for drawing an image of the corresponding display type, as well as The image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information necessary for drawing the image of the display type is specified, and the drawing information specifying means is provided each time the first pointer means is updated. , based on the first specification information selected by the first selection means, the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified and transferred to the second image storage area. The image information is specified, and the first transfer control means transfers the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. Game machine H1 to play.

According to the gaming machine H1, the first definition information stored in the first definition information storage means includes the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the display type. image information to be transferred to the second image storage means among the image information. Then, every time the first pointer means is updated by the drawing information specifying means, based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means, one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is displayed. The drawing information is specified, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image by the first transfer control means. Transferred to storage means. As a result, it is possible to easily determine image information that is necessary for the selected first prescribed information and that should be transferred to the second image storage means, and to transfer the image information to the second image storage means. Therefore, an image to be displayed based on the first defining information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine E1, the first definition information stored in the first definition information storage means includes the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type, in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type. Of the image information, image information which is not held in the third image storage means and which is to be transferred to the second image storage means is defined, and the drawing information specifying means is adapted to update the first pointer means. Each time, drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means, and the drawing information is transferred to the second image storage area. specifying image information to be transferred, and the first transfer control means transferring the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means from the first image storage means to the second image storage means; A game machine H2 characterized by.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type, the first defining information stored in the first defining information storage means includes information necessary for drawing the image of the display type. Among the image information, the image information which is not held in the third image storage means and which should be transferred to the second image storage means is defined. Then, every time the first pointer means is updated by the drawing information specifying means, based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means, one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is displayed. The drawing information is specified, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image by the first transfer control means. Transferred to storage means. As a result, it is possible to easily determine image information necessary for the selected first prescribed information and to be transferred to the second image storage means because it is not held in the third image storage means. Therefore, the image to be displayed based on the first defining information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

In the game machine H1 or H2, the first definition information defines image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each screen in which drawing information necessary for drawing an image of the corresponding display type is defined. and, each time the first pointer means is updated, the drawing information specifying means selects 1 corresponding to the updated first pointer means based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means. A game machine H3 characterized in that it specifies drawing information for a screen and also specifies image information to be transferred to the second image storage area corresponding to the updated first pointer means.

According to the gaming machine H3, the first defining information defines image information to be transferred to the second image storage means for each screen defining drawing information necessary for drawing an image of the corresponding display type. Each time the first pointer means is updated by the drawing information specifying means, one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is displayed based on the first stipulation information selected by the first selection means. is specified, and image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified in correspondence with the updated first pointer means. As a result, the image information to be transferred to the second image storage means can be easily transferred to the second image storage means at a predetermined timing in accordance with the update of the first pointer means. When drawing the first effect to be displayed, image information necessary for the drawing can be reliably transferred to the second image storage means.

In any one of the game machines A3, A4 and E1 to E4, the sub-control means displays a second display mode in addition to the display mode of the display type determined by the first display determination means from among a plurality of display modes. A second display determining means for determining two display types is provided, and the first defining information stored in the first defining information storage means includes drawing information necessary for drawing an image of the corresponding display type, in addition to the drawing information. Drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the second display type to be displayed in addition to the image of the display type is defined for each screen, and the second image is included in the image information necessary for drawing the images. The image information to be transferred to the storage means is defined, and the drawing information specifying means selects image information based on the first defining information selected by the first selecting means each time the first pointer means is updated. to specify drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means, and an image to be additionally displayed on the one screen corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means. The drawing information required for the entire image is specified by specifying the drawing information of the above, and further the image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified. A gaming machine H4, wherein the image information to be transferred specified by the drawing information specifying means is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means.

According to the game machine H4, in the sub control means, the second display is displayed in addition to the image of the display type determined by the first display determining means from among the plurality of display modes. The type is determined by the second display determining means. In addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image of the corresponding display type, the second display displayed in addition to the image of the display type is displayed according to the first definition information stored in the first definition information storage means. Rendering information necessary for rendering a type of image is specified for each screen, and each time the rendering information specifying means updates the first pointer means, the first specifying information selected by the first selecting means is specified. Based on this, drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated first pointer means is specified, and an image to be additionally displayed on one screen corresponding to the second display type determined by the second display determining means. is specified, and the required drawing information for the entire image is specified. Thereby, when an image of the second display type is additionally displayed to the image of the display type corresponding to the command received from the main control means, drawing of the second display type to be additionally displayed is performed from the selected first regulation information. Once the information is specified, the image of the second display type can be easily added and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the display modes displayed on the image display means.

Further, in the sub control means, the first definition information stored in the first definition information storage means includes, in addition to the drawing information necessary for drawing the image, the second image among the image information necessary for drawing the image. Image information to be transferred to the storage means is defined. The image information to be transferred to the second image storage area is specified by the drawing information specification means each time the first pointer means is updated, and the specified image information to be transferred is transferred to the first transfer control means. is transferred from the first image storage means to the second image storage means. As a result, it is possible to easily determine image information that is necessary for the selected first prescribed information and that should be transferred to the second image storage means, and to transfer the image information to the second image storage means. Therefore, an image to be displayed based on the first defining information can be reliably drawn and displayed on the image display means.

In the gaming machine A6, the main control means includes first command generation means for generating a first command for determining the identification information displayed by the dynamic display effect, and sub-control for various generated commands. command transmitting means for transmitting to means, wherein the sub control means determines the identification information displayed by the dynamic display effect based on receiving the first command from the main control means. a determination means for deciding whether the dynamic display effect is displayed, a first time elapse determination means for determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed for the dynamic display effect after the display of the dynamic display effect is started, and the first time elapse determination. a second time elapse determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since it was determined by the means that the time has elapsed; If the reception of the first command is still not recognized at the stage when it is determined that the time has elapsed, re-dynamic display in which the identification information is dynamically displayed again as a display type to be displayed on the image display means A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it determines a performance.

According to the game machine I1, in the sub-control means, the determination means determines the identification information displayed by the dynamic display effect based on the reception of the first command by the main control means. Based on the determined identification information, the gaming machine gives a predetermined game value to the player if the identification information is predetermined identification information. On the other hand, after the display of the dynamic display effect is started, it is determined by the first time elapse determining means whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed for the dynamic display effect, and the first time elapse determining means determines whether the time elapses. It is determined by the second time elapse determination means whether a predetermined time has elapsed since it was determined that the time has elapsed. Then, the first display determination means causes the image display means to display when the reception of the first command is not recognized at the stage when the second time elapse determination means determines that the predetermined time has passed. As the display type, it is configured to determine a re-dynamic display effect in which the identification information is dynamically displayed again. Thereby, the first stipulation information corresponding to the restart effect is selected from the first stipulation information storage means by the first selection means, so that the display on the image display means can be easily switched to the restart effect. In addition, when the identification information cannot be determined because the reception of the first command is not recognized from the main control means despite the completion of the dynamic display effect, the identification information is dynamically displayed again. , the player can be made to recognize that the identification information has not been determined.

In the gaming machine I1, the first stipulation information corresponding to the restart effect is displayed on the image display means so that the display mode of the restart display effect is different from the display mode of the dynamic display effect. , and a game machine I2 that defines image information necessary for drawing an image.

According to the gaming machine I2, the first prescribed information corresponding to the restart effect is displayed on the image display means such that the display mode of the restart display effect is different from the display mode of the dynamic display effect. Since the image information necessary for drawing is defined, the player can be made to clearly recognize that the dynamic display effect has started again without the identification information being determined in the dynamic display effect. .

In the game machine I1 or I2, when the first display determining means determines the second dynamic display effect as the first effect, the drawing information specifying means determines the first dynamic display effect corresponding to the second dynamic display effect. When the image information necessary for drawing an image is specified for the entire screen defined by the stipulation information, the first screen stipulated by the first stipulation information is recursively displayed, and the image information required for drawing the image is displayed for each screen. A gaming machine I3 characterized by specifying image information.

According to the game machine I3, when the first display determination means determines the re-dynamic display effect as the first effect, the drawing information specifying means specifies the first stipulation information corresponding to the re-dynamic display effect. When the image information necessary for drawing the image is specified for the entire screen, the first screen specified by the first specified information is specified again, and the image information required for drawing the image is specified for each screen. is configured to As a result, even if the image information necessary for drawing an image is defined for only a short screen as the first stipulation information corresponding to the re-dynamic display, the re-dynamic display can be repeatedly displayed.

In the gaming machine A6, the main control means controls the type of identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect, and the effect mode type of the dynamic display effect in accordance with the identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect. a second command generation means for generating a second command for notifying the dynamic display effect determination type of the dynamic display effect determined by the dynamic display effect determination means; third command generation means for generating a third command for notifying the type of identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect determined by the dynamic display effect determination means; and sending the generated various commands to the sub control means. command transmitting means for transmitting, wherein the first display determining means responds to the effect mode type notified by the second command on the basis of receiving the second command from the main control device. The sub-control means determines to display a dynamic display effect on the image display means, and the sub-control means, based on receiving the third command transmitted from the main control device, performs the dynamic display Identification information determining means for determining identification information to appear by rendering, the dynamic display rendering determined by the first display determining means, and the identification information determined by the identification information determining means are appropriate. and the first display determination means determines that the dynamic display effect and the identification information are not suitable. In the case, the game machine J1 is characterized in that the dynamic display effect is changed to a dynamic display effect in which dynamic display invisible to the player is continuously performed.

The dynamic display that is invisible to the player means, for example, a state in which the identification information is displayed dynamically at high speed to the extent that the identification information is invisible to the player, or a display in which the identification information is reduced to the extent that it is invisible to the player. It includes various states such as a state in which a snow noise-like image is displayed in which many white dots are randomly displayed so as to cover the identification information.

According to the game machine J1, in the main control means, according to the type of identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect and the type of effect mode of the dynamic display effect according to the identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect is determined by the dynamic display effect determining means. Then, the second command generating means generates a second command for notifying the effect mode type of the dynamic display effect determined by the dynamic display effect determining means, and the third command generating means generates a dynamic A third command for notifying the type of identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect determined by the display effect determining means is generated, and these commands are transmitted to the sub-control means by the command transmitting means. On the other hand, in the sub control means, based on the reception of the second command from the main control device, the dynamic display effect corresponding to the effect mode type notified by the second command is displayed by the first display determining means. A decision is made to display on the display means. Further, the identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect is determined by the identification information determination means based on the reception of the third command transmitted from the main control device. Then, the dynamic display determination means determines whether or not the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination means and the identification information determined by the identification information determination means are suitable. When it is determined that the display effect and the identification information are not suitable, the dynamic display effect is changed to the effect mode in which the dynamic display invisible to the player is continuously performed. Changed to dynamic display production. Here, if the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination means and the identification information determined by the identification information determination means are not suitable, there is a possibility that the command has not been correctly received. In such a case, since the dynamic display effect is displayed in a display mode in which the dynamic display invisible to the player is continuously performed, the dynamic display effect is displayed without giving the player a special sense of expectation. A display effect can be displayed.

In the game machine J1, the sub-control means causes the dynamic display determination means to determine whether the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination means and the identification information determined by the identification information determination means correspond to each other. If it is determined that the dynamic display effect is different from the predetermined identification information and is displayed only in special cases, the identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display effect is changed to identification information that is different from the predetermined identification information. A gaming machine J2 characterized by comprising identification information changing means for changing.

According to the gaming machine J2, when the dynamic display determination means determines that the dynamic display effect determined by the first display determination means and the identification information determined by the identification information determination means are not suitable. is changed by the identification information changing means to identification information different from predetermined identification information and to be displayed only in special cases. Here, there is a possibility that such a situation is caused by the command not being correctly received, and in fact, a game value may be awarded to the player. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J2, in such a case, although it is not the predetermined identification information that gives the player a predetermined game value, the identification information that appears only in special cases is used in the game. Since it can be visually recognized by a player, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation that some kind of game value will be given.

In the gaming machine A6, the first stipulated information corresponding to the dynamic display effect is information specifying the identification information to be displayed on each screen, and is displayed in the previous dynamic display effect up to a predetermined screen. It defines offset information from the identification information, and defines offset information from the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first definition information on and after the predetermined screen, and the sub control means is identification information storage means for storing previous identification information specifying identification information that was displayed in the previous dynamic display effect; and identification information determining means for determining information, wherein the drawing information specifying means, when the first defining information selected by the first selecting means is the first defining information corresponding to the dynamic display effect , up to a predetermined screen corresponding to the changed first pointer means, the previous dynamic display effect defined by the previous identification information stored in the identification information storage means and the first definition information. The identification information to be displayed on one screen is specified based on offset information from the displayed identification information, and after the predetermined screen, the identification information determined by the identification information determining means and the first specifying the identification information to be displayed on one screen based on the offset information defined by the stipulation information and the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first stipulation information; Characteristic game machine K1.

According to the gaming machine K1, the first prescribed information corresponding to the dynamic display effect is information specifying identification information to be displayed for each screen, and is displayed in the previous dynamic display effect up to a predetermined screen. It is configured to define offset information from the identification information, and to define offset information from the identification information to appear in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first definition information after the predetermined screen. Then, in the sub control means, the previous identification information specifying the identification information displayed in the dynamic display effect immediately before is stored in the identification information storage means, and based on the command from the main control means, dynamic display is performed. The identification information to be displayed by the performance is determined by the identification information determining means. Here, the drawing information specifying means corresponds to the changed first pointer means when the first defining information selected by the first selecting means is the first defining information corresponding to the dynamic display effect. Up to a predetermined screen, one screen is displayed based on the previous identification information stored in the identification information storage means and the offset information from the identification information displayed in the dynamic display effect immediately before specified by the first specification information. identifying the identification information to be displayed on the screen, and after the predetermined screen, a dynamic display effect performed based on the identification information determined by the identification information determination means and the first definition information defined by the first definition information The identification information to be displayed on one screen is specified based on the offset information from the identification information to appear in . Here, in the dynamic display effect, it is common to start from the identification information that appeared in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect. can be started based on the identification information displayed by the previous dynamic display effect, while this dynamic display effect ends based on the identification information determined based on the command from the main control device can be made Therefore, even when the first stipulation information is used, it is possible to easily generate an image to be displayed in the dynamic display effect.

In the first stipulation information corresponding to the dynamic display effect, as the information specifying the identification information to be displayed for each screen, offset information from the identification information displayed in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect, this The predetermined screen, which is switched to the offset information from the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first regulation information, is displayed during the dynamic display of the identification information invisible to the player. A gaming machine K2 characterized by being set on a screen where the

The dynamic display that is invisible to the player means, for example, a state in which the identification information is displayed dynamically at high speed to the extent that the identification information is invisible to the player, or a display in which the identification information is reduced to the extent that it is invisible to the player. It includes various states such as a state in which a snow noise-like image is displayed in which many white dots are randomly displayed so as to cover the identification information.

According to the gaming machine K2, in the first stipulation information corresponding to the dynamic display effect, as the information specifying the identification information to be displayed for each screen, the identification information from the immediately preceding dynamic display effect is displayed. A predetermined screen switched from the offset information to the offset information from the identification information to be displayed by the dynamic display performance performed based on the first stipulated information dynamically displays the identification information invisible to the player. Since it is set on the screen displayed during the period, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the switching, so that the player can continue the game without a sense of incongruity.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the identification information is assigned a unique number, and the offset information defined for each screen is the identification information displayed in the previous dynamic display effect. or the number attached to the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first stipulation information in which this offset information is specified, and the number to be displayed on the corresponding one screen A gaming machine K3 characterized in that it indicates a difference from a number attached to identification information.

According to the game machine K3, the identification information is attached with a unique number, and the number attached to the identification information displayed in the immediately preceding dynamic display effect is changed by the offset information defined for each screen. Alternatively, the number attached to the identification information to be displayed in the dynamic display effect performed based on the first specification information in which the offset information is specified, and the number attached to the identification information to be displayed on the corresponding one screen. Since the difference from the offset information is shown, the identification information to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing the identification information with the number attached to the identification information.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B4, C1 to C3, D1 to D3, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I3, J1, J2, K1 to K3, A gaming machine L1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, it is provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displaying the identification information in a fixed manner, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B4, C1 to C3, D1 to D3, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I3, J1, J2, K1 to K3, A gaming machine L2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning balls is provided. Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A6, B1 to B4, C1 to C3, D1 to D3, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I3, J1, J2, K1 to K3, The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as slot machines are configured to be controlled by main control means and sub-control means. For example, while the main control of the game is performed by the main control means, the display control of the effect image on the image display means such as the liquid crystal display device provided in the game machine is performed by the sub control means. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2006-223598)
Here, the sub-control means in the conventional game machine, upon receiving a command transmitted from the main control means, starts a program for displaying an effect image corresponding to the command on the image display means, It is configured to perform display control according to the program.
On the other hand, in recent years, there has been a tendency to diversify the effect images displayed on the image display means in order to further improve the enjoyment of the game.
However, since the conventional game machine is configured to start a program for each effect image to be displayed on the image display means, the activation and execution of the program becomes complicated and enormous as the effect images are diversified. Since a heavy load is applied to the processing, there is a problem that the processing capacity of the sub-control means is limited, and the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited.
This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and is a gaming machine that can easily diversify the display mode of the effect image displayed on the image display means. is intended to provide

10 slot machine (gaming machine)
65 Auxiliary display unit (image display means)
81 Display control device (sub-control means)
101 main controller (main control means)
187 Character ROM (first image information storage means)
188 image controller (image drawing means)
189 resident video RAM (third image information storage means)
190 normal video RAM (second image information storage means)
200 Pachinko machines (game machines)
281 third pattern display device (image display means)
310 main controller (main control means)
313 Audio ramp controller (part of sub-control means)
314 display controller (part of sub-control means)
423a Retained ball number counter (standby number storage means)
432a data table storage area (first defined information storage means, second defined information storage means, third defined information storage means)
434 character ROM (first image information storage means)
435 resident video RAM (third image information storage means)
436 normal video RAM (second image information storage means)
437 image controller (image drawing means)
S1213 (first command generating means)
S1302 to S1305 (dynamic display effect determination means)
S1306 (Second command generating means)
S1307 (third command generating means)
S1701 (command transmission means)
S2202, S2203 (a part of the second transfer control means)
S2507 Confirmation command processing (confirmation means)
S2508 (part of first display determination means)
S2510 (part of first display determination means)
S2515 (Second display determining means)
S2621 (a part of the first selection means)
S2622 (part of second selection means, third selection means)
S2633 (a part of the second selection means)
S2631 (a part of the first selection means)
S2632 (a part of the third selection means)
S2641 (Identification information determination means)
S2652 (a part of the second selection means)
S2711 pointer update processing (first pointer means, second pointer means, third pointer means)
S2712 (drawing information specifying means)
S2714 (first elapsed time determination means)
S2715 (part of first display determination means)
S2716 (part of first selection means, part of second selection means, part of third selection means)
S2721 (Identification information storage means)
S2722 (part of first display determination means)
S2730 (Second elapsed time determination means, part of first display determination means)
S2731 (part of first selection means, part of second selection means, part of third selection means)
S2783 (part of first display determination means, dynamic display determination means)
S2785 (Identification information changing means)
S2724 (a part of the first selection means)
S2731 (part of first selection means, part of second selection means, part of third selection means)
S2784 (part of first selection means, part of second selection means, part of third selection means)
S3002 Resident image transfer setting process (part of second transfer control means)
S3003 Normal image transfer setting processing (first transfer control means)
S3201 (transfer information specifying means)
S3301 (drawing instruction information generating means, instruction information generating means)

Claims (1)

Main control means for performing main control of the game, sub-control means for operating based on commands transmitted from the main control means, and image display means for displaying images based on control by the sub-control means. A game machine that
The sub control means is
an image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means;
a first image storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means;
a first display specifying means for specifying, from among a plurality of display modes, a predetermined display mode for dynamically displaying identification information on the image display means in response to a predetermined command received from the main control means;
a first definition information storage means for storing first definition information defining drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing each display mode for each screen;
a first specifying means for specifying the first prescribed information corresponding to the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means;
updating means for updating each time a predetermined time elapses;
Each time the updating means is updated, drawing instruction information instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means. a drawing instruction information generating means for generating
and a measuring means capable of measuring time,
The image drawing means draws an image for one screen using image information based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means,
The display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means has a predetermined time required from the start to the end of the dynamic display for each display mode,
The sub control means is
specifying the first prescribed information used for the dynamic continuous display of the identification information, which is to be continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed since the display was started in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means; A second specifying means is provided,
When the command transmitted from the main control means is the predetermined command, the sub-control means receiving the predetermined command dynamically displays the identification information of the time corresponding to the predetermined command in a specific display mode. and
Display of the dynamic continuous display of the identification information, which is continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed regardless of which display mode the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means is the display mode of the required time. The mode is the same display mode,
The sub control means is
Confirmation display control means for confirming and displaying the identification information on the image display means when a specific command is received from the main control means;
dynamic continuous display of the identification information when the specific command is not received even after the required time has passed since the display is started in the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means; Continuous display control means,
The confirmation display control means terminates the dynamic continuous display of the identification information and starts the confirmation display of the identification information when a specific command is received from the main control means during the dynamic continuous display period of the identification information. A game machine characterized by performing.

Images